KVS PGT ENGLISH - LIMITED DEPART - Mr. Y Vijaya Kumar Swamy

KVS
PGT ENGLISH
Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan
READING SKILLS
CREATIVE WRITING SKILLS
GRAMMAR
NCERT ENGLISH CLASS XI & XII
Limited Departmental Competition Examination
By
SWAMY VIJAY
2023
Edition
NOTION PRESS
India. Singapore. Malaysia.
This book has been published with all reasonable efforts taken to make the material error-free after the consent
of the author. No part of this book shall be used, reproduced in any manner whatsoever without written permission
from the author, except in the case of brief quotations embodied in critical articles and reviews.
The Author of this book is solely responsible and liable for its content including but not limited to the views,
representations, descriptions, statements, information, opinions and references [“Content”]. The Content of this book
shall not constitute or be construed or deemed to reflect the opinion or expression of the Publisher or Editor. Neither
the Publisher nor Editor endorse or approve the Content of this book or guarantee the reliability, accuracy or
completeness of the Content published herein and do not make any representations or warranties of any kind,
express or implied, including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability, fitness for a particular
purpose. The Publisher and Editor shall not be liable whatsoever for any errors, omissions, whether such errors or
omissions result from negligence, accident, or any other cause or claims for loss or damages of any kind, including
without limitation, indirect or consequential loss or damage arising out of use, inability to use, or about the reliability,
accuracy or sufficiency of the information contained in this book.
No Part of this book may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means, electronic or mechanical
including photocopying, recording or by any transformation storage and retrieval system without the written
permission from the author Mr. Y Vijaya Kumar Swamy.
Written & Designed by Mr. Y Vijaya Kumar Swamy
Copyright© Mr. Y Vijaya Kumar Swamy
ISBN: 978-93-5777-363-8
Dheeraira Charity Foundation

Bengaluru
Price: ₹499
I sincerely thank my dear wife M. Durga Rani, who is a great support for me in life
and my teenage kids Y Virinchy Swamy and Y Yashodananda Swamy who patiently
and uncomplainingly extended their full support, cooperation and made me feel utmost
comfortable during the writing, designing and publishing of this book.
Contents
Preface
Acknowledgments
Introduction
SYLLABUS FOR LDCE WRITTEN EXAM PGT (ENGLISH)
1. Reading Skills
1. Instructions: "Skills, Which Kills or Pills Life."
1.1. Unseen Passage
1.1. Instructions: “Think within the box!”
1.2. Strategy
1.4. Questions for Practice
1.4.1. Answer Key
1.2. Note Making and Summarizing
2. Creative Writing Skills
2.1. Instructions: "Old wine in a new bottle!"
2.2. Strategy
2.3. Short Compositions:
2.3.1 Notice writing:
2.3.2. Poster Preparation:
2.3.3. Process Writing:
2.3.4. Advertisement Writing:
2.3.5 Invitation:
2.4. Long Compositions:
2.4.1. Article Writing
2.4.2. Speech Writing
2.4.3. Debate Writing
2.4.4. Report Writing
2.4.5. Factual Description
2.5. Letter Writing
3. Grammar & Usage
3.1. Instructions:
3.2. Sentence
3.3. Determiners
3.4. Tense
3.5. Clauses
3.6. Modals
4.6. Voice
4.7. Direct Speech and Indirect Speech
5. NCERT TEXT BOOKS
1. Class 11 Lessons
Hornbill
1. Prose
1. The Portrait of a Lady
2. We’re Not Afraid to Die… All Be Together
3. Discovering Tut: The Saga Continues
4. The Browning Version
5. The Adventure
6. Silk Road
2. Poetry
1. A Photograph
2. The Laburnum Top
3. The Voice of the Rain
4. Childhood
5. Father to Son
3. Snapshots
1. The Summer of the Beautiful White Horse
2. The Address
3. Mother’s Day
4. Birth
5. The Tale of Melon City
2. Class 12 Lessons
Flamingo
1. Prose
1. The Last Lesson
2. Lost Spring
3. Deep Water
4. The Rattrap
5. Indigo
6. Poets and Pancakes
7. The Interview
8. Going Places
2. Poetry
1. My Mother at Sixty-six
2. Keeping Quiet
3. A Thing of Beauty
4. A Roadside Stand
5. Aunt Jennifer’s Tigers
3. Vistas
1. The Third Level
2. The Tiger King
3. Journey to the end of Earth
4. The Enemy
5. On the face of it
6. Memories of Childhood
Epilogue
Preface
KVS PGT English: Limited Departmental Competition Examination is a revolution in
the field of competitive examination books available in the market. This is the 'First
book', with the ‘Latest Syllabus’, prescribed by Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan,
available in the market, written by a PGT English, who has been working in Kendriya
Vidyalaya Sangathan for a decade.
This book covers, Reading Skills, Unseen Passage, Note Making and
Summarising, Writing Skills, Notice, Poster, Invitations, Article writing, Debate writing,
Letter Writing, Job Application and etc., Grammar, Tenses, Clauses, Voice, Direct and
Indirect Speech, Transformation of Sentences and act, and all the Lessons, Poems,
and Supplementary Short Stories from NCERT English Text Books for Class XI and
XII, covering Summary of each and every Lesson and ‘Thousands’ of MCQs – Multiple
Choice Questions, are provided in this book, for practice, according to KVS - CBT
(Computer Based Test) Exam pattern.
In fact, the digital book available in eBook format on Amazon.in, in from of kindle
version is sufficient for your preparation, but I highly suggest you all to purchase the
‘Paperback’, as it is handy to carry and convenient to complete preparation and revise
in your free time during your working hours also.
It has been designed meticulously and as per the KVS latest syllabus in according to
CBT – Computer Bases Test format following the latest pattern of Limited Departmental
Competition Examination.
This book is an indispensable tool for the aspirants to clear KVS PGT English, LDCE
Exam conducted by Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan. This book covers all the areas of
the subject specific to clear the LDCE exam and get selected as PGT English.
This book covers entire syllabus for 120 Marks including Section A - Reading Skills,
Section – B Creative Writing Skills, Section - C Grammar & Usage and most
important, Section - D NCERT English Text Books for Class XI and XII, which includes
…
The Portrait of a Lady, A Photograph, "We're Not Afraid to die... if we can be together,
Discovering Tut: the Saga Continues;, The Laburnum Top , The Voice of the Rain ,
Childhood , The Adventure; Silk Road , Father to Son
The summer of the Beautiful White Horse, The Address, Mother's Day, Birth, The Tale
of Melon City
The Last Lesson , Lost Spring , Deep Water, The Rattrap , indigo , Poets and
Pancakes , The Interview , Going Places , My Mother at Sixty-Six , Keeping Quiet , A
Thing of Beauty , A Roadside Stand , Aunt Jennifer's Tigers, The Third Level ; The
Tiger King, Journey to the end of the Earth , The Enemy , On the Face of It , Memories
of Childhood, The Cutting of My Long Hair , We Too are Human Beings
This book contains ‘Thousands of MCQs’ – Multiple Choice Questions for practice,
according CBT (Computer Based Test) Exam pattern. All the information to clear KVS
LDCE PGT English is available in this book.
Most importantly it is written with my personal experience of clearing the entire exam in
different stages starting from Preparation, clearing written exam and attending
Interview at Delhi.
At the end of the book, there is a VERY Important Information and surprise waiting, for
you all. Don’t forget to check the last page.
Mr. Y Vijay Kumar Swamy

PGT English
Kendriya Vidyalaya Hebbal
Bengaluru
Date: 27.11.2022
Acknowledgments
I would be failing in my duty if I don’t mention the people who supported,
encouraged and the sources used, to complete ‘KVS PGT English LDCE’, book within
a short period.
I would like to express my sincere thanks to my dearest friend, Dr. Nagaraju Mandly,
Assistant Professor of English, in English Maulana Azad National Urdu University (A
Central University) Polytechnic, Satellite Campus Bangalore, and Karnataka, India for
his encouragement and support to complete this book.
He meticulously edited this book to the near perfection, to avoid unnecessary errors
creeping into and causing turbulences while preparation.
Under the section ‘NCERT English Text Books for Class XI and XII’, I referred many
websites available online and used their ‘content’ in this book. As for as I am aware, I
used content from the below websites and it’s my moral obligation to mention the list of
the websites used to complete this book in a very short period of time, to help my TGT
friends to become PGT English.
The list of the websites used for ‘content’
For, summary of the lessons, poems and short stories,
www.toppr.com
For MCQs,
https://eklavyastudypoint.com/
www.learninsta.com
I have given full credits to the above websites for the ‘Content’ under ‘NCERT
English Text Books for Class XI and XII’.
Mr. Y Vijaya Kumar Swamy

Author
Introduction
The biggest challenge for all the aspirants to clear any competitive exam in India is
first, understanding the syllabus in correct manner and next deciding the correct
strategy and approach to clear the Examination.
The above decisions take a hell lot of time, energy and a lot of money in these
days, eventually, most of the aspirants, first go with misinterpretation of the proportion
and significance of syllabus given for the exam, next selecting incorrect strategy with
impracticable approach. Thus, combination of the above mistakes, ends millions of
jobseekers, in India, jobless. The problem lies not in the exam syllabus, pattern or etc.,
it is in understanding the syllabus and correct approach to clear the exam.
Hence in this book, utilizing my 20 years of experience in the field of teaching and
attempting many competitive exams and also coming out successfully in many of the
exams, I followed the most practical way to understand the syllabus and the correct
approach to clear all the stages in between you and your dream of becoming PGT
English through LDCE.
You are going to read this book as per the KVS LDCE question paper pattern,
because eventually you are going to face the exam, hence let us prepare in
examination oriented starting with Section – A Reading Skills and Section – B Creative
Writing Skills, Section – C Grammar and Usage and most importantly covering the
Lessons, Poems, and Supplementary Short Stories from NCERT English Text Books
for Class XI and XII.
Let’s start the Journey in a “Correct” way to end in a “Fruitful” way.
SYLLABUS FOR LDCE WRITTEN EXAM PGT
(ENGLISH)
The following is the syllabus provided by KVS in their official websites. The problem
with the below given syllabus is “It is highly Ambiguous in nature”, without any doubt in
the mind of all KVS PGT English LDCE aspirants.
Firstly, the syllabus is NEW, and the pattern of the exam is changed from Offline mode
to ‘Online’ mode – MCQs in CBT from the year 2022.
Secondly, the Section – B Creative Writing Skills topics are mentioned but the type of
questions which are expected to come in the exams, has no clear clarity.
Thirdly, most disturbing is, Section D – Literature, which nobody on earth can figure it
out what exactly one should study from NCERT English Text Books for Class XI and
XII.
However, to clear all the confusion, you have to follow the instructions given in each
section to understand the correct approach to syllabus and preparation.
Section A - READING SKILLS
Reading: Unseen passage (Factual, descriptive or literary) to assess
comprehension, Interpretation inference and vocabulary, Unseen case-based passage
with verbal/ visual inputs like statistical data, charts etc., Note Making and
Summarization based on a passage.
Section B - CREATIVE WRITING SKILLS

Notice, Formal/Informal Invitation and Reply, Letters based on verbal/visual input,
Article? Report Writing, - descriptive and analytical in nature, based on verbal inputs.
Classified. Advertisements, Poster, Writing a Speech in 120-150 words based on
verbal/ visual clues related to some contemporary / age-appropriate topic, Debate on
contemporary topical issues based on visual/verbal inputs
Section C - GRAMMAR AND USAGE
Grammar: Questions on Gap filling (Tenses, Clauses), Questions on re-
ordering/transformation of sentences covering,
1. Determiners
2. Tenses
3. Clauses
4. Modals
5. Voice
Section D – NCERT English Text Books for Class XI & XII
1. Hornbill
2. Snapshots
3. Flamingo
4. Vistas
Hornbill:
The Portrait of a Lady, A Photograph, "We're Not Afraid to die... if we can be together,
Discovering Tut: the Saga Continues;, The Laburnum Top , The Voice of the Rain ,
Childhood , The Adventure; Silk Road , Father to Son
Snapshots:
The summer of the Beautiful White Horse, The Address, Mother's Day, Birth, The Tale
of Melon City
Flamingo:
The Last Lesson , Lost Spring , Deep Water, The Rattrap , indigo , Poets and
Pancakes , The Interview , Going Places , My Mother at Sixty-Six , Keeping Quiet , A
Thing of Beauty , A Roadside Stand , Aunt Jennifer's Tigers,
Vistas:
The Third Level ; The Tiger King, Journey to the end of the Earth , The Enemy , On the
Face of It , Memories of Childhood, The Cutting of My Long Hair , We Too are Human
Beings.
This is the entire syllabus. Now let’s start KVS PGT English LDCE, preparation first
with ‘Reading Skills’ section.
1. Reading Skills
1. Instructions: "Skills, Which Kills or Pills Life."
Reading Skills is one of the very important parts in all the Competitive Exams.
There is no competitive exam in India, without including Reading Skill, can set the
question paper.
Under the Reading Skills Section, we have to study and practice MCQs on TWO
areas. They are
1) Unseen Passage
2) Note Making and Summarization.
1) Unseen passage:
Unseen passages means, the passages which are generally not found in text books.
But these unseen passages hold a great significance in Competitive Exams. They are
not just comprehensions that ask questions. These passages test the student’s ability
to grasp the meaning of the passage, comprehend the information, understand the
theme, plot and subject to answer the questions correctly without any confusion.
These unseen passages may include, Factual, descriptive or literary passages, to
assess comprehension, interpretation inference and vocabulary, Unseen case-based
passage with verbal or visual inputs like statistical data, charts etc.,
2) Note Making and Summarization:

Note Making and Summarizing is a very important skills to learn. It helps the
students to extract important points from the text, articles, essays and etc. while
preparing self-made notes. The main point is to help the students to filter the important
information and to retain it for revision.
Summarization, written in a small paragraph, helps the students to revise the notes
quicks and to retain the information.
In KVS PGT English LDCE exam you may get Three to Five Reading
Comprehensions and MCQs on Note Making and Summarization. So let’s begin the
preparation with ‘Unseen Passages’, without any delay.
1.1. Unseen Passage
1.1. Instructions: “Think within the box!”
Perhaps, this is the most difficult part in the entire KVS PGT English LDCE question
paper to score out and out marks, because most of the candidates, never prepare for
this part, seriously.
The main aim of this part is to know your ability to comprehend the given passage
within its own limits, not involving your personal opinions or beliefs. “Think within the
box!”
Every aspirant believes, being a post graduate in English Literature, they would
definitely, score out and out marks, but without proper practice, you may score some
marks, but not out and out, and that decides your cut off to clear written exam to
become a PGT English in KVS.
Don’t neglect and overconfident in this part. Understand the importance of this part of
the question paper and give due attention to Reading Comprehension part.
1.2. Strategy
Follow the given strategy sincerely.
1. Read the passage swiftly to understand the theme,
subject matter, central idea of the given passage.
2. Read the passage again to comprehend it genuinely
and clearly, don’t skip this at any cost.
3. Read the questions given below the passage now one
by one, till the end of the last word of the given
question.
4. While searching for the answers please don't involve
or add your personal opinions and ideas to the given
passage. If you do so you definitely go with wrong
options.
5. Don't jump into conclusion with your own values,
morals and ethics. Be objective to the passage.
6. Don’t' judge the passage, content and the writer. Be
impartial to the topic and subject. Maintain psycho
logical distance from the topics, subject and writer.
7. Don't try to find the answers to all the questions at a
time. First read the Question No:01
8. Locate the answer in the given passage. Mark or high
light the answer. But don’t bubble the option at this
stage.
9. Try to locate all the answers and mark or highlight
and recheck once again and bubble in the OMR the
correct option to each question carefully.
10. If you can’t find answer to any question in the first at
tempt, don’t get panic. Try second round after com
-pletion of answering other questions. But if every
thing fails then use elimination method, finally, when
not sure about correct answer, if you want to attempt
the question desperately.
11. It’s nothing wrong to leave the questions if too con
fusing as there is “Negative Marking” in the exam. Be
selective, not competitive in this area.
12. Eventually, don't be overconfident. Practice well.
Accept your mistakes and improvise during prepar
ation of the exam.
1.4. Questions for Practice

1.4.1. Answer Key:
Reading Comprehension 1:
1. B 2. C3. B4. B
Reading Comprehension 2:
1. C 2. B3. D4. B5. C
1.2. Note Making and Summarizing
Under Note Making, in Class XII, an unseen passage based on Factual or
descriptive or literary information, within three to four paragraphs, of approximately
200-250 words is given to students for preparing notes and summary out of it.
Note making is a ‘Reading Skill’ and it needs a greater attention to master. Note
Making and Summarizing is a very important skill and it helps students to extract
important points from the text, articles, essays and etc. while preparing self-made
notes. It is like a process of reviewing, connecting and synthesizing ideas from the
given passages. The main point is to help the students to filter the important
information and to retain it for revision.
Summarization, written in a small paragraph, within 50 words, help the students to
revise the notes quicks and to retain the information. It is even useful in higher
education, where a student has to read books and extract the information to prepare a
self-made notes.
In exam, Class XII Note Making is for FIVE marks and Summarizing is for THREE
marks. The marks distribution is as given below. According to the marks distribution
you have to prepare the notes and complete summary writing, within 50 words only.
I. Note Making: 5 Marks
Title: 1
Numbering and indenting: 1
Key/glossary: 1
Notes: 2
II. Summary (up to 50 words): 3 Marks
Content: 2
Expression: 1
In KVS PGT English recruitment examination, you don’t get a passage to make Notes
and write summary, as it is MCQs based CBT, but still to an overall idea you must
learn the process of the note making and summarizing.
Always remember, the notes must be short and easy to understand. The notes
must be written in points not in a paragraphs. If you want, you may prepare a rough
notes before writing in the exam.
The note making and summarizing must be written or prepared in the below mentioned
method,
1. Read the given unseen passage thoroughly first time, as like you read to
solve MCQs under Reading Comprehension part.
2. While reading the passage second time underline the important points
which you think important.
3. Select minimum Eight Sentences and Ten sentences minimum.
4. Out of those Important sentences pick a word or group of words and keep
it as a Title. (Title must be not more than 3 words).
5. Select important word or group of words for Minimum 3 Side Headings
from those 8 - 10 Important Sentences which you have already selected.
6. Select first 2 -3 sentences under first side heading. In the same way
remaining sentences under different side headings.
7. From each sentence remove the structural words and select content words
and start writing the notes in a proper format using numbering and Indentation
and Key words.
8. Insert abbreviation, short forms, and symbols for reference.
9. After preparation of notes, expand the abbreviation, short forms and
symbols used in the notes in a table.
10. At the end write the ‘summary’ by grouping all the important sentences,
already selected by you in to a small paragraph, within 50 words.
11. Notes must be written in a proper format. It includes, Title, Side Headings
and minimum two points and maximum Three Points under each side
heading.
Format of a Notes:
TITLE
1. Side Heading:
1.1
1.2
1.3
2. Side Heading:
2.1
2.2
2.3
3. Side Heading:
3.1
3.2
3.3
Format for Key words
Sl.No Abbreviations Expansion
Format of Summary
TITLE
Summary within 50 words including all the important and necessary information
from the given passage.
Using the above information we practice preparing a notes and complete summary
from the example passage, in a correct format.
1. Read the following passage and answer the questions that follow (8 Marks)
(1) Fashion is a force-a powerful force of constantly altering patterns of change
and growth. Its constant movement affects the fate of the designers and
manufacturers, who distribute it and of course, the lives of the consumers, who
follow what it dictates. All of its facets taken together add up to a multimillion
dollar industry. Fashion today means mega bucks.
(2) Fashion is also a science. It involves known facts and basic principles, and its
actions and reaction can be predicted as these are based on those facts and
principles. Fashion is one of those distinct and unique trades that is highly
dependent on the environment and the changes that are continuously taking
place in it.
(3) For one to make it to the top in the fashion business and stay there, one has to
continue to discover and innovate to fulfil the needs and wants of the
customers. For this, most of the top designers such as Yves Saint Laurent, Karl
Lagerfeld, Claiborne, etc., all rely upon their creativity backed by years of
invaluable experience. In this line of work, instinct and intuition, play a very
major role.
(4) As the power of fashion to influence our lives grows, a number of

misconceptions about it continue to abound. The most common of these is
that the designers and the retailers dictate what the fashion will be, and force
their fancies on the helpless consumers. In reality it is the consumers
themselves, who dictate what the fashions will be, by either accepting or
rejecting the styles and trends that are offered. They are truly, as one ‘fashion
guru’ once said, “Variety vultures.”
(5) The second misconception is that fashion acts as an influence on women only.
Men today, are as much influenced by and, responsive to fashion, as women.
In point of fact, the male fashion industry has been growing at a dizzying rate.
Yes, there was a time when menswear was not exactly worth talking about. It
was staid and unimaginative. But that does not mean that men did not dress-
up according to the latest trends of the day.
(6) There were changes in Western dressing that followed the dictates of the
designers and the fashionable elite trends-setters. These gave the fashion
world the drainpipes in the ’60s, the popular safaris in the ’70s, the denims in
the ’80s and the ethnic wear that has caught on these days.
(7) Fashion today is more lifestyle oriented and quite practical. The modern male
and female want to dress differently for office and leisure. Designers are
becoming more daring, the women as well as the menfolk have a wide choice.
There are different designs for every moment of a busy social schedule-from
work, lunch to afternoon tea, cocktails, dinner and gala banquets.
(8) Lastly, fashion is the force that causes women to raise and lower their skirt
length, straighten or fizz their hair and change from sportswear to dressy
clothes. Fashion is, also that force that influences men to grow or shave off
their moustaches and beards, choose wide or narrow ties and lapels and
change from casual jeans into three piece suits and tuxedo. It is indeed this
dynamic and varied force that adds spice and colour to our life.
1.1. On the basis of your reading of the passage make notes on it using
recognizable abbreviations wherever necessary. (5 marks)
1.2. Write a summary of the above passage in not more than 80 words.
(3 marks)
This is an example passage for your practice. In KVS Exams, as I already mentioned,
you won’t get an unseen passage like the above to prepare the notes and summary,
but it is required to practice to know how to teach note making to students of class XII.
In KVS PGT LDCE you will get MCQs on Note Making and Summarizing, maximum
Three to Five questions.
Notes
THE TREND SETTERS
1. WHAT IS FASHION?
1.1. Fashion -force- powerful force -constantly altering patterns -
change & growth
1.2. Its constant movement- affects - fate -designers-manufacturers
etc.
1.3. In -line of work, instinct- intuition, play -very major role.
2. POWER OF FASHION
2.1. As -power fashion influence -lives grows, a
Number misconceptions -continue abound.
2.2. Second misconception -fashion acts influence women only.- Men
-Much influenced by responsive fashion -women.
2.3. In point fact, the male fashion industry growing dizzying rate. –
Changes Western dressing -dictates designer’s fashionable elite
eg. -Trends-setters.
3. FASHION TODAY
3.1. Fashion today -lifestyle oriented - quite practical.
3.2. The modern male -female -dress Differently- i.e.-office -leisure.
3.3. Indeed - dynamic -varied force - adds spice - colour - our life.
Key words
Sl.No Abbreviations Expansion
1 & and
2 etc. Etcetera
3 e.g. example
4 i.e. That is
Summary
THE TREND SETTERS

Fashion is a popular aesthetic expression at a particular time and in a specific
context. Whereas a trend often connotes a peculiar aesthetic expression and often
lasting shorter than a season, fashion is a distinctive and industry-supported
expression traditionally tied to the fashion season and collections. Style is an
expression that lasts over many seasons and is often connected to cultural
movements and social markers, symbols, class, and culture (ex. Baroque, Rococo,
etc.). Fashion is not only for women but also for At last fashion adds spice and colour
to our life.
In this way, in Class XII exams, you have to prepare notes and summary for the
given unseen passage in the exam. It may be confusing in the beginning, but if you
practice two or three passages for note making and summarising then it will become
easy for you. For your practice,
2. Read the following passage and answer the questions that follow (8 Marks)
1) All the natural things which makes life possible on the earth includes under an
environment like water, air, sunlight, land, fire, forests, animals, plants, etc. It is
considered that earth is the only planet in the universe having required
environment for the life existence. Without environment we cannot guess life
here so we should keep our environment safe and clean to ensure the life
possibility in future. It is the responsibility of each and every individual living on
the earth worldwide. Everyone should come forth and join the campaign for
environment safety.
2) There are various cycles which happen regularly between environment and
living things to maintain the nature’s balance. However, by any means if such
cycles gets disturbed, nature’s balance also gets disturbed which ultimately
affects the human lives. Our environment helps us and other forms of
existence to grow, develop and flourish on the earth for thousands of years. As
human beings are considered as the most intelligent creature made by the
nature on the earth, they have lots of eagerness to know things in the universe
which lead them towards the technological advancement.
3) Such technological advancement in everyone’s life put the life possibilities on
the earth in danger day by day as our environment is destroying gradually. It
seems that one day it becomes as harmful for life as the natural air, soil and
water are getting polluted. Even it has started showing its bad effects on the
health of human being, animal, plants and other living things. Artificially
prepared fertilizers by using harmful chemicals are spoiling the soil which
indirectly getting collected into our body through the food we eat daily. Harmful
smokes created from the industrial companies on daily basis are polluting the
natural air which affects our health to a great extent as we breathe it every
moment.
4) In such busy, crowded and advanced life we must take care of such types of
small bad habits on daily basis. It is true that only a small effort by the end of
everyone can bring a major positive change towards our declining
environment. We should not use the natural resources in wrong ways for just
our selfishness and fulfil our destructive wishes. We should grow and develop
science and technologies for the betterment of our lives but always be sure
that it would not ruin our environment in future in anyways. We should be sure
that new technologies would never disturb the ecological balance.
1.1. On the basis of your reading of the passage make notes on it using
recognizable abbreviations wherever necessary. (5 marks)
1.2. Write a summary of the above passage in not more than 80 words.
(3 marks)
Whereas, In KVS PGT English Recruitment Examination, as I already mentioned,

you will get MCQs on Note Making and Summarizing, maximum Three to Five
questions to test your knowledge about concept, format, marks distribution and etc. on
Note Making and Summarizing. So let us practice MCQs on Note Making and
summarizing now without any delay.
1.2.1. Practice Questions:

1. How do we begin making notes?
a) Test
b) Type
c) Title
d) Sub Heading
2. Recognisable abbreviations include …
a) Symbols
b) Acronyms
c) Short forms and Contractions
d) All the above
3. Abbreviations in note making must be
a) 10 - 12
b) 3 -4
c) 0-1
d) 12-15
4. Which form of abbreviation is UNECF an example of?
a) Symbols
b) Acronyms
c) Short forms and Contractions
d) All the above
5. Note making is divided into
a) Notes
b) Summary
c) Only a
d) Both a & b
6. What percentage of content you must include in your notes?
a) 20%
b) 40%
c) 50%
d) 60%
7. In Note making which one is not a common abbreviation?
a) Sc.
b) Mister.
c) Dr.
d) Govt.
Answers 1. C 2.D 3. C 4. B 5. D6. A 7. B

2. Creative Writing Skills
2.1. Instructions: "Old wine in a new bottle!"
The first and foremost, we should understand that this is the oldest syllabus used
by KVS to conduct LDCE exam.
Creative Writing Skills includes the following topics and it is a bit difficult to understand
the correct approach to study these areas and the best method to adopt to complete
writing ability topics.
Though all the topics are descriptive in nature, but we have to study in objective format
to clear LDCE PGT English. The objective questions are a little confusion.
For example a question from creative writing skills given in the descriptive exam was,
“Write a letter to the editor of a national newspaper within 120 to 150 words, about the
problems faced by the senior citizen in your local area due to lack of proper facilities in
the vicinity. You are Mr. Ajay, a resident of Dwaraka, New Delhi”.
It is easy to write a descriptive answers to the above question than to attempt an
objective question on the topic “Letter to Editor”. Hence the approach to study and
what exactly to study from this old syllabus with latest exam pattern is the biggest
challenge.
However, answer to the question, “What is the correct approach?”
The correct approach to these writing ability topics is
1. Study writing ability in a descriptive manner.

2. Practice the questions for the exam in MCQs format.
Answer to the second question, “What to study, exactly?” The answer is, all the
writing ability topics given in NCERT English Text Books from Class XI & XII must be
completed, keeping the below given syllabus by KVS LDCE, as reference.
Section – B
Writing Ability - Syllabus
B1. One out of two tasks such as factual description of any event or incident, a
report or a process.
B2. Writing one formal letter. Letter types include
a) Business or official letters (for making enquiries, registering complaints, asking
for and giving information, placing orders and sending replies)
b) Letter to the editors (giving facts/figures suggestions / opinions on an issue of
public interest) on contemporary / current issues.
c) Application for a job with CV.
B3. Writing personal opinion /views/stand in an article/debate/speech etc. on a
given socio – cultural issue –in a style/register suitable to the task set. Issues could
relate to
(a) environment
(b) Education
(c) Gender discrimination
(d) Economic disparity etc.
For the post of PGT English, you are supposed to teach English in classes XI and
XII after joining, one must study the following topics under Writing Ability, and practice
MCQs, without fail.
So let us use old syllabus with new strategy!
2.2. Strategy
Follow the given strategy, sincerely.
Let us understand first, what topics to study from NCERT English Text Books of Class
XI and XII.
NCERT English Text Book Class XI & XII
1. Short Compositions:
Notice writing
Poster Preparation
Process Writing
Advertisements
Invitations
Reply to Invitations
2. Long Compositions:
Article writing
Speech writing
Debate writing
Report Writing
Factual Description
3. Letter Writing
3.1. Business or Official Letters

3.2. Letter to Editor
3.3. Job Application or Curriculum Vitae or Resume.
Once the syllabus is clear now let’s start to study each and every topic with
confidence.
2.3. Short Compositions:
Under short compositions we have to study the following topics.
1. Notice writing
2. Poster Preparation
3. Process Writing
4. Advertisements
5. Invitations
6. Reply to Invitations
2.3.1 Notice writing:
2.3.1.1 Information:
2.3.1.1.1. What is a notice writing?

A notice is a formal written communication or announcement intended for a large
group of people. A notice must be written in a proper format to avoid any confusion in
formal written communication. Hence we have to follow the below given points carefully
while writing an official or formal notice.
2.3.1.1.2. How to write a notice writing?
Step 1:Place an Address from where the notice is being issued.
Step 2:Mention the date on which the notice is written or sent.
Step 3:It is preferable to write the Heading of the notice.
Step 4:Must contain Time, Date, Place, relevant information.
Step 5: Mention the name of the person issuing the notice on the left hand side.
Step 6:Use Formal or appropriate language.
Step 7:Word Limit is 50 words.
2.3.1.1.3. What is the format of a notice writing?

HEADDING/ADDRESS
NOTICE
TOPIC/SUBJECT
DATE: DD/MM/YYYY
Body of the notice
(Within 50 words)
BY:
NAME/SIGNATURE
DESIGNATION
2.3.1.1.4.
What is the Example for notice writing?
2.3.1.1.5. What are the mcqs from this topic?

Answers: 14. B 15. D 16. A
Practice Questions
1. What is the word limit of a notice for class XI & XII?

1. 30 words
2. 40 words
3. 50 words
4. 60 words
2. What is written on the top of the notice?
1. Date
2. Address
3. Topic
4. Notice
Answers: 1. C 2. B
Answers: 1. A
2. C 3. D 4. C 5. B 6. A 7. A 8. D 9. B
2.3.2. Poster Preparation:
2.3.2.1.1. What is a poster preparation?

Posters are placards displayed in a public place announcing or advertising something.
Posters may be used to convey information among illiterates or information which can
be understood with a lot of pictures or photos on some issues.
The purpose of designing a poster is to create social awareness about issues
related to current problems and needs, or to advertise or even to extend public
invitations and display notices.
2.3.2.1.2. How to prepare a Poster?
It must be designed very colourful to attract the attention of the readers within a proper
format and including Layout, content and Expression.
Layout must be attractive and pleasing with a catch title, powerful slogans, written in
different shapes and sizes. You may sketch drawings and different shapes related to
the topics.
Content must be the themes or subject of the poster, with correct details of the subject,
like time, date, venue and etc. Name of the issuing authority or institution.
Expression must be grammatically correct without spelling errors. You may use
slogans, phrases and persuasive language.
2.3.2.1. 3. What is the correct format of a poster?
There is no prescribed format for poster writing, whereas, whereas while designing
poster, one has to follow a proper heading, content with less words and more pictures
and at the end information about issuing agency or authority. It must be designed
within a box.
2.3.2.1. 4.
What is the example format for Poster?
Practice Questions
2.3.2.1. 5. What are the mcqs from this topic?

1. A poster is simply a _____, visual medium that you use to communicate ideas
and messages.
a. static
b. fluid
c. motion picture
D. animation
2. What should be part of a poster?

a. Quotes
b. Slogans
c. Pictures
d. All the above
3. In order to create an accurate message on you poster you must create this
as you blueprint.
a) a subject
b) a message
c) an idea
d) a sketch
4. When creating posters the message of poster is considered?

a) A slogan
b) A sentence
c) A statement
d) A thought
5. The ________of the lettering and images on your posters attract
Your viewer’s attention.
a) Flashiness
b) Corners
c) Texture
d) Size
6. The ____ in your poster is considered an essential element.
a) Lines
b) Colour
c) Illustrations
d) Texture
7. To create an impactful poster what must be legible?
a) Colours
b) Ideas
c) Drawings
d) Letterings
8. Which of the following is not the main feature of a Poster?
1. Catchy Slogan
2. Date and Time
3. Comments
4. Venue
Answer key: 1. B 2. D 3. D 4. D 5. D 6. C 7. B 8 C
2.3.3. Process Writing:
2.3.3.1.1. What is a process writing?

Explaining step by step in a systematic way, about a process or procedure of
preparation of something, is known a process writing. It can be the process of
preparation of tea or coffee or can be a procedure of removing antivirus from your
computer.
2.3.3.1. 2. How to write a process writing?
1. It must be written in a step by step manner.

2. Mention the names of ingredients or raw material used with the quantity.
Include all the necessary details chronologically, from the beginning to the
end.
2.3.3.1.3. What is the correct format for Process writing?

1. Write the heading of the process or procedure
2. Insert a table for ingredients or raw materials and quantity.
3. Write the entire process in step by step format.
2.3.3.1.4. What
is the example format for Process writing?
Practice Questions
2.3.2.1. 5. What are the mcqs from this topic?

1. What is the first thing a student should do while starting Process Writing?
a) Brainstorming about the topic
b) Revise the draft
c) Edit the draft
d) Create a draft
2. What should be written at the top of poster?

a) Title
b) Raw materials
c) Steps
d) Issuing authority
3. What should be the end of the poster?
a) Title
b) Introduction
c) Conclusion
d) Thanks
4. What is the purpose of process writing?

a) To write a paragraph
b) To introduce the subject
c) To explain a process in a step by step
d) To explain a topic in scientific manner
5. What is a process writing?

a) is an approach to teaching something new
b) is an approach to practice something new
c) is an approach to discover something new
d) is an approach to invent something new
Answer key: 1. A 2. A 3. C 4. C 5. A
2.3.4. Advertisement Writing:
2.3.4.1.1. What is an advertisement writing?

An advertisement is a public promotional notice or announcement calling the
attention of the public and asking for or offering services like buying and selling
property. It can be used to advertise for bride, bridegroom wanted, lost and found and
etc. Advertisements have a specific format & word limit of 50 words.
2.3.4.1.2. How many kinds of advertisements are available?
Two kinds
1. Classifieds and 2. Commercials
How many types of Classifieds are available?
1. Situation Vacant
2. Situation Wanted
3. To let/Sales
4. Lost/Found/Lost & Found
5. Matrimonial
2.3.4.1.3. How to write an advertisement?

There are different steps to be followed to write different advertisements.
1. Situation Vacant
Step 1: Post to which a candidate is required.

Step 2:Qualification, experience, age, date of birth
and sex
Step 3:Salary offered and perks promised
Step 4:Mailing address and contact number
Step 5: Interview Schedule
Step 6:Begin with wanted or required
Step 7:Mode of applying
Step 8: Any other relevant and important informa
-tion
2. Situation Wanted
Step 1: Post to which a candidate is applying.

Step 2:Qualification, experience, age, date of birth
and sex
Step 3:Salary expected.
Step 4:Mailing address and contact number.
Step 5: Available dates and timings
Step 6:Begin with wanted or required
Step 7:Mode of applying
- tion
3. To let/Sales and Purchase
Step 1: Write down the particulars of the property, price range

And present condition.
Step 2: Classify the terms and conditions.
Step 3: Any other details to buy your sale/purchase.
Step 4: Location and other facilities if any.
Step 5: Mailing or contact address.
Step 6: For Vehicles point out the model, colour etc.
Step 7: For household goods give the brand, model,
year of manufacturing, condition and ex
pected price etc.
tion
4. Lost/Found/Lost & Found
Step 1: Mention the name of place, time and date where the item was lost or
found.
Step 2:Mention the relevant particulars of the articles lost or found.
Step 3:Mention the correspondence address or the person to be contacted.
Step 4:Mention if there is any special incentive to be given
5. Matrimonial
Step 1:Age, weight, height and sex.

Step 2:Caste, creed and religion.
Step 3:Job, qualification, place of posting.
Step 4:Contact Address
Step 5:Any other relevant specification if any.
2.3.4.1.4. What
is the correct format for an Advertisement?
2.3.4.1.5.
What is the example format for an advertisement?
Practice Questions

1. An advertisement is a ______
A-Personal announcement
B- Public announcement
C- Private announcement
D- Invitation
2. What Is Motive Of An Advertisement?
A- To influence masses
B- To promote the sales of product
C- Both a and b
D- None
3. In an advertisement, name and address of the company are ____ details.
A- Useless
B- Essential
C- Waste
D- None
4. Which Of The Given Advertisement Is Written By An Employer?
A- Situation wanted
B- Situation vacant
C- Missing
D- None
5. Classified advertisements are always written _______?
A - In bracket
B- In 10-12 para
C- Inside a box
D- None
6. _____ Advertisements are written by a person looking for tenants for his/ her
property.
A- Situation vacant
B- Situation wanted
C- To-let
D- Accommodation wanted
7. One must always add ____ at the end of an advertisement?
A- Thanks
B- Welcome
C- Dear
D- Contact details
Answer key: 1. B 2. B 3. B 4. B 5. C 6. C 7. D
Exercise 2:
1] An advertisement is a __________
A- Personal announcement
B- Public announcement
C- Private announcement
D- Invitation
2] What Is Motive Of An Advertisement?
A- To influence masses
B- To promote the sales of product
C- Both a and b
D- None
3] An advertisement is a ____ of words.
A- Play
B- Dance
C- Fun
D- None
4] In an advertisement, name and address of the company are ____ details.
A- Useless
B- Essential
C- Waste
D- None
5] Which Of The Given Advertisement Is Written By An Employer?
A- Situation wanted
B- Situation vacant
C- Missing
D- None
6] Classified advertisements are always written _______?
A- In bracket
B- In 10-12 para
C- Inside a box
D- None
7] _____ advertisements are written by a person looking for tenants for his/ her
property.
A- Situation vacant
B- Situation wanted
C- To-let
8] One must always add ____ at the end of an advertisement?
A- Thanks
B- Welcome
C- Dear
D- Contact details
9] In a missing person/pet advertisement, mentioning of _____ must be avoided?
A- Physical features
B- Character traits
C- Phone number
D- None
10] Which of the following classified advertisement is written by a person in need
of a job?
A- Situation vacant
B- To-let
C- Situation wanted
11] Which Of The Following Is Not A Type Of Classified Advertisement?
A- Lost and found
B- Missing
C- Tour and travels
D- Event on annual function
12] What Is Written On The Top Of A Classified Advertisement?
A- Time
B- Date
C- Designation
D- Heading
13] Which Of The Following Is Used To Write A Classified Advertisement?
A- Complete sentences
B- Phrases
C- Complex sentences
D- Negative sentences
14] Which Of The Following Classified Advertisement Requires A Brief Description
Of Person?
A- To-let
B- Situation wanted
C- Missing
D- None
15] What Makes Classified Advertisements Perfect?
A- Well written phrases
B- Catchy heading
C- Clear details
D- All these
Answer key: 1. B 2. C 3. A 4. B 5. B 6. C 7. C 8. D 9.B

10. C11. D 12.D 13. B14. C15.D
2.3.5 Invitation:
2.3.5.1.1 What is an Invitation writing?
An invitation writing is a request, a solicitation, or an attempt to get another person

to join you at a specific event or celebrations. Invitations are generally printed cards
through which we invite our guests on some auspicious occasions like wedding,
birthday, wedding anniversary, house warming, the inauguration of a shop, outlet or
even factory and etc.
2.3.5.1.2. How many kinds of invitations are available?
Two kinds
1. Formal Invitation 2. Informal Invitation
Formal invitations are written to invite others for formal occasions like business
meeting, school functions and etc.
Informal invitation are written to invite others for informal occasion like weddings,
birthday party, kitty party and etc.
Formal and Informal Invitations formats may vary depending upon the kind of
invitee/s. These two types of invitations can be printed on cards or even in the form of
letters.
Generally formal invitation, used to invite a large number, for occasions like
Independence Day Celebrations the format is ‘Card Type’. But for the same occasion, if
inviting the chief guest, the formal invitation can be write in form of a formal letter
format.
In the same way for informal occasions like wedding, birthday, and wedding
anniversary, while inviting invitees in a large number, then the format is “Card Type”.
Hence the nature of occasion and the number of invitees, decides the format of an
invitation.
2.3.5.1.3. How to write a Formal or Informal Invitation?

An invitation written must address and answer the following questions: who is inviting,
whom is being invited, what is the occasion, when it schedule, where is the place of the
event, what is the time of the event and for what. The formal or informal invitation must
include the following details clearly,
Name of the occasion or event

Name/s of the invitee/s
Name/s of the host/s
Date, time and venue.
Name of the chief guest or special invitees, in case of an official invitation.
And any other relevant information
2.3.5.1.4. What is the format a Formal Invitation – group?
When
the invitation is meant for a large number of people, then “Card Type” format
must be used. The following is the example for format for a Formal Invitation
which is written in a card type. It has name of the host, chief guest or
designation, date, time and venue.
2.3.5.1.5. What are the main features of a Formal Invitation – Card?
1. Must be written in the third person.

2. Name of the Chief Guest must appear prominently.
3. Simple present tense is to be used.
4. There is no signature of the host.
5. The abbreviation RSVP (French: repondez silvers plait) i.e. ‘Please reply’ is
written below on the left side with name(s), address and phone number of the
host(s).
6. Put the invitation into a box.
7. Do not exceed 50 words
What is the format a Formal Invitation - Individual?
When the invitation is meant for a single individual, then “Official Letter Type”
format must be used. The following is the example for format for a Formal
Invitation which is written in a letter format. It has name of the invitee, name of the
occasion, date, time and venue.
KV Hebbal
Sadhashiva Nagar
Bengaluru
October 10, 2022
Mrs. Arundhati Roy
Dwaraka
New Delhi
Dear Mam
Subject: Invitation as Chief Guest
The Literary club of our school is enacting the play ‘The God of small things’
on 20th October, 2022 in our school auditorium from 8 pm to 10 pm. On
behalf of literary club, I would like to extend a cordial invitation to you to be the
Chief Guest at the function. It would be our privilege if you consent to grace
this occasion with your esteemed presence.
Yashodananda Swamy
Secretary (Literary Club)
2.3.1.5.6. What are the main features of a Formal Invitation – Letter?
Must be written in the First person.

Must be written in official letter format.
Name of the invitee or the Chief Guest must be included.
Simple present tense is to be used.
Signature of the host at the end.
Put the invitation into a box.
Do not exceed 50 words
2.3.1.5.7 What
is the format of an Informal Invitation?
2.3.1.5.8. What are the main features of an informal invitation?
Must be written in an informal letter format.

Write in the first person.
Date must be written in the invitation
Salutation- Dear ‘name of the invitee”
End the letter with ‘yours sincerely’.
Sender’s address towards the left-hand side.
Tense depends on the occasion and purpose.
2.3.1.5.9. What are the types of Replies to invitations available?

There are two types of replies for formal and informal invitations
1. Acceptance 2. Refusal or Decline
Acceptance and Refusal or Decline replies for formal and informal invitations, can
be written in a simple paragraph or in a formal letter format.
Formal Replies to Formal Invitations
Formal Replies to Informal Invitations
Practice Questions
1. An invitation can be ___?

a) Formal
b) Informal
c) Both a & b
d) None of the above
2. What is the tone of a formal invitation?
a) informal but courteous

b) relaxed and descriptive
c) polite and pleasant
d) exciting and exuberant
3. What is the tone of an in formal invitation?
a) informal but courteous

b) relaxed and descriptive
c) polite and pleasant
d) exciting and exuberant
4. How many types of replies to invitations are available?
a) Formal reply
b) Informal reply
c) Both a & b
5. What type of invitation is to write when inviting the Present of India for your
school annual day celebrations?
e) Formal
f) Informal
g) Both a & b
h) None of the above
Answer key: 1. C 2. C 3. A 4. C 5. C 6. F
Exercise 2:
1. Printed invitation cards do not contain:
a) name of the host

b) name of the addressee
c) venue of the function
d) date of the function
2. Formal typed invitation to a VIP must prominently contain
a) designation of the host

b) name of the addressee
c) number of guests at the function
d) time of pickup of the VIP from the residence
Fill up the blanks with the appropriate answer option

Mr. & Mrs. Y V K SWAMY
Q.3. ———
Question 4. ——– of the
GOLDEN WEDDING ANNIVERSARY
of their Grandparents and congratulate them
with a dinner party
at their residence AU 202, Ultimate Signature, Bangalore
At 4:30 p.m.
On 25 October, 2022.
RSVP
Mr. & Mrs. Y V K SWAMY Phone: 944070xxxx
Q.3.Fill up the blanks with the appropriate answer option

(A) Request your company
(B) Requesting the presence of your pleasure
(C) Request the pleasure of your presence
(D) Hereby request you
Q.4.Fill up the blanks with the appropriate answer option
(A) On the prestigious occasion
(B) On the benign occasion
(C) On the traditional occasion
(D) On the auspicious occasion
Answer key: 1. B 2. B 3. C 4. D
III. You are Rani/ Raja of AU-201, Ultimate Signature, Bengaluru. You have just
purchased a new house. You decide to have a housewarming ceremony and invite
your cousin Vani. Write the invitation in 50 words giving all necessary details.
AU-201, Ultimate Signature, Bengaluru
20 October 2022
Question 1. ——-I invite you at the house-warming ceremony of our newly

purchased house in AU-201, Ultimate Signature, Bengaluru. The ‘Puja’ is at 10 a.m. It
will be followed by lunch at 1.00 p.m. Question 3 _______ do join us on this Question
2. ———- day. It will be great fun to have you by my side on this special day. Question
4. ——— Rani
Question 1
(A) Dear Vani
(B) Subject: House warming ceremony
(C) ## 20, Urban Estate Chennai
(D) Puja at 10 a.m.
Question 2
(A) You must
(B) You have to
(C) kindly
(D) obliged
Question 3
(A) Traditional
(B) auspicious
(C) authentic
(D) benign
Question 3
(A) Yours truly
(B) Yours sincerely
(C) Yours lovingly
(D) Yours faithfully
Answer key: 1. A 2. C 3. B 4 C
2.4. Long Compositions:
Under long compositions we have to study the following topics.
1) Article writing
2) Speech writing
3) Debate writing
4) Report Writing
5) Factual Description
2.4.1. Article Writing
2.4.1.1. What is article writing?
A piece of writing using persuasive language, supported by facts, tries to mound the
opinions of the readers, towards the points and ideas, established by the writer in the
piece of writing.
Article writing is a very popular in functional grammar. Every day we find so many
articles published in magazines and newspapers. The purpose of writing an article is
that it should be published in any newspaper or magazine or journal so as to make
some difference to the world.
2.4.1.1.2 How many kinds of articles are available?
There are four kinds of articles in general,
1. Expository articles
2. Persuasive articles
3. Descriptive articles
4. Narrative articles
2.4.1.1.3. What are the sources for article writing?

There are two sources,
1. Verbal input
2. Visual input
2.4.1.1.4. How to write an article writing?

Identify the purpose or motto behind writing the article. Once the purpose is
identified, then find out who the targeted readers are and what the general question
they might be having on the topic. Collect the facts and then furnish those in a proper
format. The format includes, Title of the article. The title must be written in capital letter.
Next by whom the article is being written must be recorded under the title. Then
divide the entire article into small paragraphs maximum three. In the first paragraph,
introduce the topic and basic details. In the second paragraph explain the topic clearly
with facts and data. In the third paragraph conclude the article with either popular
opinions or your own.
2.4.1.1.5. What is the exact format for an article writing?
TITLE
By-
I Beginning/Introduction
II Middle/Explanation
III End/Conclusion
(Not more than 100 – 150 words)
2.4.1.1.6.
What is the example format for an article writing?

Practice Questions
1. What should come on the top of the article?
a) Introduction
b) Explanation
c) Heading/Title
d) Written by
2. What should come after the title of the article?
a) Introduction
b) Explanation
c) Heading/Title
d) Written by/by line
3. How many paras should there be in an article?
a) 1-2
b) 2-3
c) 3-4
d) Any number
4. What should be the first para of the article?

a) Introduction
b) Explanation
c) Heading/Title
5. How should one end the article?
a) Introduction
b) Explanation
c) Conclusion
6. What can be added to write an attractive article?
a) Quotes
b) Proverbs
c) Facts
d) All the above
Answer key: 1. C 2. D 3. C 4. A 5. C 6. D
2.4.2. Speech Writing
2.4.2.1. What is a speech writing?
It is a piece of writing practice before delivering speech in public. Speech writing is
used to write a speech, which is to be spoken in front of audience. Speech writing is
another important communication skill in functional English.
Whereas when practicing speech writing for exams, it is an art of writing with
proper grammar and expression to convey a message to all the readers.
2.4.2.2. How to write a speech writing?

It is also like an article writing, with three to four paragraphs, without any title.
The following points to be followed while writing a speech.
1. It must be written in a proper format with a language that is persuasive and

powerful.
2. Use 1st person narration. But don’t speak always about you and your
achievements. Don’t brag.
3. Must begin with proper introduction, explanation and ends with thought
provoking conclusion.
4. Introduction must be attractive or funny. You may use an anecdote,
quotation, statistical data or a thought provoking question at the beginning of
the speech writing.
5. You may support the topic or oppose the topic or even you can mix both in
a balanced way to express your opinion.
6. Include authentic information, facts, data and etc. in your speech writing to
bring credibility for your speech writing.
7. Before concluding you may give your valuable suggestions, opinion,
arguments and etc.
8. At the end don’t forget to write, Vote of thanks. It is thanking your audience
for listening to your boring speech!
9. End your speech writing with ‘speech by’ at the last. Write the name of the
person who wrote the speech.
What is the exact format for a speech writing?
The speech writing must be written within three to four paragraphs without any side
headings. But the speech must be divided into the following parts.
1. Greetings
2. Introduction self and the topic
3. Body of the speech/Explanation
4. Conclusion
5. Vote of thanks
6. Speech by
1. Greetings: A great Good Morning to Honourable Principal, Respected
Teachers and My dear friends.
2. Introduction self and the topic: Today! I stand before you to deliver a short
speech on ‘……………’ I hope you all will be very keen to listen to my speech.
3. Body of the speech: Express your views, opinions, ideas and etc. with
supporting data, facts and etc. divide the body of the speech into further small
paragraphs if required to emphasize any information.
4. Conclusion: I would like to conclude my speech ……
5. Vote of thanks: Thanks for listening to my speech patiently.
6. Speech by: Name of the person. Don’t’ sign at the end of the speech. If
the designation is also provided in the question then you may add designation
after the name of the person.
2.4.2.4.
What is the exact format for an article writing?
2.4.2.5. What is the example format for an article writing?

Practice Questions
1. What should come on the top of the speech?
a) Introduction
b) Explanation
c) Heading/Title
2. What should come at the beginning of the speech writing?
a) Introduction
b) Explanation
c) Greetings
3. Where do we write the main points in a speech writing?
a) Introduction
b) Explanation
c) Greetings
d) Conclusion
4. What should come after the greetings in a speech writing?

a) Self-Introduction
b) Explanation
c) Heading/Title
5. How should one end the speech writing?
a) Introduction
b) Explanation
c) Conclusion
d) Speech by/by line
6. What can be added to write an attractive speech?
a) Quotes
b) Proverbs
c) Facts
d) All the above
Answer key: 1. D 2. C 3. B 4. A 5. D 6. D
2.4.3. Debate Writing
2.4.3.1. What is a debate writing?
Debate words origins from Old French ‘debatre’, which means “to fight, contend,
and debate, also literally to beat down”.
The word debate literally means discussion or argument or a contention by words.
It is a very official form of writing where the speaker or writer expresses his or her
opinions either in favour of the motion or against the motion. This is the major
difference between article writing and debate writing.
A debate needs to be written logically in order to persuade the reader. The
arguments stated should be clear, precise and bold. It should include the facts,
personal observations and logical statements. Make sure to present the collected
information in chronological order. The topic should be clearly introduced, and a
concrete conclusion should also be presented. Debates take place in assemblies,
politics and school competitions.
2.4.3.2. How to write a debate writing?
1) First, you have to select a side or take a firm stand whether to support the
motion or oppose the motion, depending upon the topic given and your
personal values, opinions and etc.
2) Second, think about the facts, data, points and etc. you can include in support
of your argument, to support you point of view.
3) The language used and tone must be bold, commanding and confidence with
facts as well as influential in nature.
4) Thirdly, think about the expected cross questionings or opposite view points,
on the given topic from other opponents.
5) Fourthly, you have to end your debate writing with a question for your
opponents.
6) Once all the information is formed in your mind, then start writing the debate
in a proper format.
7) Try to use famous quotes, proverbs and etc. in your writing.
8) Thank the opponents and audience at the end of the debate.
2.4.3.3. What is the exact format for a debate writing?
The debate writing must be written within three to four paragraphs without any side
headings. But the debate must be divided into the following parts.
1) Greetings/Salutation
2) Introduction self and the topic
3) Body of the debate/Explanation
4) Rebuttal
5) Conclusion
6) Thanks
1) Greetings: A great Good Morning to Honourable Judges, and my dear worthy
opponents.
2) Introduction self and the topic: “Today! I stand before you to speak in favour of
the motion or against the motion ……………. I hope you all will be very keen
to listen to my views.”
3) Body of the debate: Express your views, opinions, ideas and etc. with
supporting data, facts and etc. divide the body of the debate into further small
paragraphs if required to emphasize any information. Your writing/point of
view must go against the topic or other speakers. Use appropriate language
which is suitable for the issue.
4) Rebuttal: Before concluding, you must ask/write a question to the others or
opponents, highlighting issues against their point of view, from the given
topic.
5) Conclusion: “Hence, I would like to conclude my ……” Conclude your debate
writing with a very logical point, which others feel helpless to agree or accept
your point of view is genuine.
6) Vote of thanks: Thank all the present over there for listening to your opinion,
ideas and etc. patiently.
2.4.3.4.
What is the exact format for a debate writing?
2.4.3.5.
What is the example format for a debate writing?
Practice Questions
2.4.3.6. What are the mcqs from this topic?
1. What should come first in the debate writing?

1. Introduction
2. Explanation
3. Heading/Title
4. Salutation
2. Debate is a ___________ communication?
1. Formal
2. Informal
3. Both a & b
4. Vertical
3. Which of the following debate is on spot?
1. Written
2. Extempore
3. In advance
4. All the above
4. What should come after the greetings in a debate writing?
1. Self-Introduction
2. Explanation
3. Heading/Title
4. Written by/by line
5. How should one end the debate writing?
1. Introduction
2. Explanation
3. Conclusion
4. Complimentary close
6. What can be added to write an attractive debate?
1. Quotes
2. Proverbs
3. Facts
4. All the above
Answer key: 1. D 2. A 3. B 4. A 5. D 6. D
2.4.4. Report Writing
2.4.4.1. What is a report writing?
A report is a form of formal communication, in writing, which comprises a brief
description of an incident, event, experience and etc. which was already completed in
the past.
Report writing presents the first hand evidence of an incident or event, happened
in the past. So it must be written mostly in past tense, indirect speech and passive
voice. Only present tense may be used to statements made by the speakers in the
events.
There are two kinds of report writings. They are
1) Reports for newspapers
2) Reports for school magazines
2.4.4.2. How to write a report writing?
1. Must write a suitable and relevant title at the top of the report in capital
letters and underline the heading.
2. Must mention the name of the reporter, date of the report and place of the
report after the Title or heading of the report.
3. Write introduction to the report. Use side heading ‘Introduction” and you
may begin the introduction,
“This is a brief report on the {event} (Independence day celebrations)

celebrated at {name of the institution} KV Hebbal, Bengaluru, {date} on 15.08.2022
{place} in the school morning assembly ground {timings} from 8:30 am to 9:30
am.”
4. Next side heading is “Explanation”. Under this details should be written in

a systematic and logical manner. The details about ‘Why’ and “how” exactly
the event, incident and etc. happened or done or completed in the past. So
the content must consist the following [Content}
i. When ii. Where iii. Why iv. What
5. Make use of proper language and provide authentic facts.

6. Don’t add any information which is not based on facts or your personal
opinions, ideas and etc.
7. Use Simple Past Tense, Passive voice and indirect speech because the
event, incident and etc. are already completed in the past.
8. Use simple present tense, when writing about the exact lines of the
speaker spoken during the event or incident and while writing universal truths,
statements and etc.
9. End the report writing with “Conclusion”. You may use the same
introduction to write under conclusion but change the verb ‘is’ to ‘was’.
“This ‘was’ a brief report on the {event} Independence day celebrations
celebrated at {name of the institution} KV Hebbal, Bengaluru, {date} on 15.08.2022
{place} in the school morning assembly ground {timings} from 8:30 am to 9:30
am.”
10. Write the entire report writing with in a box.
2.4.4.3. What is
the exact format a report writing?
2.4.4.4. What is
the example format a report writing?
Practice Questions

1. The report is always written in ______ manner.
a) Data biased manner
b) Horizontal manner
c) Sequential manner
2. The report is always written in ______ language.
a) Formal
b) Informal
c) Both a & b
3. Which is not part of the report writing?
e) Date of the report

f) Place of the report
g) Name of the reporter
h) Greetings
Answer key: 1. C 2. C 3. D
2.4.5. Factual Description
2.4.5.1. What is a factual description?
“Factual description of someone or something is actually a detailed
an account which explains what they are or what they look.”
In the simplest ways, describing the facts, in a couple of paragraphs, can be called
as factual description. This is very similar to ‘process writing’ which you studied under
short compositions. It is also very close to ‘Report writing’ which you just studied, under
long compositions
The difference between process writing, report writing and factual description is,
process writing is used to describe a process or procedure and report writing, for
recording the past events based on facts, written in past tense.
Factual description is a written process or an event in step by step account of the
activity, very detailed. It can be used to describe an event, incident, person, place,
object and etc. in detail.
2.4.5.2. How to write a factual description?
The factual description must be written within three to four paragraphs without any
side headings dividing in to the following parts.
1) Title
2) Introduction to the topic
3) Body of the factual description
4) Conclusion
a) Must write a suitable and relevant title at the top of the factual description in
capital letters and underline the heading.
b) Start general description of the place, person or experience, and move to
specific details gradually.
c) If it is a description of a place or building or monument then must include
place, architecture, history and etc. properly.
d) If it is a person, include the physical appearance, mannerisms, attire,
achievement, attributes and etc.
e) If it is an experience, then include your genuine feelings, emotions and how
you felt and etc. without any exaggeration.
f) Include any additional details if required.
g) Use appropriate language suitable to the occasion.
h) Use present tense or past tense according to the situation.
i) Write factual description within a box.
2.4.5.3. What is the exact format for a factual description?
TITLE
Introduction
Description
Additional details
Conclusion
2.4.5.4. What is the example format for a factual description?

AADHAR ENROLMENT PROCEDURE
The children under 5 years of age are allowed by government of India to enrol
for aadhar card. The procedure is the parents of the child either can apply
online or offline in the aadhar enrolment centres. However, biometric
information is not collected for children under the age of 5 years. For children
under 5 years of age, their Aadhar is linked to one of their parents or
guardians. Such children need to submit their biometric information
(Photograph, ten Fingerprints and two Irises) once they attain the age of 5
years. These biometrics needs to be updated again when they attain age of
15 years.
Practice Questions

1.____ is a collection of related sentences dealing with a single topic.
a) Report writing
b) Debate writing
c) Factual description
2.____ a process or an event requires a step by step account of an activity,
experiment, procedure.
a) Report writing
b) Debate writing
3. In which of the following language should be semi-formal in nature.
a) Report writing
b) Debate writing
4. Which of the following is very similar to process writing?
a) Report writing
b) Debate writing
5. A factual description need not to have …….
a) Title
b) Introduction
c) Facts related to the topic
d) Written by
Answer key: 1. C 2. C 3. C 4. C 5. D
2.5. Letter Writing
2.5.1. What is a Letter Writing?
Letters are written messages in a proper format, used to communicate in writing for
formal and informal occasions.
There are two types of letters
1. Formal Letter
2. Informal Letters
1. Formal Letters: These are written for official communication. They are
1. Business or official letters (for making enquiries, registering complaints,

asking for and giving information, placing orders and sending replies).
2. Letters to the Editor (giving suggestions on an issue).
3. Application for job.
2. Informal Letters: These are written to friends, family members and etc.
2.5.2. How to write a letter writing?
In all kinds of letters, the below points must be included. They are
1. Address of the sender.

2. Date.
3. Address of the receiver.
4. Greeting or Salutation.
5. The message or The Body of the Letter.
6. The subscription or Leave taking.
7. Signature with designation.
8. The superscription on the envelope.
1. The Heading: It consists Address of the sender, Date and Address of the
receiver. It must be written at the top left hand corner of the first page, as per the
NCERT (American Format).
Interchange of address of sender and receiver is allowed, depending upon the
occasion. The address must be written within three lines starting with house/flat/room
number, name of the city/town/village and ends with pin code.
The date must be written either in British format or in American format.
British format: DD/MM/YYYY
American Format: MM/DD/YYYY
Date can be even written in the following formats,
September 6, 2019
6th September, 2019
6th Sep., 2019
2. Greeting or Salutation:
For official or business letters the Salutation must be very formal
Dear Sir, Dear Madam, Sir, Mam,
Respected Sir is wrong, because sir itself is the most respectable way to address
someone.
For informal or friendly letters the Salutation must be very informal
Dear Father, My dear Mother, Dear Uncle, Dear Rani and etc.
The position of the salutation is at the left hand side of the first page after the
address of the receiver or sender.
*Note: Some may prefer to write ‘subject’ before salutation and some other, after
salutation. But the most appropriate is writing ‘subject’ after the salutation.
Hence after the salutation, before the body of the letter ‘subject’ should be written.
3. The Message or The Body of the Letter: It must be divided into paragraphs. Use
simple and official language and direct to the point. Use tense according to the
situation.
4. The subscription: It is also known as Leave taking or Complimentary Close. For
official or business letters the subscription varies depending upon the addressee.
Yours obediently or obediently yours (Generally used when writing to superiors)
Yours sincerely or sincerely yours (Used when writing to colleagues or people in the
same official positions or levels or ranks)
Yours faithfully or faithfully yours (Used commonly in official letters)
Yours truly or Truly yours (Used in Letters to Editors)
For informal or friendly letters
Yours friendly or Friendly yours
5. The signature: the signature or name should be done in running handwriting but
it must be legible. Designation may be written under the signature or name in business
or official letter. In informal letter the signature or name is enough.
6. The superscription on the envelope: It is also part of the letter. It is actually the
address of the receiver written on the cover or envelop. The receiver’s address must
be written clearly with name, complete address with pin code.
Mr. Y V K Swamy
PGT English
K V Hebbal
Sadhashiva Nagar
Bengaluru - 560080
2.5.3. How exactly to write a Business or Official letter?
1. Write the letter in full block format, it is known as American Format of

Letter writing (i.e., to the left). Address of the sender, date and address of the
receiver must be written to the left.
2. Salutation and subject to be written according the formal and informal
occasion to the left. Reference may be added after subject in case of
continuous correspondence between two people or parties.
3. Under reference, write other correspondence, quote date of the letter(s),
reference numbers, and file numbers, order numbers, cheque number with
date.
4. Under the body of the letter, mention your reason for writing in the first
paragraph itself. Always include the data, facts and information without
confusion. Language must be very formal and courteous in nature with a
pleasant tone.
5. No punctuation marks to be used in American Format of letter writing other
than ‘,’ for pause and ‘.’ Full stop to end the sentence.
6. Do not mix up the British and the American format.
How exactly to write a Letter to Editor?

1. Mention the complete address of the newspaper.
1. The Editor
2. The times of India
3. Bangalore – 560064
2. Use the standard opening statement, ‘Through the columns of your

esteemed newspaper, I would like to highlight the issue (name the issue) to
the general public or authorities’ concerned (name of the office or authority
related to the issue).
3. Your opening sentence must be very attractive to the readers to make
them to read further.
4. Explain the importance of the issue, problems due to the issue with
supporting data, information and etc., and possible practice solutions at the
end of the body of the letter.
5. Keep the body of the letter brief and straight to the point.
6. End the letter with subscription, yours truly.
7. Don’t ask the editor to solve the problems, issues and etc.
2.5.3. What is the exact format for a Business or Official letter?
Format of an Informal Letter

2.5.4. What
is the example format for a Business or Official letter?
Job Application
2.5.4.1. What is a Job Application?
A job application is a form that recruiters, companies and employers ask from
job aspirants to prepare and submit in a proper format with all the necessary
details of the candidate. The job application is divided into two parts.
1. Covering letter
2. Bio Data or Curriculum Vitae (CV) or Resume
The covering letter is in the format of an official letter ending with ‘Encl’ means
‘enclosures to the covering letter’. The bio data or CV or Resume includes all the
necessary information about the candidates including address, educational
qualifications, experience, skills, hobbies, salary expected, two references and etc.
2.5.4.1.2. What is the exact format for a covering letter?

2.5.4.1.3. What is the example format for a covering letter?
2.5.4.1.4. What is the exact format for a Biodata or CV or Resume?
Full Name
Father’s Name
Mother’s Name
Date of Birth
Sex
Marital Status
Postal Address
Educational Qualification
Extra Qualification
Experience
Hobbies
Salary Expected
Reference
2.4.4.1.5. What is the example format for a Biodata or CV or Resume?
Full Name Yashodananda Swamy
Father’s Name Mr. Swamy
Mother’s Name Mrs.Rani
Date of Birth 28.06.2007
Sex Male
Marital Status Unmarried
AU – 202
Ultimate Signature
Postal Address Bengaluru - 560064
Sl.No Degree Year Percentage

1 MA 2028 98%
Educational Qualification
2 BA 2025 98%
3 +2 2022 98%
Extra Qualification PGDCA
Experience 5 Years
Hobbies Bodybuilding and reading
Salary Expected Negotiable
Swamy – 9440xxxxx
Reference Nagaraju – 9595xxxxxx
- --
CBT Question Paper Link: https://forms.gle/f1d1vKMjB8VPewKE7
Practice Questions

1. The subscription should be written at...................
a. The right hand bottom of the letter.
b. The left hand bottom of the letter.
c. The right hand top corner of the letter
d. The left hand top corner of the letter.
2. Salutation means means......................

a. Complementary closing
b. Body of the letter
c. Greeting the reader
d. Style of the language
3. Which style of language is used in a business letter?

a. Long and personal
b. Brief and personal
c. Long and personal
d. Brief and impersonal
4. While writing to a company which salutation is used?

a. Dear sir
b. Dear sirs
c. My dear sir
d. Sir
5. Body of the letter contains.......
a. The salutation
b. The reference
c. The message
d. None of the above
6. The two sections ‘subject’ and ‘reference’ can be found in letter to.
a. Relations
b. Officers and businessmen
c. Personal friends
d. Distinct acquaintances
7. The salutation to a women’s association could be.....
1. Dear Mesdames
2. Dearest Mesdames
3. Mesdames
4. Respected Mesdames
8. The subscription ‘Yours obediently’ is written in a letter to...
1. A minister
2. An M.P
3. Chief Minister
4. Head Master
9. Formal salutation is used in official letters
1. Dear Mr. Govind

2. Govind
3. Dear Govind
4. Respected sir
10. When addressee is more than one person, the salutation is.
1. Sir
2. Madam
3. Sirs/Mesdames
4. Dear Agent
11. Body of the letter should be...............
1. divided into paras

2. not divided into paras
3. two paras
4. four paras
12. _____ is also known as a job letter.

a) Cover letter
b) Application
c) Prospecting letter
d) Resume
Answer key: 1. B 2. C 3. D 4. A 5. C 6. B 7. A 8. D 9. A
10. C 11. A 12. A
Exercise 2:
1] A Formal Letter Should Be _________ To Have The Desired Effect On The
Recipient.
A- In Proper format
B- Grammatically correct
C- Relevant
D- All these
2] How to End the Main Body of a Formal Letter?
A- By telling the recipient what he should be doing next
B- By showing love
C- By discussing weather
D- None
3] What Would You Write In The Opening Part Of A Formal Letter?
A- Asking About Health
B- Asking About Family
C- Informing About Purpose or Writing the Letter
D- None
4] The Key Point Of A Formal Letter Is Written In Which Part Of A Formal Letter?
A- Intro
B- Heading
C- Subject
D- Body
5] What Is The Accurate Representation To Show The Purpose Of A Letter?
A- Please Note Formal Notice
B- Attention: Formal Notice
C- Subject: Formal Notice
D- Announcement: Formal Notice
6] Which Of The Following Is A Characteristic Of The Block Format Of A Formal
Letter?
A- There is no indentation
B- Use of punctuation marks is dispensed within the block format
C- Each block begins with margin on left hand side
D- All
7] What Is The Correct Way To Write The Subscription In A Formal Letter?
A- Yours truly
B- Your truly
C- You truly
D- None
8] What Is Written On The Top Of Editor's Letter On The Left Side?
A- Salutation
B- Yours truly
C- Subject
D- Sender’s address
9] Which Of These Is The Right Format Of Writing The Date In All The Formal
Letters?
A- 21/11/2021
B- 21-11-2021
C- November 21, 2021
D- None
10] The Subject Of Letter To Editor Should Be _____?
A- Long
B- Irrelevant
C- Brief and relevant
D- None
11] Which Of These Is The Most Suitable Salutation Of A Letter To The Editor?
A- Dear sir/madam
B- Mr. Sir /Mrs. madam
C- Mr. Editor/Mrs. editor
D- None
12] Which Of The Following Statements Is Incorrect about letter to editor?
A- Must be in formal language
B- Must be complete in all respects
C- Must be relevant information
D- Must be informal
13] What Is The Motive Of Writing A Letter To The Editor?
A- To ask him to take action
B- To order him
C- To request him to give some space to your views in his column
D- None
14] Which Of The Following Is Not A Part Of A Letter To Editor?
A- Date
B- Subject
C- Salutation
D- Photo
15] Where Is Receiver's Address Written?
A- On the top of the letter
B- Just below the date
C- Just above date
D- Just after salutation
16] Which Of The Following Are The Features Of A Letter To Editor?
A- Stick to the point
B- Formal language
C- Relevant content
D- All these
Answer key: 1. D 2. A 3. C 4. D 5. C 6. D 7. A 8. D 9. C
10. C 11. A 12. D 13. C 14. D 15. B16. D
3. Grammar & Usage
3.1. Instructions:
"Let's add some Glamour to your Grammar!"
3.1.1. What is Grammar?
It means, the whole system and structure of English language, usually it includes,
syntax, morphology, phonology and semantics. To put it simple, it teaches us Tenses,
Speech, Voice and etc. which are essential to construct a sentence without any errors
and to express flawless.
According to KVS LDCE syllabus the following areas are important, but even one has
to prepare other areas in English grammar for complete command over Grammar part
in Question paper. The important areas are
1. Determiners
2. Tenses
3. Clauses
4. Modals
5. Voice
But the above are not sufficient to answer the questions from grammar part. Hence we
have to study even basics of grammar to get a good command over English grammar.
The grammar must be studied in a systematic way covering A to Z, so that when these
areas are tested through error corrections, editing, gap filling, sentence completion,
sentence improvement and multiple choice question, in KVS LDCE Exams, we must be
in a commanding position to answer any question from grammar in any question
format. We should first study basics of English Grammar, very briefly, in the easiest
manner without any delay.
So, let’s add glamour to your grammar without any delay.
3.2. Sentence
3.2.1. What is a sentence?
A Sentence, is a group of words, arranged in a proper manner or order, which gives

a sense or complete meaning, is called a sentence.
‘Swamy is a teacher’. Is this a complete sentence? Yes it is, because this
sentences has a group of words, arranged in a proper order, and has a complete
meaning or sense, hence it is a complete sentence.
3.2.1.2. What is the correct order of a sentence?
Generally, a sentence has a Subject and predicate and they are arranged one after
another. For example, ‘Swamy is a teacher’.
Subject | Predicate
Swamy | is a teacher.
In the above sentence ‘Swamy’ is the ‘subject’ of the sentence and ‘is a teacher’ is
the ‘predicate’ of the sentence.
What is the ‘subject’ of the sentence?
The part of the sentence which names the person or thing we are speaking about,
is called ‘subject’ of the sentence. Or
The part of the sentence, which gives information about who does the action in the
sentence or the doer of the action in the sentence, is called the ‘subject’ of the
sentence.
In the above given sentence, ‘Swamy is a teacher’, ‘Swamy’, is the ‘subject’,
because, predicate or the remaining sentence talks about ‘Swamy’.
Who is the teacher in the sentence> ‘…. is a teacher.’ “Swamy”.
Hence in the above sentence ‘Swamy’ is the subject without any doubt.
Find out what is the subject in this sentence, “Rani is a student.”
What is a predicate?
The part of the sentence with tells something about the subject, is called a
predicate.
Subject | Predicate
Swamy | is a teacher.
In the above sentence, ‘…. is a teacher.’ Talks about the subject, ‘Swamy’.
So to conclude a sentence has two parts, subject and predicate. These are
arranged in a correct order and the correct order is, subject comes first and predicate
next, in general.
But if you observe, ‘…. is a teacher.’ Predicate consists a group of words. Hence
again predicate is divided into two or three parts.
In the above sentence, ‘is’ is a ‘Verb’, ‘a’ is an ‘article’ and ‘teacher’ is a ‘noun’.
Hence in a sentence predicate has a verb (compulsory), noun, adjective and etc. in
common.
So this is about a sentence and its parts in general. We should learn about this to
understand grammar in detailed.
Identify the subject and predicate in the following sentences.
1. Yashodananda is a student.
2. Virinchy is an engineering student.
3. Mrs. Durga is the managing director.
4. Mr. Nagaraju is an assistant professor.
5. Mr. Aswarthappa is the chairman.
6. Mrs. Saipriya is a teacher.
7. Mrs. Aliveni is a Hindi teacher.
8. Mr. Irfan is a software engineer.
3.2.2. The Phrase and The Clause
What is a phrase?
A group of words which are part of a sentence, makes sense, but not complete
sense, is called a phrase.
Eg: The sun rises in the east.
In the above sentence ‘in the east’, has some sense, but not complete meaning.
That’s why ‘in the east’ is called ‘a phrase’.
Identify the phrases in the following sentences.
1. The book was under the table.

2. It was a story as old as time.
3. He won the challenge against all odds.
4. Sunday became a cool, wet afternoon.
What is a clause?
A group of words which forms part of a sentence, and contains a Subject and a
predicate is called a clause.
I have a pen which is good.
In the above sentence, ‘I have a pen’, is a complete sentence. But ‘which is good’,
is a group of words, contains ‘which’, ‘subject’ and ‘is good’, predicate, but can’t
withstand on its own for a complete meaning.
‘Which is good’ part of the sentence needs, ‘I have a pen’ to have a complete
meaning. ‘Which’ is actually showing ‘pen’ in the sentence.
Hence a group of words like, ‘which is good’, forms part of a sentence, and contains
a Subject and a predicate is called a clause.
Identify the clauses in the following sentences.
1. The girl who studies well is the class leader.

2. Let’s find a book which has correct information
We should understand what a phrase is and what a clause is to understand tenses,

voice and clauses in the coming chapters.
3.2.3. Subject Verb Agreement
The verb must agree with the subject in number and person. A singular subject
takes a singular verb and a plural subject takes a plural verb, this is called subject verb
agreement in a sentence.
Eg: Raju has a car.

Raju and Raghu have cars.
In the first sentence “Raju’ is a singular subject so it is matched with the singular
verb ‘has’. In the second sentence ‘Raju and Raghu’ is a plural subject so it is matched
with ‘have’.
Though it looks very simple at this stage, but in exam you may get the following
sentences, then answer properly.
1. The politician and Cricketer ____ dead. (Is/are)

2. Bread and milk _____ his only food. (Is/are)
3. Slow and study ____ the race (win/wins)
4. Every boy and girl ___ happy (was/were)
5. Every man, woman and child ___ enjoying the party. (Is/are)
6. Neither Raju nor Rani _______ the function. (Attend/attends)
7. Neither he nor I ____ interested. (Am/are)
8. Either Swamy or Sunny _____the work just. (Has finished/have finished)
9. Neither Nagaraju nor his friends ____ present in the meeting. (Is/are)
10. Either Bunny or his parents _____ come to the party. (Has/have)
11. Neither you nor he ___ perfect. (Is/are)
12. You and he ___ good friends. (Is/are)
13. The council ___ selected the president. (Has/have)
14. The military _____ arrived. (Was/were)
15. A number of girls _____ caught dancing. (Was/were)
16. The news ___ correct. (Is/are)
17. Politics ___ good for strong people. (Is/are)
Answers: 1. Is 2. Is 3. Wins 4. Was 5. Is 6. Attends 7. Am 8. Has 9. Are 10. Have

11. Is 12. Are 13. Has 14. Were 15. Were 16. Is 17. Are
3.2.4. Parts of Speech
In language English there are only eight different kinds of words or classes are
there to communicate in writing or in speech and they are called ‘parts of speech’.
They are divided into eight according to their use or work done by them in a sentence.
They are
1. Noun - Naming words

2. Pronoun - Used to avoid repetition of noun.
3. Adjective - Qualifies noun
4. Verb - Denotes state, possession and action of noun
5. Adverb - Modifies a verb or adjective or another adverb
6. Preposition - Shows the place or position between two nouns
Or two pronouns.
7. Conjunction - Connects or joins two nouns or two pronouns or
Two Sentences.
8. Interjection - Expresses sudden feelings.
It may seem very easy for your level to learn Parts of speech. Hence no further
explanation required. Now identify the parts of speech of the italicized words in the
following sentences correctly.
1. I graduated in science from Arts College.

2. The wind can blow ships across the water.
3. Gandhi’s attitude to social change was influenced by his own experience.
4. Now, tell me how are you?
5. He walks along the corridor.
6. The latest film is a good mixture of sentiment and comedy.
7. Don’t touch the wire it is live.
8. Water these plants regularly.
9. His performance is very good.
10. Dogs are faithful animals.
11. A horse is cleverer than a donkey.
12. The cat is under the table.
13. Honesty is the best policy
Answers: 1. Verb 2. Preposition 3. Adjective 4. Adverb 5. Preposition

6. Noun 7. Verb 8. Verb 9. Adverb 10. Noun 11. Adjective
12. Preposition 13.noun
3.2.5. Kinds of Sentences
We have already learnt what a sentence is. Now in this chapter we are going to
learn kinds of sentences and types of sentences.
2.1.5.1. How many kinds of sentences are in English?
There are FOUR kinds of sentences in English depending on the work they do or
what kind of information do they convey to others.
1. Assertive or Declarative: Makes a statement or assertion.
Mr. Swamy Vijay is a teacher in KVS.
2. Interrogative: Asks a question
Who is Mr. Nagaraju M?
3. Imperative: Expresses a command, request, permission and etc.
Please take your seat.

You may go now.
Stand up!
4. Exclamatory: Expresses strong feelings of surprise.
Look. How beautiful she looks!
3.2.5.2. How many types of sentences are in English?
There are THREE types of sentences are there in English.
1. Positive sentence:
Dheeraira is a Charity Foundation.

Mrs. Saipriya drinks coffee every day.
2. Negative sentence:
Dheeraira is not a profit oriented company.

Mrs. Saipriya does not drink coffee every day.
3. Question sentence:
Is Dheeraira a charity Foundation?

Does Mrs. Saipriya drink coffee every day?
So far we learnt the basics of English grammar to understand further areas in
English grammar which are part of syllabus. So now let us start exploring the grammar
and usage given in KVS LDCE, syllabus, now.
3.3. Determiners
A determiner is a word that comes before a noun, and limits its meaning. For
example, in this sentence,
I have a car. ‘A’ is the determiner used in the sense of ‘One’. Here the noun ‘car’ is
singular. Whereas in this sentence, I have many cars, ‘many’ is determiner used to
inform that the person owns more than one car. Hence ‘a’ is used before a singular
noun, ‘car’ and ‘many’ is used before a plural noun ‘cars’. So we can understand that a
determiner limits the meaning and quantity of the noun.
This is your car. Here ‘this’ is used to demonstrate that a particular car belongs to
someone and someone owns a single car. These are your cars. Here ‘these’ is used to
demonstrate that many car belongs to someone and someone owns cars more than
one. Hence ‘this’ is used for singular noun, ‘car’ and ‘these’ is used for plural noun
‘cars’.
A determiner does the job of following things in a sentence.
1. It introduces noun.
Eg: Mr. Nagaraju is an Indian.

Mr. Swamy has an Orange.
2. It determines noun.
I need some sugar.

Do you have any friends?
3. It denotes whether a noun is specific or general.
Eg: I always visit this doctor.

This ‘doctor’ Noun – Specific. In this sentence ‘this’ specifies a particular doctor
only patient visits in emergency.
It’s serious. Can you bring any doctor, immediately?
Any ‘doctor’ Noun – General. In this sentence ‘any’ specifies any random
doctor patient wants in emergency.
There are FOUR types of determiners are in English. They are
1. Articles: a, an & the

2. Demonstrative determiners: this, that, these & those
3. Possessive determiners: my, our, your, his, her, its & their
4. Quantifiers: some, any, much, many, each, every and etc.
3.3.1.1. What is the use of articles?
Articles are used to determine which noun the speaker is referring to.
Eg: I have a pet dog. ‘A’ general version of noun, pet dog.
I read the Hindu Newspaper daily.
‘The’ specific version of noun, ‘Hindu’ newspaper only.
There are TWO types of articles are there in English and they are
1. Indefinite Article: ‘a & an’
2. Definite Article: ‘the’
Indefinite Article ‘a’ and ‘an’ are used in the sense of ‘One’ and used when you are
talking about a general version of the noun. Article ‘a’ is used before words that begin
with consonant letter or consonant sound while article ‘an’ is used before words
beginning with vowels letter or vowel sounds. The sound with which the word begins is
more important than the letter with which the word begins.
Eg: Mr. Robert is a European.
Mrs. Monika is an American.
In the above sentences ‘a’ is used before ‘European’ because though ‘European’
begins with a ‘vowel’ letter, ‘E’ in fact it actually begins with a ‘consonant sound’ ‘Yu’ /
jʊərəˈpiːən/. That’s why article ‘a’ is used before the word ‘European’.
Whereas article ‘an’ is used in front of ‘American’ because the word ‘American’
begins with a ‘vowel’ letter and ‘vowel sound’. ‘A’ /əˈmerɪkən/.
Definite Article: ‘the’ is used to specify a particular noun and in front of the names of
rivers, seas, newspapers and etc.
Eg: Mr. Swamy and Mr. Nagaraju went to the Pizza hut in Yelahanka.
Mrs. Saipriya reads the Times of India newspaper every day.
In the above sentences ‘the’ is used to specify a particular place and a particular
newspaper, hence definite article ‘the’ is use.
The definite article ‘the’ is used before

1) Which are only one of their kind:
Eg: The Sun rises in the East.
The Earth revolves around the Sun
2) Particular person ( or) thing:
Eg: Please call the boy standing out side
Success is the main theme of this game
3) In front of the name of rivers, seas and oceans:
Eg: The Ganges is the life line of North India.
The Godavari is a perennial river in South India.
4) Group of islands and mountain ranges:
Eg: The Andaman & Nicobar are in the Bay of Bengal.
The Lakshadweep are formed with corals.
5) In front of Superlative degree:
Eg: Virinchy is the tallest boy in the class.
Yashoda is the smartest student in the school.
6) Musical instruments:
Eg: Virinchy is the tallest boy in the class.
Dr. Nagaraju plays the tabala very well.
Mr. Swamy is learning the flute.
7) In front of Newspapers:
Eg: The Washington Post is an international newspaper.
The Times of India is the largest circulated newspaper.
8) In front of the names of Famous buildings:
Eg: The Taj Mahal is a mausoleum houses the tomb of Mumtaz.
The Bruj Khalifa is the tallest building in the world.
9) In front of Important posts:
Eg: The President of India launched the program.
The President of America visited the Taj Mahal.
10) In front of Directions:
Eg: The East is apposite to the West in philosophy.
Ms. Deepa has come from the north east of India.
11) To say something about all the things referred to by a noun:
Eg: The human is the most dangerous animal on the earth.
The dogs are very loyal in nature.
3.3.1.2. What are Demonstrative determiners?
These determiners come before nouns to demonstrate or indicate the quantity and
the location of the nouns.
Eg: Mr. Aswarthappa liked that duplex house.
Mrs. Aliveni brought these vegetables in basket.
Demonstrative determiners are sometimes referred as demonstrative adjectives in
English.
‘This’ & ‘that’ demonstrative determiners or adjectives are singulars , means it talks
about only one thing and can be used only in front of single nouns. Whereas ‘these’ &
‘those’ are plurals, talks about many things and can be used in front of plural nouns.
Eg: This is a single car available in our shop.
These cars are readily available for delivery in our shop.
‘This’ is used for things which are closer or nearby and ‘that’ is used for things
which are far away.
Eg: This shop is very close to my home.
That shop is far away from my apartment.
But these same four words this, that, these and those can also be used without
nouns, acting as pronouns. In that case they are called demonstrative pronouns. A
demonstrative pronoun is used to substitute the noun, and a demonstrative adjective is
used to give more information and describe about the noun.
Eg: This is my girlfriend.
These are my friends.
That is hot coffee.
What flavor those dishes have?
3.3.1.3. What are Possessive determiners?

Possessive determiners are used to show or indicate who owns or possess things.
Eg: my, our, your, his, her, its and their.
Eg: She is my girlfriend.
It is her house.
Possessive determiners are also called as possessive adjectives. These adjectives
modifies a noun by identifying who has ownership or possession of it. These
adjectives correspond to the pronouns I, you, he, she, it, we, they, and who.
Eg: Mrs. Durga Rani lost her purse in the market.
Mr. Swamy gained his lost confidence after losing his weight.
3.3.1.3. What are Quantifiers or Adjectives of quantity?

Quantifiers or Adjective of quantity like some, any, much, many, either, neither, one,
first and etc. indicate how much or how little a noun is being described as the adjective
about the estimated or the actual quantity of the noun that is being used in the
sentence
Eg: Mr. Swamy has much experience.
Dr. Nagaraju has some money in his bank account.
Adjective of Quantity doesn't make use of numbers but only just an estimated
quantity of the noun.
Eg: Mr. Aswarthappa came the first place in the singing competition.
Mrs. Aliveni uses many colours for rangoli.
3.2.1.4. What are the Tips to select the correct determiner in exam?
1) Determiners always come first in the noun.
2) Indefinite article a or an, are used with singular nouns in the sense of ‘one’.
3) Generally determiners are not used in front of plural nouns.
4) The definite article, demonstrative pronoun, possessive pronoun, or quantifier
is used to specify noun in particular.
5) Some determiners to be selected based upon the usage of English without
translating the sentence into our local language.
6) Neither & either are talking about a singular noun.
7) Try to understand what type of determiner the question is try to expect from
you.
8) Determiners is one of the easiest topics in the KVS LDCE PGT English. But it
needs a good practice to score out and out marks without committing any silly
mistakes.
3.2.1.4. Blind Clues to identify the correct article
I) Article ‘a’ is used in front of the following…
1) Consonant Sounds. (क to ).
If the words
in English which begin with the above letter’s pronunciation, then article ‘a’ must be
used.
2) Consonant Letters: There are 21 consonants in English alphabet namely B,
C, D, F, G, H, J, K, L, M, N, P, Q, R, S, T, V, W, X, Y, Z.
If the words in English which begin with the above letters then article ‘a’ must
be used.
3) Use article ‘a’ in front of these words.
a) European, ewe, SAARC member,

b) One, One rupee note, one – eyed man, One-eyed beggar, One minute.
c) University, Uniform, Unicorn, Useful, U-shape, Union
d) Yard, horse, hole, hotel, historical, historian.
e) Piece of paper/information, glass of milk, pocket of salt, bundle of
f) grass, cake of Soap, kilo
g) Dozen, size, foot, few, pound, noise, quarter, hurry, fig tree, fine, saw
h) Mr/Mrs/Miss/Ms.
i) Barracks, Mathematics Table Book,
j) Half, pupil, Daniel, time, list, P.C, puppy, gift, bribe
k) Member of a parliament
II) Article ‘an’ is used in front of the following…
1. Vowel Sounds. (a.e.i.o.u) (अ to अः )
If the words in English which begin with the above letter’s pronunciation, then article
‘an’ must be used.
2. Vowel Letters (A, E, I, O, U)
If the words in English which begin with the above letters then article ‘an’ must be
used.
3. Use article ‘an’ in front of these words
a) African, American, epic, ape, eraser, Engineer, Asian

b) Orange, Onion, Ostrich, Ornament, astronaut, accident, open,
c) ‘U’ – ‘ʌ ‘ — Umbrella, Unfortunate, uncontrollable, Ordinance, Auditorium, auto
d) Hour, honour, honest, heir
e) Abbreviations - A,E,F,H,I,L,M,N,O,R,S,X
f) M.P, M.L.A, M.P, S.P, I.A.S. I.P.S, F.I.R, x- ray.
g) Industry, industrious, international, island, idiot, interesting, intelligent,
innocent, impolite, Indian
III) Definite Article ‘the’ is used in front of the following…
a) Sun, Moon, Sea, Coast, Weather, Pacific, Himalayas, Pyramids, North
b) Violin, Flute, Piano, Drums.
c) Morning, evening, present, past
d) First, Second. Third. Ninth, Tenth etc.
e) Sahara desert, Thar Desert etc.
f) Indian Ocean, Atlantic Ocean etc.
g) Himalayas, Alps, Aravalli etc.
h) Andaman, Lakshadweep etc.
i) Niagara Falls, thalakona falls etc.
j) Godavari, Krishna, Penna., Nile, Mississippi etc.
k) Bay of Bengal etc.
l) Persian gulf etc.
m) Republic, Federation, Kingdom etc.
n) United States of America (U.S.A), United Kingdom (U.K),
o) Gita, Bible, Quran, Ramayana, Mahabharata, Vedas, Puranas
p) Lunch, Italian dinner, etc.
q) Birlas, Tatas. etc.
r) Highest, tallest, longest, best, fastest. Etc.
IV) Definite Article ‘the’ is omitted in front of the following…

a) India, Delhi, Raju, Rani
b) Sugar, Gold, wisdom, Honestly, Virtue
c) Children, Computers, Music,
d) English. Telugu, Sanskrit
e) School, College, Church, bed, hospital, Prison.( Primary purpose)
f) Father, mother, aunt, uncle, cook, nurse.
g) Chairman, Principal, King, pope
h) My legs, my eyes
i) Indians, Russians, Iranians.
j) Mt.Everest
k) Cricket, Football.
l) Mumps, Cholera, Typhoid, Aids
m) Sunday, Tuesday, June, May, April
3.3.1.5. Practice
Questions
Answer key: 1. D 2. D 3. D 4. A 5. B 6. D 7. D 8. B 9. B 10. B 11.

3.4. Tense
‘Tense’ denotes the ‘time’ in a sentence. For example,
1. Mr. Swamy is a teacher.

2. Mr. Swamy was a student.
3. Mr. Swamy will be a principal.
In the sentence 1, ‘is’ a ‘helping verb’ refers to present time in the life of Mr. Swamy.
It denotes the ‘present’ state of the Subject ‘Mr. Swamy’. Hence the verb ‘is’ is in the
“Present Tense”.
In the sentence 2, ‘was’ a ‘helping verb’ refers to past time in the life of Mr. Swamy.
It denotes the ‘past’ state of the Subject ‘Mr. Swamy’. Hence the verb ‘was’ is in the
“Past Tense”.
In the sentence 3 ‘will’ a ‘helping verb’ refers to future time in the life of Mr. Swamy.
It denotes the ‘future’ state of the Subject ‘Mr. Swamy’. Hence the verb ‘will’ is in the
“Future Tense”.
So these helping verbs are in present time, past time and future time.
Let us find a few more examples.
1. Dr. Nagaraju plays chess.

2. Dr. Nagaraju played chess.
3. Dr. Nagaraju will play chess.
In the sentence 1, the verb ‘plays’ which refers to ‘present time’ is said to be in the
‘present tense’. So the entire sentence is said to be in the “present tense”.
In the sentence 2, the verb ‘played’ which refers to ‘past time’ is said to be in the
‘present tense’. So the entire sentence is said to be in the “past tense”.
In the sentence 3, the verb ‘will play’ which refers to ‘future time’ is said to be in the
‘future tense’. So the entire sentence is said to be in the “past tense”.
With this we can easily understand that ‘verb’ in the sentence actually refers to
‘time’ or ‘tense’ in the sentence. To understand tenses, first we must study about a
Verb.
3.4.1. What is a verb?
A verb is a word used to say something about some person, place or thing.
Basically it gives information about a noun in the sentence. But what exactly a verb
denotes about a noun?
A verb denotes THREE things about Noun. They are
1. State of the noun.
The verbs like am, is, are, was, were, will & shall denotes the
State of the noun and they are called ‘Stative Verbs”. For example,
a) Mr. Swamy is a teacher.
b) Mr. Swamy was a student.
c) Mr. Swamy will be a principal.
In the above sentences is, was and will are used to denote the state of noun or
subject of the sentence, Mr. Swamy in Present, Past and Future times or in Present,
Past and Future tenses.
2. Possession of the noun.
The verbs like has, have, had, will have and shall have, denotes the Possession of
the noun and they are called ‘Possessive Verbs”.
a) Mr. Swamy has a bike.
b) Mr. Swamy had a Maruti 800.
c) Mr. Swamy will have a Mahindra Thor.
In the above sentences has, had and will have are used to denote the possession
of noun or subject of the sentence, Mr. Swamy in Present, Past and Future times or in
Present, Past and Future tenses.
3. Action of the noun.
The verbs like go, play, watch and etc. which denote the action of the noun are
called ‘action verbs’ or they are also called ‘main verbs’.
a) Mr. Swamy watches a movie on Netflix, every day.
b) Mr. Swamy watched cast away movie on Netflix, yesterday.
c) Mr. Swamy will watch Mission Impossible movie tomorrow.
In the above sentences the verbs, watches, watched and will watch are used to
denote the action done by noun or subject of the sentence,
Mr. Swamy in Present, Past and Future times or in Present, past and Future tenses.
With the above explanation and examples we can understand clearly that a ‘verb’ in
the sentence denotes THREE things, state, possession and action of the noun. In
addition to that a ‘verb’ refers to a time or a tense in a sentence. To conclude a ‘verb’ is
the word which gives information about the ‘Tense’ of the given sentence and a ‘verb’
refers to THREE Tenses and they are
1. Present Tense
2. Past Tense
3. Future Tense
But before we study ‘Tenses’, we must know the forms of the ‘main verbs’ or ‘action
verbs’ to avoid any confusion while learning about tenses.
An action verb or main verb like ‘go’ has THREE forms and they are
‘Go’: Is Present Form of the verb. It is also represented with ‘v1’.
This form of verbs are used in the ‘Present Tense’.
‘Went’: Is Past Form of the verb ‘go’. It is also represented with ‘v2’. This form of
verbs are used in the ‘Past Tense’.
‘Gone’: Is Past participle of the verb ‘go’. It is also represented with ‘v3’. This form
of verbs are used in the ‘Perfect Tense’.
So a verb has THREE Forms and they are
Present Form of verb – Go
Past Form of verb – went
Past participle form of verb - Gone
Always remember a verb has no ‘future form’ and ‘v3’ form of verbs are in ‘past
participle form of verbs’ not ‘future form of verbs’.
We modify the present form of verb ‘v1’ to use in continuous tenses by adding ‘+ing’
to ‘v1’ verb.
a) Eg: Mr. Swamy is read + ing (reading) a book.
Read + ing or reading is called ‘Present Participle’ and represented with ‘v5’. This
‘v5’ form of verbs are used with a ‘be’ form in all the continuous and perfect continuous
tenses.
So to understand ‘Tense’ we need to understand what is a verb and what exactly it
denotes and what are the forms of the verb. Now let us learn types of verbs finally
before going in to the topic ‘Tenses’.
3.4.2. How many types of verbs are in English?
A verb has TWO types.

1) Helping verb or Auxiliary verb
2) Main verb or Action Verb
The main verbs are again divided into TWO types
1) Regular verbs
2) Irregular verbs
A ‘Regular verb’ means, if we can modify the present form of verb i.e. v1 into past
form i.e. v2 and into past participle i.e. v3 by adding
‘-ed’ or ‘-d’, then those are called ‘regular verbs’.
Eg: walk – walked (walk + ed) - walked (walk + ed)
Talk – talked (talk + ed) - talked (talk + ed)
An “Irregular verb’ doesn’t follow the above pattern when modified from present
form into past and past participle form.
Eg: fly – flew – flown
Catch – caught – caught
Sing – sang – sung
It is a difficulty to conjugate irregular verbs as there are no set patterns. Hence one
has to practice as many as irregular verbs in sentences to gain command over the
different forms of irregular verbs.
One last thing we must learn before going into the topic ‘Tenses’, which is ‘Subject
Verb Agreement’. The verb must agree with the subject in number and person.
A singular subject takes a singular verb and a plural subject takes a plural verb, this
is called subject verb agreement in a sentence.
Eg: 1. Raju has a car.
2. Raju and Raghu have cars.
If you haven’t yet studied or skipped the ‘Subject verb agreement’ chapter, then go
back to page no: 77 to study about how to conjugate or change the verb to fit or agree
with the subject of the sentence exact.
3.4.3. What is a Tense?
The word ‘tense’ origins from Latin ‘tempus’, means “time”. It is, a verb-based
method used to indicate the time, and sometimes the continuation or completeness, of
an action or state in relation to the time of speaking.
In language English, Tense is a method, used to refer different timings, Present,
Past and Future.
3.4.4. What are the different Tenses in English?

In English there are THREE different tenses are there and they are
1. Present Tense
2. Past Tense
3. Future Tense
These Present, Past and Future Tenses are further divided into FOUR sub tenses
each and total TWELVE tenses. They are
1. Present Tense:
1) Simple Present or Present Simple
2) Present Continuous or Present Progressive
3) Present Perfect
4) Present Perfect Continuous.
2. Past Tense:
1) Simple Past or Past Simple
2) Past Continuous or Past Progressive
3) Past Perfect
4) Past Perfect Continuous.
3. Future Tense:
1) Simple Future or Future Simple
2) Future Continuous or Future Progressive
3) Future Perfect
4) Future Perfect Continuous.
These Twelve different tenses refers to different times of actions in the present,
past and Future. Mastering all the twelve[1] tenses requires a lot of study, and rigorous
practice. Now let us study the usage of these.
3.4.5. Present Tense

The present form of verb i.e. v1 is used to refer to actions happened in the present.
But the Present Tense is further subdivided into FOUR Tenses, so let us understand
the usage of each sub tense of present tense clearly.
3.4.5.1. Simple Present Tense or Present Simple: It is used to express

a) A habitual action
1) Medha drinks milk every morning.
2) Dr. Nagaraju drives to college regularly.
3) Mrs. Saipriya gets up every day at 5 am.
b) A general truth or Universal Truth
1) The sun rises in the east.
2) Honesty is the best policy.
3) Birds of same feather flock together.
c) To indicate a future event that is part of a plan or arrangement.
1) Mr. Swamy is going to Ladakh next week.
2) Mr. Virinchy leave for college by next bus.
3) Mr. Yashodananda sails for Australia next year.
d) To introduce quotes of famous
1) Shelly says, “If winter comes, can spring be far behind”.
2) Wordsworth says, “The child is the father of man”.
e) Used in ‘if’ clauses or conditioned clauses and clauses of time.
1) I shall wait till Mr. Swamy complete his work.
2) If it rains we shall miss train.
f) Used in cricket commentaries or broadcast commentaries.
1) Rahul Dravid hits a sixer.
2) Sachin drives the ball to boundary.
In exam point of view, to answer question, we must know the blind clues or adverbs
of time in the sentence to select the correct answers option provided. Hence the blind
clues are quite useful to understand the tense of the given sentence. These blind clues
are prepared for the most important tenses, expected to come in KVS LDCE, exam. So
without any delay let us check the blind clues for “Simple Present Tense’.
Clue Words for Simple Present Tense

Daily, regularly, every day, usually, often, always, never, rarely (v1)
1. I/we/you/they/Krishna and Shiva ‘drink’
2. He/She/it/Raju/ Shriya ‘drinks’
3. He _____ (go) to college by bus. (Goes)
4. The earth ______ (move) round the sun (moves)
The above words are actually ‘adverbs of time’ which indicate the tense of the given
sentence. If you find these words in question sentence, then the sentence is said to be
in the simple present tense.
3.1.5.2. What is the exact procedure to find the correct option?
Directions: In the following question each sentence has an underlined part that can
be improved by replacing the part with one among the four options given below.
Choose the correct option and if you think no improvements can be made, then select
(d) as your answer.
Q.No 01: Mr. Aswarthappa drink coffee every day.

a) Has been drinking
b) Is drinking
c) Drinks
d) No improvement
Procedure:
Step 1: Read the given question till the end. Never skip this.
Step 2: Identify the clue word in given sentence. Here it is ‘everyday’.
So it is in ‘Simple Present Tense’.
Step 3: Identify the number and person of the subject in the sentence. Here “Mr.
Aswarthappa” is the subject in ‘third person’, ‘singular. Hence the verb
takes ‘s’ to ‘drink[2]’. So the correct form of verb is ‘drinks’.
Step 4: Now identify the answer option, which matches exactly with your answer.
Never try to find answer with the help of given answers option. It will highly
confuse you.
Follow the above procedure for all the question on Tense in exam.
3.1.5.3. Present Continuous or Present Progressive:
In Present continuous Tense we use ‘am, is, are’ and add ‘+ing’ to v1 form of verb.
Eg: is read+ing, am + go+ing
Usage: It is used to express
a) An action going on at the present
Mrs. Durga Rani is singing now.
Mrs. Saipriya is watching TV at present.
b) An action which is planned to take place in the near future.
Mr. Swamy is going to complete this book tonight.
Mr. Nagaraju is arriving in Bangalore tomorrow.
Let us find out the ‘Blind Clues’.
Clue Words
Now, at present, presently
(Am, is, are +V1 + ing)
1. Look! I __________ (drink) milk (am drinking)
2. Look! She/he/ it/Raju_______ (drink) milk. (Is drinking)
3. Look! You/We/They/R&R _____ (drink) milk (are drinking)
4. Listen! Somebody ______ (cry) in that room. (Is crying)
If you find these words in question sentence, then the sentence is said to be in the
present continuous tense.
Follow the procedure mentioned in the page no: 95 and find the answers to the
below question.
Directions: In the following questions each sentence has an underlined part that can
be improved by replacing the part with one among the four options given below.
Choose the correct option and if you think no improvements can be made, then select
(d) as your answer.
Q.No. 01: Mr. Aswarthappa will be going to office now.
a) Has been going
b) Is going
c) Shall be going
d) No improvement
Q.No 02: Mrs. Aliveni is teaching Hindi at present.
a) Has been teaching
b) Is going to teach
c) Shall be teaching
d) No improvement
Answers: 1. B 2. D
3.1.5.4. Present Perfect Tense:
In Present Perfect we use ‘has’ or ‘have’ helping verbs with ‘v3’ form of verb. ‘Has’
is used for singular nouns and ‘have’ for plural nouns.
I, we, they & plural nouns like Swamy & Rani, take ‘have’ + v3 verb.
He, She, It & singular nouns like Swamy, Rani, take ‘has’ + v3 verb.
Usage:
a) Present Perfect Tense is used to indicate any completed action in the
immediate past, by using, ‘just’. For example,
1) Virinchy has just gone out.
2) Yashoda has just completed his workout.
b) To express a past action whose time is not mentioned and not definite.
1) Virinchy has been to USA.
2) Yashoda has completed homework.
c) To express an action beginning at some point of time in the past and still
continuing up to the present but may not continue in future.
1) Virinchy has known Yashodananda for a long time.
2) Yashodananda has lived here for two years.
3) Virinchy has been unfriendly since last Sunday.
Clue Words
Just now, already, yet
(Have/ has + V3)
1. I/we/you/they/Krishna and Shiva________ (sell) the car (have sold)
2. He/She/it/Raju/ Shriya________________ (sell) the car. (Has sold)
present perfect tense.
below question.
Q.No. 01: Mr. Aswarthappa read the book already.
a) Has been reading
b) Is reading
c) Shall be reading
d) Has read
Answers: 1. D
3.1.5.4. Present Perfect Continuous Tense:
In Present Perfect Continuous Tense we use ‘has’ or ‘have’ helping verbs with
present participle or ‘v4’ form of verb. ‘Has’ is used for singular nouns and ‘have’ for
plural nouns. Eg: has been reading, have been reading.
Usage:
a) To express an action beginning at some point of time in the past and still
continuing in the present and may continue in future.
1) Virinchy has been working in Pizza hut since July, 2022.
2) Yashoda has been studying in KV Hebbal for 6 years.
Clue Words
Since, for
(Have/has + been+V1 + ing)
1. I/we/you/they/Krishna and Shiva __________ (studying) Since 5 am
2. He/She/it/Raju/ Shriya _____________ (Studying) for 5 hours
present perfect continuous tense.
below questions.
Q.No. 01: Mr. Aswarthappa read the book since morning.
a) Has been reading
b) Is reading
c) Shall be reading
d) Has read
Q.No. 02: Mrs. Aliveni teaching students since afternoon.
b) Is teaching
c) Shall be teaching
d) Has taught.
With this we have completed learning all the sub tenses under Present Tense. All
the above tenses are important in exams point of view. Most important are ‘Present
Perfect’ and ‘Present Perfect Continuous’.
Answers: 1. A 2. A
3.4.6. Past Tense

The past form of verb i.e. v2 is used to refer to actions happened or completed in
the past. But the Past Tense is further subdivided into FOUR Tenses, so let us
understand the usage of each sub tenses of past tense clearly.
In exams point of view ‘Past perfect continuous tense’ is not required, hence we are
not going to learn the sentence structure and usage of that.
3.4.6.1. Simple Past or Past Simple Tense
In positive sentences ‘v2’ form of verb is used. But in negative sentences, ‘v1’ form
of verb is only used. For example,
1) Virinchy ate apple.
2) Virinchy did not eat apple.
The reason why ‘did not eat’ is correct, the action of eating an apple is not done or
completed in the past. Hence did + not + v1 form of verb is only used.
Usage:
1) Used to indicate a completed action in the past.
a) Virinchy completed homework yesterday.
b) Yashodananda went to Las Vegas last week.
2) Used for past habits.
a) Virinchy studied many hours for exams every day.
b) Yashodananda practiced NCC Drill for many days.
Clue Words
Yesterday, last week, last year, a year ago
1. She _______ (leave) for Bangalore yesterday
Simple Past tense. Follow the procedure mentioned in the page no: 95 and find the
answers to the below question.
Q.No. 01: Mr. Aswarthappa is reading the book yesterday.
a) Has been reading
b) Is reading
c) Shall be reading
d) read Answers: 1. A
3.4.6.2. Past Continuous or Past Progressive Tense

In Past continuous Tense we use ‘was, were’ and add ‘+ing’ to v1 form of verb. Eg:
was read+ing, were + go+ing
Usage:
1) Used to indicate an action going on at some time in the past.
a) Virinchy was completing his homework at 11 pm, yesterday
b) Yashodananda was sleeping lazily at 10am last Sunday.
Clue Words
When, while, as
(Was, were + V1 + ing)
1. When I saw him, he ________ (play) chess.
2. While she ______________ (go) to college, she met her uncle.
Past Continuous tense.
below questions.
Q.No. 01: Mr. Aswarthappa is reading the book at 11 pm yesterday.
a) Was reading
b) Is reading
c) Shall be reading read
d) No improvement required.
Q.No. 02: Mrs. Aliveni teaching students at afternoon last Sunday.
b) Is teaching
c) Was teaching
d) Has taught.
Q.No. 03: Mrs. Saipriya is studying Degree last year.
a) Has been studying
b) Is studying
c) Was studying
d) Has studied
Answers: 1. A 2. C 3. C
1. Was playing 2. Was going
3.4.6.3. Past Perfect Tense
In Past Perfect Tense we use ‘had’ helping verbs with ‘v3’ form of verb.
I, we, they & plural nouns like Swamy & Rani, take ‘had’ + v3 verb.
He, She, It & singular nouns like Swamy, Rani, take ‘had’ + v3 verb.
This is the most confusing tense among all the tenses. Let us understand the usage
of this in a very practical way.
Usage:
1) Used to indicate, if TWO actions completed in the past, the past perfect tense
is used for the FIRST action and simple past is used for the SECOND action.
For example,
a) Virinchy had reached school before Yashodananda reached yesterday.
b) Yashodananda had completed his homework before Virinchy completed last
Sunday.
c) Virinchy had brushed his teeth before he ate Oats in his breakfast yesterday.
Explanation: In the sentence ‘c’ TWO actions complete in yesterday.
Action 1: Virinchy brushed his teeth.
Action 2: Virinchy ate Oats in his breakfast.
Since both the actions completed in the past, to differentiate, which action
completed FIRST and which one SECOND we use Past Perfect Tense for FIRST
completed actions and Simple past for SECOND completed actions or later completed
actions.
That’s why both the past actions are written in this manner.
Virinchy had brushed his teeth before he ate Oats in his breakfast yesterday.
Clue Words
Before, after
(Had +V3)
1. The train ___________ (leave) the station before we reached there
2. The boy came in after the bell___________(ring).
Past perfect tense.
below questions.
Q.No. 01: Mr. Aswarthappa reached the school before the bell rang.
a) Has reached
b) Had reached
c) reached
d) No improvement required.
Q.No. 02: When Mr. Aswarthappa reached home Mrs. Aliveni prepared
Vegetable Biryani, yesterday
a) Has been preparing
b) Is prepared
c) Was preparing
d) Had prepared
Q.No. 03: Dr. Nagaraju completed his Yoga when Mr. Swamy came to see him at
his home.
a) Has been completing
b) Is doing
c) Was completing
d) Had completed
Q.No. 04: Mr. Swamy reached home before Mrs. Durga reached home.
a) Has reached
b) Is reached
c) Was reached
d) Had reached
Answers:
1. A (Had reached) because 2 actions completed in the past Mr. Aswarthappa
reaching school and ringing the bell. But in the two actions the first action completed in
the past was “Mr. Aswarthappa reaching the school.
2. D because 2 actions completed in the past Mr. Aswarthappa reaching home and
Mrs. Aliveni preparing Biryani. But in the two actions the first action completed in the
past was “Mrs. Aliveni preparing Biryani.
3. D
4. D
3.4.7. Future Tense
In the future tense ‘will’ or ‘shall’ is used before the present form of verb i.e. v1 to
refer to actions which will happen in future. But the Future Tense is further subdivided
into FOUR Tenses, so let us understand the usage of each sub tense of present tense
clearly.
In exams point of view ‘Future Perfect Continuous Tense’ is not required, hence we
are not going to learn the sentence structure and usage of those.
3.4.7.1. Simple Future Tense

In Simple Future tense ‘will’ is used before subjects ‘I’ and ‘We’. ‘Shall’ is used
before other subjects.
Usage:
[3]It is used to refer an action that may complete in future, probably. For example,
a) Virinchy will become a software engineer in future.
b) Yashodananda will become a singer in future.
Clue Words
Tomorrow, next week
I/ We “shall’
You/he/she/ it/they “will”
1. I _________ (come) to college tomorrow.
2. Raju ________ (come) to college tomorrow
Simple Future tense.
below questions.
Q.No. 01: Mr. Aswarthappa reached the school tomorrow.
a) Has reached
b) Is reached.
c) Will be reaching
d) Will reachAnswers: 1. D
3.4.7.2. Future Continuous Tense
In Future continuous Tense we use ‘will’ or ‘shall’ and ‘be’ with ‘+ing’ to v1 form of
verb. Eg: will be read+ing, shall be + go+ing
Usage:
1) Used to indicate an action which is expected to be going on or probably
continued at some time in the future.
a) Virinchy will be going abroad for his studies then.
b) Yashodananda will be playing online games with his friends at 10 am
tomorrow.
c) When Mr. Swamy reaches home tomorrow, Mrs. Durga will be reading a book.
2) [4]Used for future events that are planned.
a) Dr. Nagaraju will be staying with us her till next Sunday.
b) Mrs. Saipriya will be meeting Mrs. Durga next week.
3.4.7.3. Future Perfect Tense

In Future perfect tense we use ‘will’ or ‘shall’ with ‘have’ to ‘v3’ form of verb.
I, we take shall + ‘have’ + v3 verb.
He, She, It & they and etc. take ‘will’ + ‘have’ + v3 verb.
Usage:
It is used to refer to the completion of an action by a certain time in future. For
example,
a) Virinchy will have completed his Engineering by 2026.
b) Yashodananda will have written his Class XII exams by 2025.
c) Before Mr. Swamy go to see Dr. Nagaraju, he will have left the place
tomorrow.
Generally ‘by’ is the clue word for the above tense.
With this we have learned all the important tenses in exams point of view. Now we
have to practice these tenses in mcqs format to master this grammar part. Now let us
practice a few questions without delay.
Directions (1 - 2): In the following questions each sentence has an underlined part
that can be improved by replacing the part with one among the four options given
below. Choose the correct option and if you think no improvements can be made, then
select (d) as your answer.
01. My husband is ill since three months.
a) Has been ailing for
b) Has been ill since
c) Has been ill
d) No improvement
02. I have been working on this project for the last seven years.
a) Has been worked
b) Has been working
c) Is working
d) No improvement
03. Before principal reached the classroom, he escaped out of the room.
a) Has escaped
b) Had escaped
c) Is escaped
d) No improvement
Answers: 1. A 2. D 3. B
3.5. Clauses
The topic ‘Clauses’ in fact, is easy to understand and to find the correct answer
option if you follow the tips which I am going to give at the end of this chapter.
Otherwise, ‘Clauses’ topic may turn literally into a nightmare for you all. So let us
understand the basics of ‘clauses’ first. First let us learn what a phrase is.
3.5.1What is a phrase?
A group of words which are part of a sentence, makes sense, but not complete
sense, is called a phrase.
Eg: The sun rises in the east.
In the above sentence ‘in the east’, has some sense, but not complete meaning.
That’s why ‘in the east’ is called ‘a phrase’.
Identify the phrases in the following sentences.
5. General English Workbook was under the table.

6. It was a story as old as time.
7. Virinchy won the challenge against all odds.
8. Sunday became a cool, wet afternoon.
Phrases are divided into THREE types. They are

1) Noun Phrase: A group of words, part of a sentence that does the work of a
Noun.
Eg1: Virinchy wants football. Here ‘football’, is the ‘noun’ or ‘object’ of the verb
‘wants’ and ‘wants’ is a ‘[5]transitive’ verb.
Eg2: Virinchy wants to go America.
Here ‘to go America’, is a phrase, acts a ‘noun’ or ‘object’ of the verb ‘wants’
and ‘wants’ is a ‘transitive’ verb. Hence the group of the words, ‘to go America’,
does the job of a ‘noun’ and that’s why ‘to go America’ is a Noun Phrase.
Find out the noun phrases in the following sentences.
1) Yashodananda refuses to answers to the question.
2) Virinchy hate to study mathematics.
2) Adjective Phrase: A group of words, part of a sentence, that does the work of
an Adjective
Eg1: Dr. Nagaraju is a kind professor.
Here ‘kind’, is the ‘adjective’ which is describing Dr. Nagaraju’s nature. The word
‘kind’ qualifies the noun ‘professor, denoted by the noun.
Eg2: Dr. Nagaraju is a professor with a kindly nature.
Here ‘with a kindly nature.’ is a phrase tells us what sort of professor Dr. Nagarjau
is. This phrase qualifies the noun, ‘professor’ as an ‘adjective’ does, which is
describing Dr. Nagaraju’s nature. Hence, as it does the job of an adjective, it is called
an adjective phrase.
Find out the adjective phrases in the following sentences.
1) Yashodananda is a lad of great promise.
2) Virinchy is a student with considerable recognition.
3) Adverb Phrase: A group of words, part of a sentence that does the work of an
Adverb.
Eg1: Mr. Aswarthappa speaks wisely.
Here ‘wisely’, is the ‘adverb’ which is modifying the verb ‘speaks’. ‘How’ exactly Mr.
Aswarthappa speaks? Wisely.
Eg2: Mr. Aswarthappa speaks with wisdom.
Here ‘with wisdom.’ is a phrase tells us how Mr. Aswarthappa speaks. It modifies
the verb ‘speaks’ as just the adverb ‘wisely’ does in the first example. This phrase ‘with
wisdom’, does the job of an adverb. Hence, as it does the job of an adverb, it is called
an adverb phrase.
Find out the adverb phrases in the following sentences.
1) Yashodananda acts with bravery.
2) Virinchy reached college in a swift manner.
To conclude, ‘what a phrase is’, a phrase is a group of words, part of a sentence,
which don’t have a subject and predicate, is called a phrase and these are divided into
THREE types and they are Noun Phrase, which acts as a noun, Adjective Phrase,
which acts as an Adjective and Adverb Phrase, which acts an Adverb in the sentences.
To master these different kinds of phrases requires a proper practice and thorough
revision at regular intervals. Now as the phrases are divided into THREE types even
Clauses are also divided into THREE types based on its job or work in a sentence. Let
us learn now ‘Clauses’.
3.5.2. What is a clause?
A group of words which forms part of a sentence, and contains a Subject and a
predicate is called a clause.
In case if a group of words which has a ‘subject’ and ‘predicate’, that has a
complete meaning or sense is called a ‘sentence’.
3.5.2.1. What is the ‘subject’ of the sentence?

The part of the sentence which names the person or thing, the rest of the sentence
talks about is called the ‘subject’ of the sentence. Or, the doer of the action in a
sentence is called the ‘subject’ of the sentence.
Eg: Virinchy is doing workout.
Who is the ‘doer’ of an action in the above sentence? It is ‘Virinchy’ so ‘Virinchy’ is
the subject of the above sentence.
3.5.2.1.2. What is the ‘predicate’ of the sentence?

Eg: Virinchy is doing workout.
The part of the sentence which tells something about the ‘subject’ of the sentence.
Or, the part of the sentence which shows the action does by the subject of the
sentence is called the ‘predicate’ of the sentence.
A predicate mainly has a verb and may or may not have any other words like
object, adjective and etc.
1) Yashodananda has a good memory
2) Virinchy behaves gentle with all the customers.
After learning, what are subject and predicate of the sentence, now let us come
back to ‘clauses’, now read the following sentence.
Virinchy has a pen which is good.
In the above sentence, ‘Virinchy has a pen’, is a complete sentence. But ‘which is
good’, is a group of words, contains ‘which’, ‘subject’ and ‘is good’, predicate, but can’t
withstand on its own for a complete meaning.
‘Which is good’ though it is part of the sentence needs, ‘Virinchy has a pen’ to have
a complete meaning. ‘Which’ is actually refers to ‘pen’ in the sentence.
a Subject and a predicate is called a subordinate clause or dependent clause.
Identify the dependent clauses in the following sentences.
1) Yashodananda who studies well is the class leader.
2) Let’s find Virinchy’s book which has correct information
We should understand what are types of clauses are in English is to understand
tenses, voice and clauses properly in the previous chapters.
3.5.3. How many kinds of clause are in English?
Three are TWO kinds of clauses are in English, according to their meaning or
sense it has in a sentence, and they are
1) Principle or Main or Independent Clause
In the above sentence, ‘Virinchy has a pen’, is a complete sentence. This part of
sentence doesn’t need any other sentence for its complete meaning. Hence it is called
as a ‘Main or Principle of Independent Clause.
So a Principle or Main or Independent Clause is part of a sentence which has
subject and predicate and can withstand on its own for a complete meaning or sense in
the sentence.
2) Dependent or Subordinate Clause
But ‘which is good’, is a group of words, contains ‘which’, ‘subject’ and ‘is
good’, predicate, but can’t withstand on its own for a complete meaning.
‘Which is good’ though it is part of the sentence needs, ‘Virinchy has a pen’ to have
a complete meaning. ‘Which’ is actually refers to ‘pen’ in the sentence.
a Subject and a predicate is called a subordinate clause or dependent clause.
So a subordinate or dependent Clause is part of a sentence which has subject and
predicate and can’t withstand on its own for a complete meaning or sense in the
sentence.
As like phrase the ‘clauses’ are also divided into THREE types, according to the
work or job done by them in a sentence.
Clauses are divided into THREE types and they are
1) Noun Clause: A group of words, part of a sentence, and contains a subject and
predicate, that does the work of a Noun. A noun clause may be used as the subject,
object and [6]complement in a sentence.
Eg1: Virinchy wants football.
Here ‘football’, is the ‘noun’ or ‘object’ of the verb ‘wants’ and ‘wants’ is a ‘transitive’
verb.
Eg2: Virinchy wants to go America.
Here ‘to go America’, is a phrase, acts a ‘noun’ or ‘object’ of the verb ‘wants’ and
‘wants’ is a ‘transitive’ verb. Hence the group of the words, ‘to go America’, does the
job of a ‘noun’ and that’s why ‘to go America’ is a Noun Phrase.
Eg3: Virinchy wants that he will go to America.
Here ‘that he will go to America’, is a dependent clause. It contains a subject ‘he’
and a predicate, ‘will go to America’ of its own and it acts as a ‘noun’ or ‘object’ of the
verb ‘wants’. Hence the group of the words, ‘that he will go to America’, does the job of
a ‘noun’ in this sentence and that’s why ‘‘that he will go to America’ is a Noun Clause.
Find out the noun clause in the following sentence.
1) Yashodananda replied that he would come home.
2) Adjective Clause: A group of words, part of a sentence, and contains a subject
and predicate, that does the work of an Adjective.
Eg1: Dr. Nagaraju is a kind professor.
Here ‘kind’, is the ‘adjective’ which is describing Dr. Nagaraju’s nature. The word
‘kind’ qualifies the noun ‘professor, denoted by the noun.
Eg2: Dr. Nagaraju is a professor with a kindly nature.
Here ‘with a kindly nature.’ is a phrase tells us what sort of professor Dr. Nagarjau
is. This phrase qualifies the noun, ‘professor’ as an ‘adjective’ does, which is
describing Dr. Nagaraju’s nature. Hence, as it does the job of an adjective, it is called
an adjective phrase.
Eg3: Dr. Nagaraju has a car which has a jet engine.
Here ‘which has a jet engine.’ is a clause tells us what sort of car
Dr. Nagarjau has. This clause qualifies or describes the noun, ‘car’ and so does the job
of an ‘adjective’. Hence, as it does the job of an adjective, it is called an adjective
clause.
Find out the adjective clauses in the following sentences.
1) Yashodananda has a pet Rosy whose fur was white as snow.
2) Virinchy never does anything that is irrational.
3) Adverbial Clause: A group of words, part of a sentence, and contains a subject
and predicate, that does the work of an Adverb.
Eg1: Mr. Aswarthappa speaks wisely.
Here ‘wisely’, is the ‘adverb’ which is modifying the verb ‘speaks’. ‘How’ exactly Mr.
Aswarthappa speaks? Wisely.
Eg2: Mr. Aswarthappa speaks with wisdom.
Here ‘with wisdom.’ is a phrase tells us how Mr. Aswarthappa speaks. It modifies
the verb ‘speaks’ as just the adverb ‘wisely’ does in the firs example. This phrase ‘with
wisdom’, does the job of an adverb. Hence, as it does the job of an adverb, it is called
an adverb phrase.
Eg3: Mr. Aswarthappa speaks when his turn comes.
Here ‘when his turn comes.’ is a clause. It modifies the verb ‘speaks’ as just the
adverb ‘wisely’ does in the first example. Hence, as it does the job of an adverb, it is
called an adverbial clause.
Find out the adverbial clauses in the following sentences.
1) Yashodananda acts bravely when required.
2) Virinchy reached a hotel where his friends are already
3) Yashoda and Swamy went to a pub where prizes are ok.
To conclude, ‘what a clause is’, a clause is a group of words, part of a sentence,
which has a subject and predicate, is called a clause and these are divided into
THREE types and they are Noun Clause, which acts as a noun, Adjective Clause,
which acts as an Adjective and Adverbial Clause, which acts an Adverb in the
sentences.
3.5.4. How exactly to identify what kind of clause given in the question?
This is the difficult stage to master the clauses. But need not to worry here are the
tricks or tips which help you to identify the correct clause in the exam. Let us learn
these tricks with the below example.
Eg1: The night is long that never finds a day.
a) Principal clause
b) Adverbial clause
c) Adjective clause
d) Noun clause
The answer to the above question, ‘that never finds a day’ is a ‘noun clause’.
Because you may replace the entire noun clause with an actual noun, ‘ends’.
Tip 1: Try to exchange the entire clause with a noun. After exchanging, if it sounds
meaningful and sentence still makes sense, then it is a noun clause, without any doubt.
Try the same tip to exchange the entire clause with an adjective or an adverb. After
exchanging, if it sounds meaningful and sentence still makes sense, then it is an
adjective or an adverbial clause.
Tip 2: Understand the relation between the first words in the dependent clause ‘that’
with the word in the ‘principal clause’, ‘the night is long’. The word ‘that’ refers to the
‘noun’ or ‘subject’ ‘The Night’ in the principal clause. So the entire clause, that never
finds a day’ acts as a noun in the sentence. Hence it is a noun clause.
Tip 3: If you fail to replace with a noun, an adjective and an adverb, which is very
obvious, and fail to find the relation between the first words in the dependent clause
with the word in the main clause, then FINALLY try “ELEMINATION METHOD” in the
following way.
When you read the clause, ‘that never finds a day’, you very well know that it is not
a ‘principal clause’ because it has no complete meaning.
It can’t be an adjective clause because it is not qualifying or describing the noun. It
even can’t be an adverbial clause because it is not modifying the verb ‘is’ in the
question sentence.
Hence after eliminating all the possibly wrong answer options the one which left is
the option D which is a noun clause.
Follow any one of the above tips and identify the correct clause in the exam. This
part of the question paper is tough but answering these question correct surely turn
your dream into reality of becoming a PGT English in Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan.
3.6. Modals
This is the easiest topic among all the topics in grammar, if you know when to use
‘ought’ exactly. Many questions on modals come in the previous exams testing ‘used’,
‘ought’ and ‘might’ only. Not ‘can’, ‘shall’ and etc. so let us learn ‘modals’ quickly and
briefly in KVS LDCE Exams’ point of view, without any delay.
3.6.1. What are modals?

These are actually part of ‘Auxiliary Verbs’. These ‘Auxiliary Verbs’ are also called
as ‘helping verbs’ or ‘special verbs’ or ‘modal auxiliaries’ or ‘modals’.
These ‘modal verbs’ with ‘main verb’, express attitudes like permission, possibility,
necessity and etc. For example,
1) May I come in? – Permission
2) I might rain. – Possibility
3) You need to visit doctor. - Necessity
3.6.2. How many ‘modal verbs' are in English?
The modals in English are
a) Easy: can, could, shall, should, will, would
b) Moderate: may, might, must, ought, have
c) Difficult: used, need, dare
The modal verbs in ‘a’ are easy to very easy so they may not be asked very
frequently in the exams. The modals given in ‘b’ & ‘c’ must be thoroughly understood
and practiced to identify exactly which modal is correct to the given question. For
example,
1. Everybody ____ know more than one language. (KVS NE 2018)
a) Mustb) Ought to c) Will d) Shall
In the above question the confusion is in between ‘must’ & ‘ought to’. Both the
answers seems correct but the most appropriate answer is, ‘Everybody ought to know
more than one language’. Why? The reason is ‘must’ is used for necessity or
obligation. ‘Ought’ is used moral obligation and desirability. So in the question
sentence, knowing more than one language is a moral obligation or desirable for
everybody. These kind of question ‘may’ come in the exams, and you ‘need’ to learn
the modals without fail. So let’s start to learn modals, now.
Set 1: Easy Modal Verbs:
1) Can & Could: are mainly used to express ability, capacity possibility and
sometimes permission.
a) Virinchy can lift 100 kg rice packet. (ability)
b) Yashodananda can squat 150 kg. (capacity)
c) Any student can solve this question paper. (possibility)
d) Can I barrow your car? (permission)
e) Mr. Swamy could benchpress 80kgs. (ability in the past)
f) It could have been solved then, but none tried seriously. (possibility in the
past)
g) Could I barrow your pen? (permission - more polite)
2) Shall, will, should & would: shall & will are used to express future possibility.
Should and would are used to express advice, suggestion, duty and
obligation. Some times would is also used for very polite requests.
a) I shall be fifty next year. (Future)
b) He will be fifity five next month. (Future)
c) Virinchy should have been more careful to clear the exam. (a past obligation
that was not fulfilled)
d) Yashodananda would sit for hours to play online games (past habbit)
e) Would you lend me your car please? (request – more polite)
Set 2: Moderate:
1) May & Might: ‘may’ is used to express permission & possibility. ‘Might’ is used
to express, a less degree of positivity or possibility.
a) You may go now. (Permission)
b) He may reach home soon (possibility)
c) It migh rain tomorrow. (less positive or probable)
d) She though he might marry her. (past possibility)
e) May God Bless You. (wish)
f) May I come in? (Request)
g) I might have come. (past possibility)
2) Must, ought & Have (to): used to express obligation and compulsion. But each
one used with a slight variation in the meaning.
‘Must’ used to express necessity or obligation or determination.
a) Virinchy must get into the job to surview. (necessity)
b) Every body must obey the laws. (obligation)
c) All must fallow traffic rules. (compulsion)
d) I must complet the job. (determination)
‘Ought’ (to) is used to express moral obligation, desirability and a strong

probability.
a) We ought to love our culture. (Moral obligation)
b) You ought to know more languages. (Desirability)
c) Kantara movie ought to be a great success. (strong probability)
‘Have’ (to), used to indicate obligation (less), advice, suggestion.

a) Virinchy has to go to college. (Obligation)
b) Yashodananda has to study propely (suggestion)
c) You have to visit doctor. (Advice)
d) Difficult: used, need, dare:

‘Used’ (to), to refere to a past habitual action which is discontinued in the prest.
a) Yashodanand used to score top marks in class. (Discontinued habit)
b) Mr. Swamy used to live a village when he was a kid. (refers to a past action)
‘Need’ (to) necessity and obligation in positive sentences and absenece of

necessity in negative sentences. Question are mostly asked in negative
sentences.
a) Virinchy needn’t to fight with Yashodananda for white papers, as many are
available. (Absence of necessity)
b) Yashodananda need not to go for tutions. (Absence of necessity)
c) You need my help to cross the road. (Necessity)
‘Dare’ is used to express ‘bravery’ in positive sentences and ‘challenge’ in
negative sentences.
a) He dare to jump from the top of the building. (Bravery)
b) How dare you to talk to me? (Challenge)
c) She doesn’t dare to challeng me.
You ‘must’ focous on ‘ought’, ‘might’ and ‘should’ while preapring for KVS LDCE,
exam so that you ‘can’ clear the exam without any ‘need’ to worry.
1. You ____ look after your aged parents. (KVS NE 2018)
a) Must b) Ought to c) Will d) Shall
2. Had she known about it, she _ have stayed longer. (KVS NE 2018)
a) Must b) Ought to c) Will d) Should
3. Kalki ___ paid the fee. They won’t collect now. (KVS NE 2018)
a) Must have b) should have c) Would have d) could have
4. Ram has revised all day. He __ be ready for the exam. (KVS 2018)
a) Must b) Ought to c) Will d) Should
Answers: 1. B 2. D 3. B 4. D
4.6. Voice
In this chapter you study ‘Voice’. And ‘Voice’ is in TWO types and they are, Active
Voice and Passive Voice. Before we directly jump into ‘Voice’ let us quicky study ‘kind
of verbs’, which help us to learn Active Voice and Passive voice clearly and more
importantly during transformation of ‘Active voice’ into ‘passive voice’ or vice versa.
4.6.1. How many kinds of verbs are in English?
There are TWO kinds of verbs are in English and they are
1) Transitive Verb
2) Intransitive Verb
What is a Transitive Verb?

A transitive verb has an object. Let us observe the below example.
Eg 1: Virinchy wants football. Here ‘football’, ‘object’ of the verb ‘wants’. Hence
‘wants’ is a ‘transitive’ verb.
How to identify a verb is a transitive or intransitive?
Ask ‘what’ or ‘whom’ to the given ‘verb’ in the sentence. If the answer comes, then
the given verb is a transitive verb otherwise it is an intransitive verb. For example,
Dr. Nagaraju teach English at Univesity.
If we ask ‘what’ or ‘whom’ to given verb ‘teach’ …
Dr. Nagaraju teach what? The answer is ‘English’, and it is the ‘object’ to verb
‘teach’. Hence ‘teach’ is a transitive verb.
Dr. Nagaraju teach English to Medha.
If we ask ‘what’ or ‘whom’ to given verb ‘teach’ …
Dr. Nagaraju teach ‘what?” The answer is ‘English’, and it is the ‘object’ to verb
‘teach’. Hence ‘teach’ is a transitive verb.
Dr. Nagaraju teachs English to ‘Whom?’ The answer is ‘Medha’, it is the ‘Indirect
object’ to verb ‘teach’. Hence ‘teach’ is a transitive verb.
Answer to question ‘what’ is always things and ‘whom’ is person. Things are ‘direct
objects’ and persons are ‘indirect objects’.
Dr. Nagaraju teach English to Medha, has a direct object ‘English’ and an indirect
object ‘Medha’.
What is an Intransitive Verb?
An intransitive verb does hav an object. Let us observe the below example.
a) Mr. Swamy looks handsome.
b) Mrs. Durga looks beautiful.
Ask ‘what’ or ‘whom’ to the given ‘verb’ ‘look’ in the sentence. No answer comes, so
the verb ‘look’ in the above sentence has no object. And the verb which doesnot have
an object is called an intransitive verb.
Then, what are handsome & beautiful in the above sentences, they are adjectives.
Beacause they qualify the nouns Mr. Swamy and Mrs. Durga.
But why did we learn what is a transitive verb and what is an intransitive verb? The
reason is ‘only’ the sentenes which have ‘transitive verbs’ can be transformed from
‘Active Voice’ into ‘Passive Voice’ and vice versa.
the sentenes which have ‘intransitive verbs’ can written only in ‘Active Voice’ and
they can not be transformed from ‘Active Voice’ into ‘Passive Voice’.
Now let us learn what is an Active Voice and a Passive Voice?
4.6.1. What is an Active Voice?
When the verb gives importance to the subject of the sentence or doer of the action
in the sentence.
Eg: Dr. Nagaraju plays football.
The verb ‘plays’ gives importance to the subject ‘Dr. Nagaraju’ or it shows who does
the action in the sentence. ‘Who play football? It is Dr. Nagaraju, so obviously doer or
subject is given importance.
Football is played by Dr. Nagaraju.
In the above sentence the verb, ‘is played’ shows something is done to or by Dr.
Nagaraju. The action done by the subject is more imporatant than the subject. Hene
the verb ‘is played’ is in ‘passive voice’.
It is clear now that a verb in the sentence can be in ‘active voice’ or ‘passive voice’.
It depends upon whom or what to give importance in a sentence. Whether to give
importance to the subject or action done by the subject?
4.6.1. What is a voice?

A voice is a form of a verb which is in a sentence shows whether the importance is
given to the subject/doer or the action done to/by the subject. So ‘Voice’ of the verb in a
sentence gives information about what is beign given importance in the sentence.
Eg: Prime Minsiter visited my home.
The verb ‘visited’ is in ‘active voice’, becaue ‘Prime Minsiter’ is the ‘subject’ and
more important than ‘my home’. So the verb must show importance to the subject here.
Eg: National Flag is hoisted by Prime Minister.
The verb ‘is hoisted’ is in ‘passive voice’, becaue ‘Prime Minsiter’ is the ‘subject’ but
less important than ‘National Flag’. So the verb must show importance to the action
done by the subject. Here ‘hoisting the national flag.’
In the other way the passive voice is so called, because the subject is passive or
inactive or receiver of the action in the sentence.
Eg: Panda is caught by the forest department, when it fell asleep.
Here it is clear that the subject, ‘Panda’ is passive or inactive or not doing anything
instead receives the action of ‘getting caught’ without any effort.
After understanding the above information let us now learn how to transform a
transitive verb from active voice into passive voice and vice verca with an example.
Dr. Nagaraju plays football.
Foot ball is played by Dr. Nagarju.
While transforming the intransitive verb, ‘play’ into a ‘passive voice’, a ‘be’ form (is)
used + Past particple or v3 form of the verb is used + a conjunction is also used. So
the formual “be + v3 + by” to be followed to transform a verb from active voice into
passive voice always. Now let us lern rules to transform the sentence according to
‘Tense’ and ‘kinds of sentences’ without any delay.
4.6.2. Forming the Passive according to ‘Tense’ of the Verb.
1) The Passive voice is formed by be + past participle (v3).
2) ‘Be’ from takes the ‘Tense’ of the original active verb.
3) The object becomes the subject.[7]
4) The verb agrees in number with the new subject.
In this table you may observe the verb ‘kick’ transformation from active into passive
voice. The subject and object both are singular in the below chart.
TENSE ACTIVE PASSIVE

Simple
Swamy kicks the football. The football is kicked by Swamy.
Present
Present. Swamy is kicking the foot The football is being kicked by
progressive ball. Swamy.
Present Swamy has kicked the The football has being kicked by
Perfect football. Swamy.
Swamy kicked the The football was kicked by
Simple Past
football. Swamy.
Past. Swamy was kicking the The football was being kicked by
Progressive football. Swamy.
Swamy had kicked the The football had being kicked by
Past Perfect
football. Swamy.
Swamy will kicks the The football will be kicked by
Simple Future
football. Swamy.
Swamy is going to kick The football is going to be kicked
Be going to
the football. by Swamy.
In this table the subject is ‘Singular’ in active voice but ‘Plural’ in passive voice. Obseve
the transformation carefully.
TENSE ACTIVE PASSIVE
Simple Swamy kicks the bottles. The bottles are kicked by Swamy.
Present
Present. Swamy is kicking the The bottles are being kicked by
progressive bottles Swamy.
Present Swamy has kicked the The bottles have being kicked by
Perfect bottles. Swamy.
Swamy kicked the The bottles were kicked by
Simple Past
bottles. Swamy.
Past. Swamy was kicking the The bottles were being kicked by
Progressive bottles. Swamy.
Swamy had kicked the The bottles had being kicked by
Past Perfect
bottles. Swamy.
Swamy will kicks the The bottles will be kicked by
Simple Future
bottles. Swamy.
Swamy is going to kick The bottles are going to be kicked
Be going to
the bottles. by Swamy.
Simple Present
Past Continuous/Progressive
S + V1 + O - A.V
S + was/were +V1+ing + O - A.V
O + am /is/are+ V3 by + O -
O + am /is/are+ V3 + by + O - P.V
P.V
Present
Continuous/Progressive
Past Perfect
S + am/is/areV1+ing + O -
S + had +V3 + O - A.V
A.V
O + had + been +V3 + by + O - P.V
O + am /is/are+ V3 + by +
O - P.V
Present Perfect
Simple Future
S + has/have +V3 + O - A.V
S + will/shall + V1 + O - A.V
O + has/have + been
O + will/shall be + V3 + by + O - P.V
+V3by + O - P.V
Simple Future
S + V2 + O - A.V *The above are the structure of verb in different
O + was /were+ V3 by + O - tenses in AV & PV.
P.V
4.6.3. Voice on kinds of sentences

After learning transformation of Active form of verb into passive form of verb or
tansformation of a sentence from active voice into passive voice on different tenses
and structure of the verb in different tenses with singular and plural subjects.
Now let us learn transformation of active voice into passive voice and vice versa
according to different kinds of sentences in English.
How many kinds of sentences are in English?


You may go now.
Stand up!
Now let us know forming the Passive voice of the Verb, according to
4.6.4. Assertive or Declarative sentences:
1) Swamy kicks the football.
2) The football is kicked by Swamy.
In the first sentence, the intransitive verb, ‘kicks’ transformed into ‘is kicked’ into a
‘passive voice’, a ‘be’ form (is) used + Past particple or v3 form of the verb (kicked) is
used + a conjunction (by) is also used.
So the formual “be + v3 + by” to be followed to transform a transitve verb from
active voice into passive voice always, in an assertive or declarative senteces.
The tense of the transitive verb is very important. What ever you have learnt in the
last TWO pages is applicable for ‘Assertive or Declarative Sentences’. Now we will
practice a question.
Directions: Voice in the below sentences has been changed. Chose the option in
which it has been changed correctly.
1. The PM inaugurated Yoga Day.
a) Yoga day is inaugurated by the PM
b) Yoga day has been inaugurated by the PM
c) Yoga day was inaugurated by the PM
d) Yoga day inaugurated by the PM
The answer is, ‘Yoga day was inaugurated by the PM’. Because the verb
‘inaugurated’ is in the past form or past tense so while transforming the verb we have
to use past form of be form i.e. ‘was’ + past participle form of the given verb i.e.
‘inaugurated’ and add conjunction ‘by’. Then according to the rule option C is the
correct answer.
2. My uncle promised me a present. (KVS NE 2018)
a) A present is promised by my uncle to me.
b) I was promised a present by my uncle.
c) I had been promised a present by my uncle.
d) I has been promised a present by my uncle.
The above sentence in an imperative sentence, expressing ‘promise’ and the
subject is ‘My Uncle’, the verb is, ‘promised’ it is in the ‘past tense’ and the direct object
is ‘ a present’ and indierect object is ‘me’.
By following all the rules we have learnt in the previous pages, the passive form of
the above sentence is
I was promised a present by my uncle. Or
I was promised by my uncle a present.
So the option ‘B’ is correct.
Generally you don’t get questions on assertive or declarative sentences in KVS
LDCE exam, because they are very easy to solve. The questions always come from
Interrogative senteces and Imperative senences. So in KVS LDCE, exams poin to view
we must learn transformation of active voice into passive voice on interrogative and
imperative sentences.
4.6.5. Interrogative sentence.

An Interrogative Sentence in Active Voice keeps its Interrogative from in its Passive
Voice i.e. passive voice aslo remains in question form and end with a question mark.
There are TWO types of question are there.
1) Questions asked for information
1) What is your name?
2) Where are you doing?
These are known as ‘Wh’ questions. If any interrogative sentence begins with an
auxiliary verb like is, was, are and etc or ‘Wh’ –word then the sentence can be directly
changed into passive voice in the following way.
1) By what name are you known?
2) What is being done by you?
In the above sentence, ‘what are you doing?’, ‘you’ is the subject and the subject
acts upon the verb ‘doing’ thus it is active. After transformation, the
subject ‘you’ becomes the receiver of the verb’s action in passive voice.
So in passive voice, ‘doing’ becomes be + ing + past participle v3 i.e. ‘being done”.
So the the passive voice is “What is being done by you”. Since the subject ‘you’ no
longer acts upon the verb thus, it becomes passive.
2) Questions asked for confirmation
Are you coming to school?
Do you like the movie?
For these kind of question there are only TWO types of replies. Either ‘Yes’ or No’.
That’s why these are known as ‘Yes-No’ Type Questions
If the Interrogative Sentence begins with the Verb do or did then we may have to
change it first into Assertive sentence and then into Interrogative.
Do you like the move? – Active Voice
You like the move. - Assertive Sentence or [8]Positive Sentence.
When you change a question sentence into a positive sentence the ‘subject’ comes
first and ‘verb’ comes next. In the above sentence ‘You’ is the subject, ‘like’ is the verb
and ‘the movie’ is the object.
When changed into passive voice, the assertive sentence changes into a question
sentence. So we have to begin the sentene with a ‘Be’ form. As the subject, ‘The
movie’, in the passive voice is singular and the verb, ‘like’ is a past form of the verb or
in past tense, we have to use ‘Is’, past participle form of the verb ‘like’ which is ‘liked’
and conjunction ‘by’.
So in passive voice, ‘like’ becomes Is + (past participle v3) i.e. ‘liked’ + by. Hence
the the passive voice is “Is the move liked by you?” Since the subject ‘you’ no longer
acts upon the verb thus, it becomes passive.
Now let us understand a few rules in transformation of sentences on interrogatives.
Rule 1: This rule is applicable for ‘Yes-No Type Questions’
If any Active Voice Sentence started with ‘Do’, ‘Does, ‘did’ then to transform it into
Passive voice we have to change it with ‘Am’, ‘Is’, ‘Are’, ‘Was’, ‘Were’ in place of ‘Do’,
‘Does, ‘Did’ as per ‘Subject’. Example:
Active Passive
Do you like the move? Is the movie liked by you?
Does Mrs. Rani sing songs? Are songs sung by Mrs. Rani?
Did Mr. Swamy complete the story? Was the story completed by Mr. Swamy?
Did Virinchy and Yashodananda Were the stories completed by Virinchy
complee the stories? and Yashodananda?
Is Virinchy doing the Job? Is the job being done by Virinchy?
Are Dr. Nagaraju and Mr. Swamy Are vegetables being purchased by Dr.
purchasing vegetables? Nagaraju and Mr. Swamy?
Will they help Yashodananda? Will Yashodananda be helped by them?
Will Rani and Saipriay be helped by
Will they help Rani and Saipriay
them?
Let us practice a few more questions now
Did you clean you table? – Active Voice
Was your table cleaned by you? – Passive Voice
Have you paid the bill? – Active Voice
Has the bill been paid by you? Passive Voice
Rule 2: This rule is applicable for ‘Wh’ Type Questions’.

If an active voice sentence starts with ‘Who’ then in Passive voice it will start with
‘By whom’.
Active Passive
Who did it? By whom was it done?
Who made this poster? By whom was this poster made?
Who is singing a song? By whom is a song being sung?
If the sentence starts with ‘Wh-word’ in Active Voice then proper form of ‘be’ verb
will be placed after ‘Wh-word’ in Passive Voice.
Active Passive
Where do you need it? Where is it needed by you?
What do you need? What is needed by you?
How can you do it? How can it be done by you?
If any sentence starts with ‘Which’ then Subject will be placed after ‘Which’ to form
Passive Voice.
Active Passive
Which juice do you want? Which juice is wanted by you?
Which book do you like? Which book is liked by you?
Which place did she like? Which place was liked by her?
In negative sentences observe the transformation of verb.
Active Passive
I do not like the movie. The movie is not liked by me.
Has he not seen the movie? Has not the movie been seen by him?
Rani will not call Swamy. Swamy will not be called by Rani.
The interrogative form of sentence is VERY Important as many question were
asked in the previous year KVS PGT exams. So we must practice as many sentences
as possible.
Directions: Voice in the below sentence has been changed. Chose the option
1. Who took it? (KVS 2018)
a) Who was it taken by?
b) By whom was it taken?
c) It was taken by whom?
d) It was taken by who?
2. How will you watch him? (KVS 2018)
a) How will he be watched by you?
b) Who will be watched by him?
c) By whom will he be watched?
d) You will be watched by whom?
3. Which subject do you like?
a) What subject is liked by you?
b) What subject was liked by you?
c) Which subject is liked by you?
d) Which subject was liked by you?
After completion of interrogative sentences now let us learn how to tansform an

imperative sentence from active voice into passive voice.
Answers: 1 B 2. A 3. C
4.6.5. Imperative sentence.

A sentence which expresses a command, request, permission and etc. let us learn
how to transform an imperative sentence from active voice into passive voice.
The transformation of imperative sentenes are totally different from other forms of
sentences. The subject is not directly mentioned, it implied or understood.
It shows a message in form of an advice, request, command and etc to a receiver
or listener.
There are a few rules in converting an imperative sentence.
Rule 1: ‘Let’ is used in the beginning of the passive voice.
Rule 2: ‘Be’ is used before the main verb (v3) in the passive voice.
Rule 3: ‘Past Participle’ (v3) form of verb is used in passive voice.
Eg: Open the window – Active Voice

Let the window be open. – Passive Voice
Clean the room – Active Voice
Let the room be cleaned – Passive voice.
Respect the elders – Active Voice
Let the elders be respected – Passive Voice
4.6.5. Exclamatory sentence.

Which expresses strong feelings of surprise. Question are very rarely asked on this
form of sentence. Let us learn how to transform the active voice into passive voice.
What a great person you are! – Active Voice
You are exclaimed to be a great person – Passive Voice
May God help us! – Active Voice
May we are helped by God. – Passive Voice
The verb in passive voice must be converted into ‘exclaimed’ or mood of the
sentence must be a surprise. As we don’t expect many question from this form let us
not waste worry about these ‘imperative and exclamatory sentences’.
Practice;
Directions: Voice in the below sentences has been changed. Chose the option in
which it has been changed correctly.
1. He decided to sell the house. (KVS 2018)
a) It was decided by him that the house was to be sold
b) He dicided that the house had to be sold.
c) He decided to sale the house.
d) It was decided by him that the house should to be sold
2. You should boil the wate before you use it. (KVS 2018)
a) The water should be boiled before it uses.
b) The water should be boiled before use.
c) The water should be boiled before it is used.
d) The water should be boiled before you use it.
3. Prepare yourself for the worst. (KVS 2018)
a) You are requested to prepare yourself for the worst.
b) You should prepare for the worst.
c) Be prepared for the worst.
d) The worst should be prepared by you.
Answers 1. A 2. C 3. B
4.7. Direct Speech and Indirect Speech
Though ‘Speech’ is not included in the ‘Grammar & Usage’ as per the KVS LDCE
syllabus, but in previous year PGT & TGT exams many questions were asked form this
area. So we can’t neglect this area at any cost. Hence, keep your doubts aside and
let’s do this.
In this chapter you study ‘Speech’ and ‘Speech’ is in TWO types and they are,
Direct Speech and Indirect Speech.
Medha said to Dr. Nagaraju, “I am happy”.
The above sentence is said to be in ‘Direct Speech”.
What is a Direct Speech?
If the sentence which quote the exact words spoken by the speaker or subject in a
sentence then that sentence is said to be in ‘Direct Speech’.
Medha told Dr. Nagaraju that she was happy.
The above sentence is said to be in “In Direct Speech”.
If the sentence report what the speaker or subject said without quoting the exact
words spoken by the speaker or subject in a sentence then that sentence is said to be
in ‘In Direct Speech’.
4.7.1. How to change a sentence from Direct Speech into Indirect Speech?
Medha said to Dr. Nagarjau, “I am happy”.
Let us understand that the above sentence has TWO parts. Reporting Sentence
and Reported Sentence.
Medha said to Dr. Nagaraju – is the “Reporting Sentence”.
Because it is reporting about who is the speaker or who is speaking. Sometimes
who is speaking to whom also?
‘Said’ is a Reporting Verb or Principal Verb
Because it is part of the reporting sentence and conveys the action of the speaker
or subject.
“I am happy”. Is the ‘Reported Sentence or Reporting Speech”.
It is the exact sentence spoken by the speaker or subject of the sentence. Hence it
is known as ‘Reported Sentence” or “Reporting Speech”.
We need to understand what a reporting sentence is, reporting verb and reported
sentence is before learning about transformation of sentences from direct speech into
indirect speech. Let’s learn rules for changing according to the tense of the ‘Reporting
Verb’ or on “Tenses”.
4.7.2. Rules for changing Direct into Indirect – Reporting Verb

When the reporting verb is in the ‘Past Tense’ all the Present Tenses, Past Tenses
and Future Tenses are changed into corresponding Past, and Present and Conditional
continuous. Let us observe that in below chart.
‘Said’ in direct speech remains same in the indirect speech. But ‘said to’ changes
into ‘told’ in indirect speech. We use conjunction ‘that’ in indirect speech.
Direct Speech Indirect Speech
Simple Present Simple Past
Swamy said to Rani, “I am good”. Swamy told Rani that he was good.
Present continuous Past Continuous
Swamy said to Rani, “I am going to Swamy told Rani that he was going to
college now”. college then.
Present Perfect Past Perfect
Swamy said to Rani, “I have gone to Swamy told Rani that he had gone to
college”. college.
Simple Past Past Perfect
Swamy said to Rani, “I went to Swamy told Rani that he had gone to
college yesterday”. college.
Past continuous Past Perfect Continuous
Swamy said to Rani, “I was going to Swamy told Rani that he had been
college”. going to college.
Simple Future Present Conditional
Swamy said to Rani, “I will go to Swamy told Rani that he would go to
college tomorrow”. college tomorrow.
Future Continuous Conditional Continuous
Swamy said to Rani, “I will be going Swamy told Rani that he would be going
to college tomorrow”. to college tomorrow.
The words which express nearness in time and space are changed into words
expressing distance. You may observe in the below chart.
now then
Ago Before
Thus So
Today That day
Tomorrow The next day, The following day
Yesterday The day before, The previous day
Last night The night before, The previous night
4.7.3. Exemptions to the above said rules:

Rule 1: In indirect speech, tenses do not change if the ‘Reported Sentence’ or
‘Reporting Speech’ is about a habitual action or universal truth.
Swamy said to Rani, “I go to college everyday”. – Direct Speech.
Swamy told Rani that he goes to college every day. – Indirect Speech.
In the above sentence the tense of the ‘Reported Sentence’ is not changed
because it takes about a habitual action of the speaker Mr. Swamy.
If you observe the verb go become goes in the indirect speech because the
pronouns of direct speech are changed according to the number and person of the
speaker or subject of the reporting sentence.
Rule 2: In indirect speech, tenses do not change if the ‘Reporting Verb’ is in
‘Present Tense’ and “Future Tense.
Swamy says to Rani, “I go to college today”. – Direct Speech.
Swamy tells Rani that he goes to college today. – Indirect Speech
Swamy will say to Rani, “I am going to college”. – Direct Speech.
Swamy will tell Rani that he is going to college” – Indirect Speech
In the above sentences tense in ‘Indirect Speech’ remains same.
Now let’s learn how to transform sentences from direct speech into indirect speech
on ‘Kinds of Sentence’.
How many kinds of sentences are in English?


You may go now.
Stand up!
Now let us know transforming from direct speech into Indirect Speech.
4.7.4. Assertive or Declarative sentences:
Medha said to Dr. Nagarjau, “I am happy”. – Direct Speech

Medha told Dr. Nagaraju that she was happy. – In Direct Speech.
All the rules which you have learn so far are applicable for Assertive or Declarative
sentences. So let’s not waste time again here on this form of sentences.
You have to be very careful with the ‘tense’ of the ‘reporting verb’ in the ‘reporting
sentence’. According to the tense of the ‘reporting verb’ you have to transform the
tense of the verb in the indirect speech.
Remember that ‘say’, ‘says’, ‘said’ in direct speech remains same in the indirect
speech. But ‘says to’ changed into ‘tell’, and ‘said to’ changes into ‘told’, in indirect
speech.
4.7.5. Interrogative sentence.

Rule 1: The reporting verb ‘said’ and ‘said to’ in direct speech changes into ‘asked’
or ‘inquired’ in In Direct Speech.
Rule 2: If the question stats with a reporting verb then ‘if’ should be used in place of
‘that’
Rule 3: If the question starts with ‘Wh’ – words or interrogative words like who,
when, how, why, what then the reporting verb is followed by whether or if.
Let us observe the transformation of interrogative sentences below.
Medha said to Yashodananda, Medha asked Yashodananda what his
“What is your name?” name was.
Medha said to Yashodananda, Medha asked Yashodananda what he
“What are you doing?” was doing.
Medha said to Yashodananda, Medha asked Yashodananda where he
“Where are you going?” was going.
Medha said to Yashodananda, Medha asked Yashodananda where he
“Where do you live”? lived.
Medha said to Yashodananda, “Will Medha asked Yashodananda whether he
you come to my home?” would come to her home or not.
Medha said to Yashodananda, “Are Medha asked Yashodananda whether he
you listening to songs?” was listening to songs or not.
Medha asked Yashodananda, “Have Medha asked Yashodananda whether he
you completed your homework?” had completed his homework or not.
In this way you have to convert the interrogative sentence from direct speech into
indirect speech.
4.7.6. Imperative sentence.

A sentence which expresses a command, request, permission and etc. let us learn
how to transform from direct speech into indirect speech.
Rule 1: The reporting verb ‘said’ and ‘said to’ in direct speech changes into
‘request’, ‘command’ and etc. in In Direct Speech.
Rule 2: The imperative mood in direct speech is changed into infinitive in indirect
speech.
Rule 3: ‘To’ preposition is used before the reporting verb.
Let us observe the transformation of imperative sentences below.
Virinchy said to Yashodananda, “Go Virinchy ordered Yashodananda to go
away”. away.
Virinchy said to Yashodananda, Virinchy requested Yashodananda to
“Please wait here”. wait there.
Virinchy said to Yashodananda, “Let Virinchy shouted at Yashodananda to
me go”. let him go.
Virinchy said to Yashodananda, “Be Virinchy urged Yashodananda to be
quiet and listen to me”. quiet and listen to him.
4.7.7. Exclamatory sentence.
The verb in direct speech must be converted into ‘exclaimed’, ‘applauded’ and
‘wished’ or mood of the sentence must be a surprise.
Yashodananda said, “Bravo! You have done very well.” – Direct Speech.
Yashodananda applauded him saying that he had done well. – In Direct
Virinchy said, “Alas! I am done with exams” – Direct Speech
Virinchy exclaimed happily that he was done with exams. – In Direct
In this way we have to transform sentences from direct into indirect speech on
exclamatory sentences. There may be questions asked from different forms of the
sentences so we should not neglect this areas and should prepare thoroughly.
4.7.8. Modals:
These are actually part of ‘Auxiliary Verbs’. These ‘Auxiliary Verbs’ are also called
as ‘helping verbs’ or ‘special verbs’ or ‘modal auxiliaries’ or ‘modals’.
The modals in English are
a) Easy: can, could, shall, should, will, would
b) Moderate: may, might, must, ought, have
c) Difficult: used, need, dare
Rule 1: The modals can, may, must changes into could, might and had to or would
have to. For example
Dr. Nagaraju said, “I can teach French.” – Direct Speech

Dr. Nagaraju sad that he could teach French. – Indirect Speech
Mrs. Saipriya said, “I may go”. – Direct Speech

Mrs. Saipriay said that she might go. – Indirect speech.
Mrs. Rani said, “I must learn English’. Direct Speech

Mrs. Rani said that she had to leran English – Indirect Speech
Rule 2: The modals could, would, should, might, ought to do not change in Indiect
speech.
Dr. Nagaraju said, “I could teach French.” – Direct Speech

Dr. Nagaraju sad that he could teach French. – Indirect Speech
Mrs. Saipriya said, “I should go”. – Direct Speech

Mrs. Saipriay said that she should go. – Indirect speech.
Mrs. Rani said, “I might learn English’. Direct Speech

Mrs. Rani said that she might leran English – Indirect Speech
Mr. Swamy said, “I ought to learn French.” – Direct Speech

Dr. Nagaraju sad that he ought to learn French. – Indirect Speech
You should understand and practice all the above rules with the help of CBTs to
score out and out marks in this area.
Practice;
Directions: Identify the setences in which the direct speech has been changed
correctly.
1. The master said to Sohan, “Have you posted the letter I gave you yesterday?”
(KVS 2018)
a) The master asked Sohan if he had posted the letter he gave him yesterday.
b) The master asked Sohan if he had posted the letter he had given him the
previous day.
c) Sohan was asked by his master if he had posted the letter he gave him
yesterday.
d) The master asked Sohan if he has posted the letter he gave him yesterday.
Answers 1. B
With this we have completed studying all the topics in the “Grammar & Usage’
completely. You may get some gammar topics in ‘Additional Reading’ chapter. If any
confusion revise the topics and practice the questions.
5. NCERT TEXT BOOKS
We have completed all the parts of the syllabus, but you can’t neglect the lessons
form, NCERT Text Books prescribed for Class XI and Class XII. As you have applied
for PGT English Post in KVS through LDCE, you must be thorough with the ‘Contents’
of the text books. The reasons are,
1. You may get questions directly from the prescribed lessons, poems and
short stories from NCERT English text books for the Class XI and XII.
2. In ‘Interview’, you will be definitely asked to explain any lesson or poem
from the Class XI and XII NCERT text books.
3. In ‘Interview’, you may be asked to tell the names of the lessons and their
writers, from NCERT English text books for the Class XI and XII, failing that,
the interview board may feel that you are not come fully prepared to interview.
4. You may be asked questions from the lesssons on theme, characters, moral
and etc.
5. You may be asked about the name of NCERT English text books for the
Class XI and XII.
6. You may be asked to compare the standard of NCERT English text books
for the Class XI and XI with your state board text books.
7. Most importantly, during you entire preparation to clear KVS PGT English
through LDCE, without go through the content of NCERT English text books
for the Class XI and XII, ‘You can’t feel confident enough to face the exam,
without hesitation.
Hence, we are going to study the Lessons, Poems and Short Stores from NCERT
English text books for the Class XI and XII briefly. We are going to learn 1. Important
Characters 2. Summary and Theme of each and every chapter from thEse text
books and at the end of each chapter, MCQs will be practiced in CBTs format.
So without any delay let’s start with class XI English Text Book.
1. Class 11 Lessons
Hornbill
The name of the English Text Book for Class XI is ‘Hornbill’, means “a medium to
large tropical Old World bird, having a very large curved bill that typically has a large
horny or bony casque.
The text book is named after, ‘Hornbill’ as they are important for the dispersal of
seeds and therefore to propagate the plantation on the planet Earth. The ‘Content’
includes,
1. Prose

2. We’re Not Afraid to Die… If We Can All Be Together
5. The Adventure
6. Silk Road
2. Poetry
1. A Photograph
2. The Laburnum Top
4. Childhood
5. Father to Son
3. Supplimentary

2. The Address
3. Mother’s Day
4. Birth
1. Prose
1.1 Introduction:
'The Portrait of a Lady’, is written by ‘Khushwant Sing’.
1.2. Important Characters:
1. Narrator (Unknown) 2. Grandmother.
1.3. Summary:
The writer recalls his Grandmother as short, healthy and slightly bent. Her hairs
were silver in colour and were scattered messily on her wrinkled face. She used to
walk around the whole house in white clothes. She kept her one hand resting on her
waist and the other hand was telling the beads of her rosary.
The writer thinks of her as not very pretty but constantly beautiful all the time. He
compares her calm face with the winter landscape. During their lengthy stay in the
village, Grandmother woke him up from the bed in the early morning, plastered his
wooden slate, organized his breakfast, and sent him to the school. The temple was
connected to the school. She sat inside and studied the sacred texts while the children
learned the alphabet.
On their way back to the home she used to give the stale chapattis to the street
dogs. A turning point in their beautiful relationship arrived when they went to live in a
city. Despite the fact that they shared a room, their relationship started to grow apart.
Now, the writer used to go to the city school on a school bus and studied subjects like
English, Physics, mathematics and many more subjects that his grandmother could not
understand at all.
His grandmother could no longer go to school with him to send him. She felt upset
that there was no teaching about God and scriptures at the city school. Instead, he was
given music lessons, but she said nothing. She thought music was dreadful. It was just
good for prostitutes and beggars, according to her. It was not intended for gentlemen.
When the writer went to a university, he got a separate room in his house. The
common link of the relationship between the grandson and the grandmother was
broken now. Grandmother rarely talked to anyone in the house now. The writer’s
grandmother quietly accepted her loneliness. She was constantly occupied with her
spinning wheel and reciting prayers and she hardly ever spoke to anyone. She took a
break in the afternoon. Her daily routine consisted of breaking bread into pieces and
giving it to the birds. The birds would perch on her legs, head, and even her shoulders.
When the writer was leaving on a trip abroad for his further studies, his
grandmother did not get disturbed at all. Rather she went to the train station to say
goodbye, but she didn’t say anything and merely kissed his forehead. Her lips were
moving in prayer, her thoughts were consumed by prayer and her fingers were busy
reciting the storey of the beads on her rosary. Seeing her grandmother at this old age,
the writer was thinking that it might be his last meeting with his grandmother. But when
he came back home after a duration of 5 years, his grandmother was there to welcome
him back and he saw her celebrate his return.
The next morning after the return of his grandson she got ill. Although the doctor
told them that it was a slight fever and would go away very soon, still she could foresee
that her time to leave this world was near. She did not want to waste her time talking to
someone. Her fingers were busy reciting the storey of the beads on her rosary.
She went to her bed praying and telling the beads till her lips stopped moving and
the rosary fell down from her lifeless hand. Her body was discovered on the floor,
wrapped in a red shawl after she died. To grieve her death, thousands of sparrows flew
in and sat dispersed around her body. All the sparrows flew away without making any
noise when the dead body of the old lady was carried away for the last rites.
1.4. Comments: The ‘Narrator’ of the story, is not the ‘Author’.
1.5. Practice Questions:
1. Who is the author of ‘The Portrait of a Lady’?

A. Ruskin Bond
B. Kushwant Singh
C. Naipaul
D. Vikram Bhatt
2. Who is the main character of the chapter ‘The Portrait of a Lady’?
A. Mother
B. Sister
C. Grandmother
D. Daughter
3. How did the grandfather in the portrait hung on the wall look like?
A. Old, long white beard, worn big turban
B. Old, skinny, wrinkly
C. Young, Handsome, Well-Built
D. Old, Well-Built
4. How did the grandmother look?
A. Old, Fat, Long
B. Long, Fat, Slightly Bent
C. Old, Short, Slightly Bent, Fat
D. Slightly Bent, Fat
5. When did the author’s parents leave him with his grandmother?
A. When he was a kid
B. When he was an infant
C. When he became a teenager
D. When he failed and became a teenager
6. Which animal did the grandmother used to feed in the village?
A .Dogs
B. Cows
C. Sparrows
D. Cats
7. What did the author eat for breakfast?
A. thick and stale chapatis with a little butter and sugar spread in it
B. thick bread with butter
C. upma
D. rice and curd
8. Why would grandmother accompany the author to his school?
A. to keep an eye on him
B. to wait for him to take him back to home
C. because of the temple attached to school
D. she wanted to meet villagers
9. Where were the parents of the author?
A. Abroad
B. City
C. Other Village
D. Other state
10. What would the grandmother do in the temple on a daily basis?
A. Meditation
B. Read Scriptures
C. Sing religious prayers
D. teach other kids religious prayers
11. What was the turning point of the friendship between grandmother and author?
A. When he became an adult
B. When his parents called them both to the city
C. When he left her to live in the city with his parents
D. When they stopped talking
12. Where did the author go to study in the city?
A. English School in motor bus
B. by walking down to nearby school
C. Hindi School
D. Nowhere
13. What made the grandmother unhappy about the author’s new English School?
A. the fact that she could no longer help him with the lessons
B. Because they were in city
C. Because she didn’t understand English
D. Because she didn’t understand English and could no longer help him with
the lessons
14. Why didn’t the grandmother like music?
A. It was the monopoly of harlots and beggars and not meant for gentlefolk
B. She liked only religious prayers
C. She liked the traditional folk music
D. She thought it would distract him from studies
15. How did the grandmother spend her time in the city?
A. feedings dogs
B. reading scriptures
C. spinning the wheel
D. talking to neighbours
16. How did the grandmother spend her afternoon everyday?
A. by feeding hundred of sparrows
B. by taking a nap
C. by talking to author’s mother
D. by going to temple
17. What happened when the author moved abroad to study for five years?
A. grandmother bid goodbye by silently kissing his forehead
B. No one came to see him
C. Grandmother moved back to village
D. Parents moved with him
18. What change came in the grandmother’s evening schedule?
A. She collected the women of the neighbourhood
B. She would go for a walk
C. She would sleep early
D. She would talk to his parents
19. What happened when the grandmother didn’t pray for the first time?
A. She fell ill the next day
B. She made this her routine
C. She took a break and went to the village
D. None of the above
20. How did the grandmother react to her illness?
A. She said her end was near
B. She ignored her health
C. She took care of her
D. She was admitted to the hospital
21. What did the grandmother do in her final hours?
A. Talked to everyone in the house
B. worried about everyone
C. Silently praying and telling her beads
D. Went to temple
22. How did the grandmother die?
A. during telling beads laying on the bed
B. In the hospital
C. While sleeping
23. How did the sparrows express their sorrow at the death of their grandmother?
A. They didn’t come that day
B. they came and sat silently in the verandah
C.They ate the bread crumbs
D. they chirruped a lot
24. What happened when they took the grandmother’s corpse away?
A. Neighbours visited them to pay condolences
B. they mourned her death in her room
C. birds flew away quietly
D. Nothing happened
25. How do you feel about the character of the grandmother in the chapter?
A. Emotional
B. Strong
C. Selfless
D. Loving
26. Where was the author’s grandfather’s portrait placed?
A. on a shelf
B. hung above the mantelpiece
C. put on the mantelpiece
D. on a table
27. Did the author bother to learn the morning prayers that his grandmother
recited?
A. yes
B. he listened but did not bother to learn
C. he could not learn
D. no
28. When was their common link of friendship snapped?
A. when he went to college
B. When he went to the university, they were given seperate rooms
C. when he started working
D. When he went abroad
29. What was grandmother’s reaction when the author was going abroad?
A. Happy
B. sad
C. not even sentimental
D. Sentimental
30. What was her reaction when he came back after 5 years?
A. Overwhelmed
B. clasped the author in her arms and said prayers
C. happy
D. sentimental
1.6. Key
Q. No. Answer Q. No. Answer Q. No. Answer

1 B 11 B 21 C
2 C 12 A 22 A
3 A 13 D 23 B
4 C 14 A 24 C
5 A 15 C 25 B
6 A 16 A 26 B
7 A 17 A 27 B
8 C 18 A 28 B
9 B 19 A 29 C
10 B 20 A 30 B
2. We’re Not Afraid to Die… All Be Together
1.1 Introduction:
'We are not afraid to die … if we all be together’, is written by ‘Gordon Cook and
Alan East’.
1. Narrator (Unknown or Gordon Cook) 2. Mary (Wife) 3. Suzanne (Daughter) 4.

Jonathan (Son) 5. Larry Vigil and Herb Sailor, (Crewmen)
1.3. Summary:
We are not afraid to die if we can all be together summary tells about the extreme
bravery and skill exhibited by Gordon Cook. Gordon Cook’s family and crewmen in a
war with water and the waves for existence. In the month of July in the year 1976, the
writer, his wife Mary, his son Jonathan and his daughter Suzanne set sail from
Plymouth, in England to duplicate the round-the-world journey made 200 years ago by
Captain James Cook. They took the trip in their professionally designed ship, named
the Wavewalker, accompanied by 2 sailors. Larry Vigil, who was an American and Herb
Sailor, a Swiss, to tackle one of the world’s coarsest oceans – the Southern Indian
Ocean.
The first portion of the journey that is about 1, 05,000 kilometres up to Cape Town
passed off very enjoyably. On the 2nd day out of Cape Town, they started to encounter
strong windstorms. Windstorms did not worry about the narrator. But the height of the
waves was alarming up to fifteen meters above that was as high as the mainmast. On
the 25th of December, the writer’s ship reaches in the southern Indian Ocean that was
about 3,500 kilometres to the east of Cape Town. The family welcomed the New Year
on the ship.
At the dawn of 2nd January, the waves were huge in size. Unfriendly weather and
massive waves forced the sailors to slow the speed of the ship, drop the storm jib and
take various other precautions. The risk was so obvious that the sailors accomplished
a life-raft drill, attached the lifeline boats and the life jackets. Unexpectedly at 6 pm, a
terrific explosion shook the Wavewalker and the writer was thrown overboard. The
Wavewalker was about to overturn when another massive wave hit it throwing it upright
one more time. The writer was thrown back again on the deck, his head and ribs were
smashing touching the walls of the Wavewalker. In spite of a lot of injuries, the writer
took charge of the situation and decided to handle it on his own. Larry and Herb started
pumping out water from the ship.
The author somehow managed to cover the canvas across the gaps to stop the
water from entering into the ship. Moreover, their hand pumps stopped functioning and
the electric pumps short-circuited at the same time. Luckily, the writer found a spare
electrical pump that was in a working condition. The entire night everyone was
pumping, steering, repairing and sending radio signals for help. The author checked
the charts and found that He Amsterdam, a French scientific base was their last hope.
Sue and Jon got heavily injured. But, they were not afraid to die if they were all
together. Sue’s head got swelling and she was having a deep injury. Moreover, the
writer became extra determined to see the courage of his children. Finally, they were
able to touch the lie Amsterdam. It was a volcanic island where 28 inhabitants were
ready to receive them.
1.4. Comments: it is an ‘adventerous’ episode in the life of the ‘Narrator’ and how
they survided ‘united’.
1. From where did the ship sail for the voyage?

A. America
B. Mexico
C. Germany
D. Plymouth, England
2. Why did the author decide to go for a round-the-world voyage?
A.to duplicate the voyage made 200 years ago by Captain James Cook
B. to see the world
C. to settle down in different country
D. to show his children the world through ship
3. What was the occupation of the author?
A. Businessman
B. Sailor
C. Teacher
4. What was the name of the ship of the author?
A. Amazon
B. Wavewalker
C. Waveship
D. Sailorship
5. What part of the journey was pleasant for them?
A. First leg – from England to Cape town
B. Last part of the journey
C. First few months
D. Never
6. What were the names of the two crewmen whom the author hired?
A. Shelly and Cabil
B. Larry Vigil and Herb Seigler
C. Herb Seigler and Shelly Cooper
D. Larry Vigil and Adam Moore
7. Why did the author hire the two crewmen?
A. to take rest from long the voyage
B. to help tackle one of the world’s roughest seas, the southern Indian Ocean
C. because he could no longer sail the ship
D. he wanted to spend some time with his family
8. When did the waves start getting gigantic?
A. December 25
B. January 2
C. November 30
D. December 31
9. What did they do to slow down the boat in the storm?
A. Stopped sailing
B. dropped the storm jib and lashed a heavy mooring rope
C. just dropped the storm jib
D. did nothing and waited for storm to calm down
10. What was the first indication of disaster?
A. around 6 pm when winds dropped and sky grew darker
B. next morning when the ship started creaking
C. when it started raining
D. when winds were strong
11. What happened after the first indication of the disaster?
A. a wave appeared vertical and almost twice the height of other waves
B. it broke the ship from inside
C. the ship turned upside down
D. it didn’t affect the ship
12. How did the explosion affect the ship?
A. A torrent of green and white water broke over the ship
B. the ship started sinking
C. the ship turned upside down
13. Why did the author accept his approaching death?
A Pirates had attacked the ship
B because he was injured by the explosion
C he was thrown in the sea
D he was stabbed
14. What did the author see when his head popped out of the water?
A. the ship was sinking
B. the ship was nowhere to be seen
C. the ship was near capsizing, her masts almost horizontal
D. it was still standing
15. What happened to the author’s body when he managed to reach the deck?
A. his head smashed again
B. his left ribs cracked; mouth filled with blood and broken teeth
C. he broke his leg
D. his broke his left hand
16. Who said, “We’re sinking!”?
A. His crewmen
B. Mary
C. His daughter
D. His son
17. What was the condition of the ship?
A. Broken timbers, starboard side bulged inwards; clothes, crockery, charts,
tins and toys sloshed
B. There personal belongings were missing
C. water filled in every room and their clothes were missing
D. Can’t say
18. What had happened to Sue when the author entered their room to check on
them?
A. her head hurt as there was a bump
B. She was unconscious
C. her legs hurt
D. she was fine
19. What was the age of Suzanne and Jonathan?
A. 8 & 9 years old
B. 7 & 6 years old
C. 10 & 7 years old
D. 4 years & 6 years
20. How did the author manage to stretch the canvas?
A. by repairing the holes
B. by asking crewmen for help
C. it happened on its own
D. the problem got over as the storm had passed
21. What happened after the hand pumps started to block up with the debris
floating around the cabins?
A. the author connected an electric-pump to an out-pipe
B. by taking out water with the help of bucket
C. by repairing hand pump
D. the author found another hand pump
22. Where did they decide to reach to save themselves and the ship?
A. Australia
B. Ile Amsterdam
C. Mumbai, India
D. Japan
23. What was their first meal in two days?
A. Meat loaves
B. bread and milk
C. noodles
D. corned beef and cracker biscuits
24. Who said, “We aren’t afraid of dying if we can all be together — you and
Mummy, Sue and I.”?
A. Jon
B. Crewmen to each other
C. Suz
D. Mom
25. When did they reach lle Amsterdam?
A. around 6 pm in the evening
B. never reached there
C. at 11 in the next morning
D. they decided to take different route
26. What was the status of the ship on January 3?
A. "pumps had the water level sufficiently under control "
B. condition was getting worse
C. they were still struggling to control the pumps
D. everything was just right
27. How long did they take for the ship’s testing and fitting?
A. months
B. few days
C. 2 years
D. few weeks
28. Where had they reached on the 25th of December?
A. 3,500 kilometres east of Cape Town
B. they were suffering the waves away from Cape Town
C. 2500 km from Cape Town
D. reached cape Town
29. What happened when the author’s head smashed into the wheel?
A. he was hurt but steady
B. he flew overboard sinking below the waves
C. he was not hurt
D. he gained control immediately
30. What does ‘Mayday call’ mean?
A Call made in the month of May
B Distress call for help
C Both A and B
D None of these
1.6. Key

1 D 11 A 21 A
2 A 12 A 22 B
3 A 13 A 23 D
4 B 14 C 24 A
5 A 15 B 25 A
6 B 16 B 26 A
7 B 17 A 27 A
8 B 18 A 28 A
9 B 19 B 29 B
10 A 20 A 30 B
1.1 Introduction:
‘Discovering Tut: The Saga Continues’, is written by ‘A R Williams’.
1. Tutankhamum (A Young Pharoh) 2. Carter, an Archaeologist
1.3. Summary:
This chapter is regarding the last heir of the great Pharaoh Dynasty, Tutankhamun.
He died in his teenage after ruling for 9 years. His death gave birth to a mystery. This
chapter talks about all the possible mysteries: the curse, where his tomb is lying, his
whole life and finally his death. Discovering tut: the saga continues summary will give
you all the facts and information about the death of Tut.
Tutankhamun was the last leader of the great Pharaoh Dynasty. He was young
when he died. According to some people, his death was a murder. In the year 1922, his
tomb was exposed by Howard Carter, an Archaeologist. After 80 years, he was taken
for the CT scan to solve the mystery of his life and death through a forensic
reconstruction.
His father or grandfather, Amenhotep III, was a very powerful Pharaoh ruler over a
period of 40 years. Moreover, his son, Amenhotep IV, succeeded him and initiated the
strangest period in the history of Egypt. His name changed to Akhenaten which means
servant of Athens. He changed the religious capital from Thebes to Amarna. Later he
attacked Amun, a god, ruined his images and shut his temples. Another mysterious
ruler thrived him who died very soon. Tutankhamun sat on the power and ruled for 9
years.
When Tut’s mummified body was found, he had lots of gold and wealth. Carter got
him after so many years. After conducting the research on the treasures, he planned to
examine his 3 nested boxes. Many parts of the treasure in the tomb were already
misplaced.
His tomb was found rock-cut, 26 feet under the ground, which also had some wall
paintings. It reveals that he was suppressed in the months of March or April. One of the
coffin put Carter into trouble. The gums used to paste Tut to the lowest of the solid
gold. Coffin was toughening enough that made it impossible to displace. He put the box
in the sun for numerous hours so that the resins lose up but that didn’t work.
At last, he removed the adhesive with the chisel and hammer. Carter sensed he
didn’t have any other choice than cutting the mummy from limb to limb, thieves would
have robbed the gold and the treasures. His men first removed the head of the
mummy, then they cut off each and every joint. After the process of removing all the
body parts, they placed it on the layer of sand. They kept the parts in a wooden box
and placed it at the original place.
Later, in January 2009, the body was taken for a CT scan which takes hundreds of
X-Rays and generates a 3D image. That night after the scan, the workmen passed his
body from the tomb into a box. They went through the ramp and stairs and lifted the
body on a hydraulic trailer that was holding the scanner. The scanner suddenly
stopped working and the process of the CT scan stopped. After the use of a pair of
spare fans, the scan was finally completed. After 3 hours, they transferred his body
back to his tomb where his body is now resting in peace.
1.4. Comments: ‘The mystery of the death is revealed at the end of the story, in
ambituity, that King Tut death is a natural.
1. Who was Tutankhamun?

A. A Geologist
B. A Scientist
C. An Egyptian king
D. A historian
2. When did Tut die?
A. When he was a teenager
B. When he was old
C. When he was in middle age
D. When he was a child
3. Who discovered Tut’s tomb and when?
A. Adam Cooper in 1901
B. Howard Carter in 1922
C. Howard Carter in 1930
D. Sam Shaw in 1890
4. When was Tut’s body taken for CT scan after being found?
A. After 1 year
B. After 80 years
C. After 50 years
D. After 30 years
5. For how many years did Amenhotep III rule Egypt?
A. 5 years
B. 20 years
C. 10 years
D. 40 years
6. Who promoted the worship of Aten (the sun disk) ?
A. Tutankhamun
B. Amenhotep III
C. Amenhotep IV
7. What name did Amenhotep IV change to?
A. Amarna
B. Atul
C. Akhenaten
D. Amenhotep III
8. For how many years did Tutankhamun rule Egypt?
A. Nine
B. Eleven
C. Two
D. Five
9. What was found with Tutankhamun’s body?
A. Gold
B. Egyptian Gold Coin
C. Nothing as such
D. gold, wealth, bronze razor, games, clothes, cases of food and wine
10. How would you describe Tut’s tomb?
A. gold-plated
B. rock-cut
C. wall paintings with gold-plate
D. rock-cut, 26 feet underground, which had wall paintings
11. What was in the first coffin?
A. garlands of olives, lotus petals, and cornflowers
B. flowers and coins
C. gold, wealth, bronze razor, games, clothes, cases of food and wine
D. It was empty
12. Why did the third coffin put Carter in trouble?
A. It was empty
B. The resins used to cement Tut to the bottom of the solid gold coffin which
was hardened enough
C. The material found inside was already looted
13. How did Carter remove the resins?
A. with the help of chisel and hammer
B. with the help of chemicals
C. with the help of machinery
D. with the help of man power
14. How did Carter cut the body of Tut?
A. First head and then every limb
B. first leg and then head
C. first legs, head and then limbs
D. limb, hand only
15. What did Carter and his men do after cutting down his body?
A. they sent it for X-Ray
B. they examined them carefully
C. they placed it on the layer of sand in a wooden box
D. they clicked photographs
16. When was the mummy examined in X-Ray by the anatomy professor?
A. In 1945
B. In 1986
C. In 1968
D. Never
17. What facts were revealed when the mummy was X-Rayed in 1968?
A. his several possessions were missing
B. his hip bone was missing
C. his breast bone and front ribs were missing
D. his feet bone was missing
18. When was Tut’s body taken for CT scan in the 21st century?
A. January 05 2005
B. January 10, 2007
C. June 09, 2001
D. February 12, 2009
19. What does CT scan stand for?
A. Computed Telegraphy
B. Computed Tomography Scan
C. Car Topology
D. Computer Technology
20. How did the workmen lift the body for the scan?
A. through the stairs
B. on a hydraulic trailer
C. through sliding
D. through lift
21. Why did the procedure stop in between?
A. As spare fan stopped working
B. as the light went off
C. As the lift broken
D. none of the above
22. When was Tut’s body taken back in his tomb after CT scan?
A. After a day
B. After 3 hours
C. After 12 hours
D. After 5 hours
23. What is the Cemetery of Tut called?
A. Valley of the Kings
B. Tut’s Resting Place
C. Resting Peace
D. Valley of Flowers
24. How did Tut die?
A. It is a mystery
B. Due to heart attack
C. Due to Cancer
D. During a war
25. Who said “The mummy is in very bad condition because of what Carter did in
the 1920s”? A. Carter
B. Zahi Hawass
C. an anatomy professor
D. A Egypt Historian
26. "Tut was laid to rest, laden with ………."
A. platinum
B. aluminium
C. gold
D. silver
27. When did Tut die?
A. 22000 years ago
B. more than 33000 years ago
C. 10000 years ago
D. 16000 years ago
28. What was Tut lavished with?
A. gold, silver, flowers
B. lots of jewels
C. "glittering goods: precious collars, inlaid necklaces and bracelets,
rings, amulets, a ceremonial apron, sandals, sheaths for his fingers
and toes all of pure gold"
D. expensive clothing
29. How has archeology changed through the decades?
A. focusses more on treasure
B. focusses more on physical findings
C. focusses on time factors more
D. focusing less on treasure and more on the fascinating details of life and
mysteries of death
30. Who is Osiris?
A. god of nature
B. god of afterlife
C. god of seasons
D. god of universe
1.6. Key

1 C 11 A 21 A
2 A 12 B 22 B
3 B 13 A 23 A
4 B 14 A 24 A
5 D 15 C 25 B
6 C 16 C 26 C
7 C 17 C 27 B
8 A 18 A 28 C
9 D 19 B 29 D
10 D 20 B 30 B
1.1 Introduction:
‘The Browning Version’, a one act play, is written by ‘Terence Rattigan’.
1. Taplow (Student) 2. Frank (Science Teacher) 3. Mr. Crocker Harris (School

Teacher) 4. Mrs. Millie Crocker Harris (Wife of Mr. Crocker)
1.3. Summary:
This is a play which highlights the attitude of teenage students towards his teacher.
Moreover, his remarks are awful because they are very close to reality. He mimics the
voice of Mr Crocker-Harris. And call the man practically inhuman. He is extremely
fearful of his teacher. Moreover, his promotion depends upon the quirk or goodwill of
his teacher. However, he opens up when the other science teacher encourages him to
do so. Further, the teenager hates Greek play because he does not like the teacher’s
method of teaching. Besides, in order to make them like him, Mr Crocker-Harris seems
to hate people. In addition, this description of a teacher is damaging. And ultimately, it
reflects the hopeless quality of teachers.
This is a play, whose first scene is set in a school. In the opening, there is a sixteen-
year-old boy, Taplow. He has come to do some extra work for his teacher Mr Crocker-
Harris. Moreover, he has to wait for him as he still has to arrive. Frank (another
teacher) dins Taplow waiting and strikes a conversation with him.
During the conversation, Frank get to know that Taplow is waiting for his result
which is yet to be hand out. The boy is keen to specialize in science and hope to get a
good result. Mr Crocker-Harris does not declare the result himself. Instead request the
headmaster to declare the result on the last day of term.
The conversation also delivers the insight of Taplow mind. He tells Frank how much
he dislikes the play ‘Agamemnon’. He confesses that the play is not that bad but he like
science. Also, he points out that the way Mr Harris teach it is terrible.
They have to do extra work as he missed a class a week ago. Certainly, Frank
remarks that Taplow will get his “remove” for doing extra work. However, Taplow feels
different. As he is not like other teachers so such rules don’t work with Mr Crocker-
Harris, Taplow states. Also, he doesn’t appreciate the extra work of students.
As per Taplow, Mr Harris is different from other teachers. He is strict and inhuman.
Moreover, he doesn’t tell them their results before judgement day. When Taplow ask
about his remove Crocker-Harris says that is exactly what he deserves- “No less; and
certainly no more.”
Frank pointed out that Crocker-Harris is 10 minutes late and Taplow has a chance
to leave and play golf. But, Taplow looks shocked at this suggestion as he thinks that
Mr Crocker-Harris might follow him home.
Frank envy Mr Harris for the influence he has on his students. When Frank asks
Taplow that if Mr Harris beats them, Taplow replies that he is not a sadist. And he is not
a person who would beat students and vent his frustration.
In spite of all this, he likes Mr Harris and narrates an incident when he laughs at the
classical joke that Mr Harris, although he didn’t get it.
After that, Mille Crocker-Harris (Mr Crocker-Harris’ Wife) enters the room. She
suggests Taplow run away for a quarter of an hour and come back. As Mr Harris has
been at Bursar’s and may take quite a time.
Mrs Harris behaviour puzzles Taplow. Taplow is not willing to leave as he doesn’t
want to disobey the teacher whom he fears. When Mille assures Taplow that she will
take the blame and proposes an excuse for his absence. Mille hands Taplow a
prescription and asks him to take it to a chemist and get it for Harris. So, Taplow
accepts the proposal and leaves Frank and Mrs Harris behind.
1.4. Comments: This chapter is a short extract from the play ‘The Browning Version’
written by Terence Rattigan.
1. Who has written ‘The Browning Version’?

A. Terence Rattigan
B. Mr Edgar S. Woolard
C. Mr. Lester Brown
D. Kushwant Singh
2. Who are the three characters of the play ‘The Browning Version’?
A. Taplow, Alice and Mr. Harrow
B. Taplow, Frank and Mrs. Harris
C. Taplow, Frank, and Mr. Crocker – Harris
D. Alice, Frank and Mr. Crocker – Harris
3. What is the age of Taplow?

A. Fourteen
B. Sixteen
C. Twenty
D. Five
4. What does Frank do?

A. Student
B. Teacher
C. Principal
D. Parent
5. Who is Mr. Crocker-Harris?

A. Principal
B. School Teacher
C. middle-aged schoolmaster
D. Don’t know
6. Where is the starting scene of the play set?
A. School Classroom
B. School Playground
C. Home
D. Road
7. What was Taplow doing on the last day of school?

A. Extra Work
B. Time pass
C. Can’t say
D. completing homework
8. In which class does Taplow study in?

A. Lower fifth
B. seventh
C. ninth
D. lower tenth
9. Why does Taplow have to do extra work?

A. because he has missed his previous week due to illness
B. because he didn’t perfomed well in his studies
C. because he was there to help his teacher
D. because he was called by his teacher
10. Why does Taplow want Science as a remove?

A. because he has no option
B. because he finds the subject extremely interesting
C. because he is confused
D. Cant say
11. Why did Taplow call Mr. Crocker – Harris ‘Hardly Human’?
A. because he is a sadist
B. he is all shriveled up
C. He is very rude to everyone
D. he finds peace in failing students
12. What book was Taplow reading?

A. History textbook
B. The Agamemnon
B. Julius Caesar
D. Englsh Novel
13. At what time was Mr. Harris supposed to come to school?

A. Six-thirty
B. seven
C. eleven
D. twelve
14. Why was Frank jealous of Mr. Crocker – Harris?
A. because of the effect he has on students
B. because of his fame
C. because he was senior schoolmaster
D. because he was paid well
15. What short name does Taplow call Mr. Crocker – Harris in his absence?
A.Crock
B. Harris
C. Crocker
D. Teacher
16. How does Taplow react when Mr. Crocker – Harris cracked a joke in the class?
A. he laughed
B. he ignored it
C. he asked him what it meant
D. he did nothing
17. What is the name of Mr. Crocker – Harris’s wife?

A. Millie Crocker – Harris
B. Miley Crocker – Harris
C. Haley Crocker – Harris
D. never noticed
18. When did Mrs. Crocker – Harris entered the classroom?

A. When Taplow and Frank were discussing Mr. Harris
B. When no one was in the classroom
C. with Mr. Crocker – Harris
D. when only Taplow was in the classroom
19. How would you describe Millie Crocker – Harris?

A. Thin Woman, late thirties, smartly dressed
B. fat woman, forties
C. thin woman, in her twenties
D. thin women, smartly dressed
20. Who said the lines, ‘Come along, Taplow. Do not be so selfish as to keep a
good joke to yourself.’?
A. Mr. Crocker – Harris
B. Millie
C. Frank
D. Principal
21. Why was Taplow worried that Mrs. Crocker – Harris might have heard what
they were saying?
A. as she had been standing for a few minutes when they were busy talking
B. as she interrupted them talking about his husband
C. as she heard them talking about Principal
D. Don’t know
22. What was Millie carrying when she entered the classroom?
A. basket
B. books
C. knits
D. flowers
23. Where was Mr. Crocker – Harris?

A. At the Bursar’s
B. At home
C. At market
D. At library
24. What did Millie suggest to Taplow in her husband’s absence?

A. to go to chemist to get her prescription filled
B. to go to his home
C. to play golf
D. to wait
25. Does Taplow think that Mr. Crocker – Harris is baised?
A. Yes
B. no
C. May be
D. Can’t Say
26. How is Mr. Crocker – Harris different from other teachers?

A. as he is not biased
B. as he is strict
C. as he is old
D. as he is rude
27. How did Frank react upon the arrival of Mrs. Crocker – Harris?
A. he was happy
B. he was nervous
C. he was relieved
D. nothing as such
28. Who was Agamemnon?

A. he was American astrologer
B. he was an Egyptian king
C. he was the king of Mycenae in Greek mythology
D. Don’t know
29. What does ‘Remove’ mean in the chapter?
A. a division in British Schools
B. take away something
C. unfasten
D. get rid of
30. Does Mr. Crocker – Harris come to the school in the play?
A. Yes
B. No
C. Maybe
D. Can’t say
1.6. Key

1 A 11 B 21 A
2 C 12 B 22 A
3 B 13 A 23 A
4 B 14 A 24 A
5 C 15 A 25 B
6 A 16 A 26 A
7 A 17 A 27 C
8 A 18 A 28 C
9 A 19 A 29 A
10 B 20 C 30 B
5. The Adventure
1.1 Introduction:
‘The Adventure’, is written by ‘Jayant Narlikar’.
1. Professor Gaitonde aka Gangadharpant 2. Khan Sahib 3. Rajendra
1.3. Summary:
The story centres on a certain historical event with the Historian, Gangadharpant,
being the protagonist. This story is written by Jayant Narlikar and shows us how
Gangadharpant aka Professor Gaitonde, time travels. It begins with the professor
wondering about the fate of India if the Marathas had not allowed a concession to the
East India Company to stay in Mumbai. He believes this step and the error of Maratha
soldiers during the battle of Panipat cost a great deal. As he is reading from the Bakhar
about Vishwa’s narrow escape in the battle against Abdali, he meets with an accident.
Thus, the transitions from one world to another and through this story we learn about
his new world he transitions into. It is a great lesson with the perfect blend of history
and science.
Jayant Narlikar wrote The Adventure in a very informative and interesting form. He
has given the student the perfect combination of history and science. We see that a
historian, Professor Gaitonde somehow time-travels into the past. Upon going in the
past, he experiences something which was never there before. He finds himself in the
city of Mumbai that he has never witnessed.
The Mumbai he is presently in is very different from it actually is. He gets down at
the Victoria Terminus Station where he finds it to be very clean, surprisingly. The
coaches of the train read out ‘Greater Bombay Metropolitan Railway’. Moreover, the
staffs were of Anglo-Indians and a few British officers.
Upon getting off the station, Gaitonde saw the East India Company Headquarters.
Similarly, there were buildings of mainly British brands and British banks. In fact, his
son’s workplace of Forbes was not even there. Thus, in order to solve the riddle, he
went to the Library and read about the battle of Panipat. Upon reading, he finds out the
details to be different from actually happened. In fact, he also reads that the British rule
never made it to India which surprised him.
After the visit to the library, he visited the Azad Maidan and got into a fight over
there with the audience. After being thrown off stage, Gaitonde came out of his time-
travel experience and was lying unconscious in Azad Maidan. Thus, he visits Professor
Deshpande to get an explanation. Upon his visit, he learns about reality being different
from through our senses. Thus, the reality we live in can have many manifestations or
dimensions.
So, physicists believe that there are many worlds existing other than the ones we
see through our senses. Moreover, he explains that Gaitonde transitioned into another
world as he was presently in a coma due to an accident. Similarly, as the last thing he
was thinking about was the battle of Panipat, he went to that era only and what he saw
was all in his mind.
1.4. Comments: The story is about Time Travel.
1. For how many days did the professor live in the alternative world?
(a) one day
(b) two days
(c) three days
(d) a week
2. What is the name of the protagonist of the story ‘The Adventure’?
(a) Professor Gaitonde

(b) Gangadharpant
(c) only a
(d) Both A & B
3. In reality, was the professor in two different worlds at the present time?
(a) yes
(b) no
(c) maybe
(d) cant say
4. What happens in the case of electrons in lack of determinism in Quantum
theory?
(a) electrons don’t move from their path
(b) electrons merge with other atoms
(c) one cannot predict which path the electron takes at a point of
time
(d) None of the above
5. According to which of the two theories did the incident with Professor
Gaitonde happen?
(a) Quantum theory and Theory of Relativity
(b) Only Big Bang Theory
(c) Catastrophe theory and lack of determinism in Quantum
theory
(d) Catastrophe theory and Theory of Relativity
6. Why did Professor Rajendra say that the incidents narrated by Gaitonde were
not real?
(a) as he was in coma for two days
(b) as he was not well
(c) as his mental state was not good
(d) as Rajendra wanted to believe in facts
7. What happened after the empty chair incident?
(a) he was in the hospital
(b) he went to his room
(c) he went to meet his friend
(d) he decided to go back
8. What did the professor do when he noticed the empty chair?
(a) he sat on the chair
(b) he went away
(c) he stood in the crowd
(d) he went back to his guest house
9. Towards which place did the professor decide to take a walk after having his
dinner?
(a) Post Office
(b) Mandi
(c) Sea
(d) Azad Maidan
10. Why did Professor start liking the new India that he was reading about?
(a) This country knew how two stand on its feet
(b) It was different from the one he knew
(c) in this form, India was a wealthy nation
(d) as he liked the ruler in this new country
11. What did Professor find in the fifth volume of ‘Bhausahebanchi Bakhar’?
(a) Marathas had won the Battle of Panipat
(b) India has never been under British Raj
(c) Marathas had won battle of Plassey
12. Why did the professor go to town hall?
(a) to check facts from history books
(b) to pass time
(c) to read books
(d) to meet someone
13. Where did the train stop beyong the tunnel?
(a) a small town called Sarhad

(b) a small town called Nera
(c) a small town called Majuli
(d) In Ajmer
14. What did the Professor notice at the Hornby road?

(a) shops were different
(b) road was constructed
(c) new shopping complex
(d) new residential complex
15. What happened after the Battle of Panipat in India?
(a) India merged with neighbouring nations
(b) India moved to the path of democracy
(c) British rule came
(d) Portugese rule ended
16. What did the Professor start investigating at Town Hall?
(a) War of succession

(b) Battle of Buxar
(c) The period of Ashoka to the third battle of Panipat
(d) Battle of Plassey
17. How did crowd react when professor sat on the empty presidential chair?
(a) Heard his speech

(b) Did nothing but ignored him
(c) threw several objects at him and pushed him away
(d) asked him to leave rudely
18. What happened to Marathas in reality?

(a) They lost the battle
(b) they won the battle
(c) they didn’t make necessary arrangements
(d) they made a treaty.
19. Where did professor and Khan Sahib got off?
(a) Mumbai Central Railway Station

(b) Pune
(c) Delhi
(d) Victoria Terminus Station
20. Who did Professor meet in the hospital?
(a) Speaker
(b) doctor
(c) Khan Sahib
(d) Rajendran
1.6. Key
Q. Q. Q. Q.
Answer Answer Answer Answer
No. No. No. No.
1 B 6 A 11 A 16 C
2 D 7 A 12 A 17 C
3 A 8 A 13 A 18 A
4 C 9 D 14 A 19 D
5 C 10 A 15 B 20 D
6. Silk Road
1.1 Introduction:
‘Silk Road, is written by ‘Nick Middleton’.
1. Nick Middleton 2. Tsetan 3. Norbu
1.3. Summary:
Silk Road is about the author’s journey which starts from slopes of Ravu to Mt.
Kailash. This was to complete the kora. Thus, it gives us an account of the journey they
experience. Moreover, the main aim of the journey was religious mostly. We see that
the author wishes to complete the journey to Mt. Kailash. Thus, in order to embark on
this pilgrimage journey, he chooses a tough one. Further, the author hires Tsetan and
takes along Daniel as an acquaintance to chaperon him to Darchen. Consequently, we
learn about his journey and his experience through the Silk Road. He mentions how
the people in hilly areas are rather sensitive. The author goes on to witness the beauty
of Lake Mansarovar and Darchen. Moreover, he faces a lot of difficulties but is able to
complete his pilgrimage due to his undeterred faith.
The author of the story, Nick Middleton, describes his journey to Mount Kailash in
Silk Road. In order to complete his Kora, the author wishes to visit Mt. Kailash. Thus,
he hires Tsetan so that he gets someone for driving him up to the mountain. While he
was parting with Lhamo, he receives a long-sleeved sheepskin coat. In order to get
companionship, the author takes Daniel with him till Darchen.
Upon starting their journey, Tsetan takes a short-cut to the south-west. He says it is
a direct route to Mt. Kailash. In order to reach their destination, they would have to
cross the high mountain passes. However, Tsetan assures them that due to lack of
snow, it would be easy to do so. On their way, they cross through a small number of
gazelles, a herd of wild asses and shepherds that were tending the flocks.
Upon reaching the hill, they notice dark tents. They learn they were nomad’s homes
and see a Tibetan mastiff guarding the tents. When they reach near the tents, the dogs
with large jaws ran after their car. Upon entering the valley, they witness mountains and
rivers covered in snow and ice.
The ride on the hill starts turning sharper and bumpier. As they reached higher, the
author could feel the pressure and noticed they were at 5210 meters above sea level.
After clearing the first hurdle of snow-filled roads, they were on and about. The author
starts feeling uneasy due to height and pressure. At around 2 o’clock in the afternoon,
they stop for lunch.
Finally, they reach a small town ‘Hor’ in late afternoon. The author took a break in
Hor and sat at the local café sipping on tea. During this time, Tsetan got the car fixed
and Daniel left for Lhasa. The author did not like Hor too much. Upon resuming the
journey, they stay the night at a guest house in Darchen. We see how he suffers from
nose-congestion due to the altitude change and chilly weather. He goes to see a
Tibetan doctor and receives a five-day course medication.
After that, he feels better and enjoys his stay at Darchen where he meets another
pilgrim, Norbu. As Darchen had no pilgrims, the author finds relief and decides to
complete his pilgrimage with him. Finally, they hire yaks for their luggage and Norbu
gives up while collapsing across the table and laughing. Norbu’s says it would not be
possible for him and he also had a big tummy.
1.5. Comments: This is an adventerous story.
1. What is Kora?
A. Yoga Aasan
B. Medication
C. name of a small town
D. meditation performed by Buddhist believers
2. Where was the protagonist heading towards in the beginning of the chapter?
A. Mount Kailash
B. Himalayas
C. Uttarakhand
D. Delhi
3. What was the sky looking like due to the sun rays spreading on the mountain
tops?
A. yellow blush
B. rose – tinted blush
C. beautiful and fresh
4. What did Lhamo give to the protagonist as a farewell gift?
A. long sleeved sheepskined coat
B. Flowers
C. leather coat
D. shoes
5. Who are Drokbas?
A. Hill Tribe
B. sheeps
C. local people
D. cuisine
6. Why did the driver take a short cut to Changtang?
A. he wanted to avoid traffic
B. he knew the shortest route towards Mount Kailash
C. he had to pick up another passenger
D. he didn’t wanted to go to that town
7. What is the meaning of ‘Kyang’?
A. flower petals
B. sun rays
C. huge pile of dust
D. huge pile of grass
8. Where did the protagonist encounter the great herd of wild ass?
A. at Mount Kailash
B. at Changtang
C. at a small town
D. where the plains became more stony
9. What did the protagonist notice in front of nomads tent?
A. Big black Tibetan dogs
B. sheeps
C. grass
D. raw material
10. What did the big Tibetan dogs do after they saw the approaching car?
A. they ran behind it as a bullet fired from a gun
B. they ignored it
C. they barked towards the car
D. they never saw it
11. How were the Tibetan Mastiffs famous in China’s royal court?
A. As hunting dogs
B. As big animal
C. As wild animals
12. When did the protagonist feel pressure on his ears?
A. when they reached Mount Kailash
B. when he was feeling sick in the car
C. when they entered a valley along icy river
D. when they were passing nomads tents
13. Why did the driver stop the car at a sharp turn?
A. he was tired and wanted to rest
B. protagonist was feeling sick
C. car’s tyre got punctured
D. long track of snow was in front of them
14. What were the protagonist, Daniel and Tsetan doing when they saw the snow?
A. trying to enjoy the snow
B. sat at a rock to take rest
C. trying to move smoothly over snowy surface
D. they were trying to find a guest house
15. At what sea level were the three of them when they saw the snow on the
road?
A. 5210 meters
B. 6000 meters
C. 1000 meters
D. 5300 meters
16. When did the protagonist’s head start to feel pulsated again?
A. when he reached his guest house
B. when he was climbing the mountain
C. when he was still in the car
D. when he fainted
17. Where did they stop to have lunch at two o’clock?
A. at a long canvas tent beside the dry salt lake
B. at a fancy restaurant
C. at roadside
D. Never
18. What was an old route from Lhasa to Kashmir?
A. east-west highway
B. Hor town
C. west-south highway
D. south-west highway
19. Why was Hor an ugly and miserable place?
A. it had no modern markets
B. it had no vegetation
C. it didnt had any proper medical facilities
D. it had no place to live
20. What are the names of four rivers that Lake Mansarovar consists of?
A. the Ganges, the Yamuna and the Sutlej
B. the Yamuna, the Ganga and the Indus
C. the Indus, the Ganges, the Sutlej, and the Brahmaputra
D. the Indus, the Ganges and the Yamuna
21. At which place did the protagonist wait for Tsetan while he was gone to fix the
punctured tyres?
A. at roadside near lake
B. at car tyre’s shop
C. inside the car
D. Hor’s cafe
22. What happened when they reached Darchen at night to stay in the guest
House?
A. protagonist slept well
B. Tsetan went missing
C. protagonist was sad
D. protagonist wasn’t able to breathe properly
23. Where did Tsetan take the protagonist to seek medical help?
A. Darchen Medical College
B. Tibetan Ayurvedic Doctor C. to Lhasa
D. to Ravu again
24. What did the Tibetan doctor give him?
A. a five day course medicine in a brown envelope
B. Ayurvedic medicine
C. Homeopathic medicine
D. Allopathic medicines
25. Where did the men play a game of pool in Darchen every afternoon?
A. near general store in open air
B. in the park
C. near Lake
26. Why was the protagonist facing communication problems in Darchen?
A. as he never wanted to talk to locals
B. as he was always busy in his meditation
C. as no one knew English
27. Where did the protagonist meet Norbu?
A. at cafe
B. at Kora
C. at nomad’s tents
D. at guest house
28. Where did Norbu work?
A. in Britain
B. Beijing at the Chinese Academy of Social Sciences
C. in India at IIT Delhi
D. in USA
29. Why did Norbu want to do Kora?
A. because he wanted to become a monk
B. because he wanted peace
C. as he was practising meditation from so long
D. because he was writing an academic paper on Kailash Kora
30. Did the two of them – the protagonist and Norbu go to do Kora together?
A. Yes
B. No
C. Maybe
1.6. Key

1 D 11 A 21 D
2 A 12 C 22 D
3 B 13 D 23 A
4 A 14 C 24 A
5 A 15 A 25 A
6 B 16 B 26 C
7 C 17 A 27 A
8 D 18 A 28 B
9 A 19 B 29 D
10 A 20 C 30 B
2. Poetry
1. A Photograph
1.1 Introduction:
‘A Photograph’, is written by ‘Shirley Toulson’.
1. Poetes’s Mother 2. Uncle 3. Betty and Dolly (Cousins)
1.3. Summary:
A Photograph compares the internal state of nature and the momentary state of
humans. In the poem, poetess describes a photograph of her mothers’ childhood. In
the photograph of time when she went for a sea holiday with her two girl cousins. Also,
poetess contrasts between nature, altering at the pace of a snail and the fast-changing
human life. Poetess remembers how her mother laughs at the photograph and feel
disappointed at the loss of her childhood joys. However, then, the sea holiday was her
mother’s past and now her mother’s laugh is the poetess’s past. At different periods of
time and with great difficulty, both resolve with their respective losses and the pain that
involves in remembering past. Besides, for the poetess, his mother’s death of her
mother brings great sadness and a dire sense of loss. Moreover, the painful ‘silence’ of
the situation leaves her without words.
The poem begins when the poetess goes through her mother’s photo that lay within
the cardboard boxes. They were possibly uncared for some time. In addition, it is not in
any frame, metal, etc. So, the poetess portrays it as being susceptible to forces of
decay. In the photo poetess’s mother seem edged by her siblings, who are younger
than her. Also, she highlights her mother strength as she supports her young cousins.
They all look into the camera when their brother/uncle photograph them. Moreover,
they look happy and excited with their throwing locks and pleasant smiles. Further, the
picture shows the sea waves smashing at them as the young girls learn to keep up with
the waves. She (poetess) remains with the thought that sea. Even in motion, her
mother (motionless in the photograph) is able to resist the change as she has
surrendered herself to mortality.
In the second part/phase, in her older days, her mother looks back the day at the
sea. Moreover, she remembers her two cousins and recalls the day memorialized in
the photograph. Also, she makes fun of her and her cousins’ outfits. These lines have a
tone of sadness as the mother tries to accept the continual motion of life as she grows
older. Looking back at her 12-years-old self maybe was an attempt to return to her
childhood, which is a painful reminder of time and age.
In the third part, the poetess remembering her mother as she died earlier. Further,
the photo scripts a memory for both. As it knots the mother and daughter together even
after her mother has left her for forever. The poetess confesses that the photo bliss at
imagining her mother’s laughter much like her mother delight in remembering the day
at the sea.
Moreover, she notices that the time over since her mother’s final departure is the
same as her age in the photograph i.e., 12 years. Maybe it’s a coincidence or an irony
of life and death. Eventually, both poetess and her mother learn to accept the change
and make peace with their memories. Even though they remind them of the briefness
of laughter, happy moment, etc.
Although the death or end makes things go quiet and empty. However, the poetess,
find her mother died to be loud and inspiring enough to pour her feelings out in the
form of a tribute and poem. Thus, even though death finishes everything. But her
mother’s death brings out a new response in her. Lastly, she accepts (silently) her
resignation to the final silence of death.
1.4. Comments: The emotional attachment between mother and daughter is shown
empathetically.
1. Who is the poet/poetess of the poem ‘A Photograph’?

A. Shirley Toulson
B. Rudyard Kipling
C. Elizabeth Jennings
D. Markus Natten
2. What is the poem ‘A Photograph’ about?

A. About poet’s childhood memories
B. tribute to the poet’s mother
C. Poet’s photograph
D. Poet’s father
3. What was the age of the poet’s mother when the photograph was taken?
A. eleven years old
B. thirteen years old
C. twelve years old
D. fourteen year old
4. When did her mother die ?

A. two years ago
B. five years ago
C. thirteen years ago
D. twelve years ago
5. How many people were in the photograph?

A. two girls
B. three girls
C. two girls and one boy
D. only her mother
6. Which material was the frame of the photograph made of?

A. Cardboard
B. Wood
C. Steel
D. Plastic
7. Who are on both sides of her mother?

A. Cousins, Betty and Dolly
B. Parents
C. Cousins, Dolly and Adam
D. Friends
8. What are the three of them doing in the photograph?

A. playing
B. standing beside house
C. holding hands
D. holding hands and went for paddling
9. Who took the photograph of her mother with her cousin?

A. Her grandfather
B. Her uncle
C. Her mother’s friend
D. Her grandmother
10. What does ‘Terribly Transient Feet’ mean in the poem?

A. her feet represent the mother, who changed with time while the sea
Remained the same
B. temporary situation
C. age is temporary
11. After how many years did her mother laugh on seeing the
Photograph?
A. Twenty-one
B. twenty-three
C. twelve
D. twenty-five
12. What was the favourite memory of her mother?

A. beach holidays
B. school memories
C. vacations
13. What was the favourite memory of the poet?

A. her mother’s memories
B. her mother’s laughter
C. her own vacation memories
D. her childhood memories
14. What would the mother show to her daughter while showing her the
photograph?
A. how her parents dressed her for the beach
B. her cousins
C. her own childhood photograph
D. the background
15. What is the meaning of the word ‘wry’?

A. ironic
B. cry
C. sad
16. What Oxymoron literary device was used in the poem?

A. Terribly transient
B. Through their
C. Both wry
D. Laboured ease
17. What Epithet literary device was used in the poem?

A. Terribly transient
B. Through their
C. Both wry
D. Laboured ease
18. How many phases were depicted in the poem by the poet?
A. one
B. two
C. three
D. four
19. What was the last phase in the poem?

A. after her mother died
B. after she grown up
C. after her mother grown up
20. What does she feel in the last phase?

A. pain and grief
B. happy and nostalgic
C. sad and nostalgic
D. pain and nostalgic
1.6. Key
Q. No. Answer Q. No. Answer

1 A 11 B
2 B 12 A
3 C 13 B
4 D 14 A
5 B 15 A
6 A 16 D
7 A 17 A
8 D 18 C
9 B 19 A
10 A 20 A
2. The Laburnum Top
1.1 Introduction:
‘The Laburnum Top, is written by ‘Ted Huges’.
1. Golf Finch (Bird) 2. Laburnum (Posinous Tree)
1.3. Summary:
The Laburnum Top Summary will help students learn about this poem in a simplified
manner. It is written by Ted Huges. The poem revolves around a Laburnum tree and a
Goldfinch bird. The core theme of the poem shows us the repaying relationship
between the two. Further, it begins by describing how the Laburnum tree is pretty quiet
in the yellow September light. He notices the yellow leaves of the tree and the seeds
on the ground. It appears to be still fleetingly till a goldfinch bird perches on its branch.
The poet witnesses the tree come to life as soon as the bird starts chirping. Upon the
arrival of the mother goldfinch, the tree and the nestlings, start chirping and become
alive. She keeps flying in and out to feed her young ones. Thus, when she leaves, the
tree once again dons its elusive silence.
The poet describes his experience of what he witnesses in the Laburnum tree. It
begins by describing how the leaves of the tree are yellow. Moreover, he notices that
the treetop is still and remains silent even in the month of September.
Due to the autumn season, the tree has lost all its leaves and the seeds are on the
ground. Most noteworthy, the poet uses ‘yellow’ to describe both, the leaves colour and
the sunlight. Over here, yellow represents silence, death and beauty. Thus, he uses
this colour and describes the whole setting perfectly.
After that, he notices that the death-like scene of the tree comes to an end when a
goldfinch bird perches on it. The tree makes a sudden chirrup sound upon the bird’s
arrival. He compares the quickness, speed and alertness of the bird to that of a lizard.
When she starts moving towards the thickness of the branch, the nestlings start
chirping and flapping their wings. Thus, due to this movement, the tree also starts
shaking and thrilling. Thus, we notice how the poet gives two contrasting scenarios
while describing the tree. First was that it was death-like and then it gains life after the
bird lands on it.
Further, the poet finally realizes that the goldfinch bird and the tree are the engines
of her family. When she brings food for the little birdies, she moves to the end of the
other branch. He describes the bird’s appearance. It has a striped face which is dark in
colour.
After that, her body is yellow and thus blends in with the yellow leaves of the tree.
Finally, after reaching the branch end, she makes a rather sweet chirping sound. The
poet compares this sound to whispering as she flies away in the limitless sky. Thus,
after the bird leaves the tree, the Laburnum tree once again becomes silent and death-
like.
1.4. Comments:
'Laburnum' tree has 'poisonous seeds', that's why no bird comes to the tree.
1. How did the poet describe the top of the Laburnum tree in the poem ‘The
Laburnum Top’?
A. Still and Silent
B. Moving and Angry like
C. Silent and Motionless
2. What happened to the leaves of the Laburnum tree?

A. they were green
B. turned yellow
C. fallen down
D. new leaves growing
3. How was the tree standing in the month of September?

A. still and death-like
B. alive
C. green and happy
D. still and green
4. When did the death-like tree become alive?

A. in the month of March
B. by the arrival monsoon season
C. by the arrival of the Goldfinch bird
D. by the arrival of sparrows
5. Why did the Goldfinch bird came towards the tree?

A. to feed her younger ones
B. to make a nest
C. to rest
6. Where are the young ones of the Goldfinch bird?

A. On the thickness of the branch
B. On the top of the tree
C. on other tree
D. they were never there
7. What role does the tree play for the Goldfinch bird?
A. As a shelter
B. as a supporter
C. as a means to feed her family
D. as a resting place
8. How did the bird move to the other side of the branch?
A. Like a lizard
B. Slowly
C. Smoothly
D. by flying
9. How did the bird arrive at the other branch of the tree?
A. with a chirping sound
B. silently
C. never arrived at other branch
D. flew away and then arrived at the branch
10. What happened after she fed her young ones?

A. she flew away
B. she flew to the other side of the branch
C. she stayed there
D. she took some rest in the nest
11. Why was Goldfinch’s body barely visible?

A. due to her dark coloured yellow body
B. because she was small
C. because of the height of the tree
D. because she was brown in colour
12. Where did the bird vanish after feeding her young ones?
A. to the other branch
B. to the top of the tree
C. to her nest
D. behind the yellow leaves
13. What happened to the bird in the end of the poem?

A. she flew away
B. she stayed at the tree
C. she went to other tree
D. she went to bring some food for her younger ones
14. How was the tree in the end when the bird flew away?
A. It was still alive
B. Nothing changed in the looks
C. it was death-like again
15. What instance of Alliteration has been used in the poem ‘The Laburnum Top’
out of the following options?
A. engine of her family
B. her barred face
C. Sleek as a lizard
D. September sunlight
16. What Transferred Epithet was used in the poem ‘The Laburnum Top’?
A. her barred face identity mask
B. engine of her family
C. Sleek as a lizard
D. September sunlight
17. What does the phrase “her barred face identity mask” mean?
A. because she was brown in colour
B. due to her dark coloured yellow body
C. bird’s face became her identity and symbol of recognition
18. What is the dominant colour used in the poem?

A. Red
B. Blue
C. Yellow
D. Green
19. What is described by the word ‘sleek’ in the poem?

A. Lizard
B. Bird
C. Branch
D. Top of the tree
20. What is described as ‘engine’ in the poem?

A. Lizard
B. Machine
C. Laburnum Tree
1.6. Key
Q. Q. Q. Q.
No. No. No. No.
1 A 6 A 11 A 16 A
2 B 7 A 12 D 17 C
3 A 8 A 13 A 18 C
4 C 9 A 14 C 19 A
5 A 10 B 15 D 20 C
1.1. Introduction:
‘The Voice of the Rani’, is written by ‘Walt Whitman’.
1. Walt Whitman 2. Rain
1.3. Summary:
The Voice of the Rain Summary – Poet narrates a conversation he had with the
falling drops of rain. In the poem, he asks the rain, “And who art thou?” on which the
rain replies by calling itself “the poem of the Earth.” Moreover, the rain defines how it
rises unnoticeably (as vapour) out of the land and sea and floats up to heaven, where it
converts into clouds. After that, it falls back to Earth to refresh the drought-filled land.
This allows the seeds to grow into something necessary and beautiful. Further, the
poet equates the role of the poet in making this “song” (poet refers to the poem as a
song). He also writes that this “song” is born from the poet’s heart. Besides, it leaves
the poet’s soul and then changes form. But it’s same at its core and eventually returns
to the reader as love from readers.
In this poem the Poet Walt Whitman writes of a conversation he once had with rain.
It happened when the raindrops gently from the heavens. The poet asks the rain “Who
are you?” and strangely the rain replies “I am the poem of the earth.” Moreover, the
rain said that it was born in the form of invisible and intangible vapours. This vapour
rises eternally from the deepwater bodies and earth’s land. After that, it reaches
heaven (the sky) and changes its look to form clouds that can change shapes. Still, it
remains the same at its core.
Then again it returns to earth as little droplets that wash away with dust and restore
the drought-ridden, dry land. Due to its action, new plants find a life which otherwise
remained hidden and unborn inside the land as mere seeds. Hence this perpetual
cyclic lifestyle ensures that the rain returns to its origin. It gives life to earth making it
pure and beautiful.
After hearing the rain’s story the poet realises that it life resembles that of any song.
And the song’s birthplace is the poet’s heart. When the song is complete it wanders
(pass on) from one place to another. As it travels it may change or remain the same,
But one day, it returns to the poet with all due love of the listeners.
However, the poem is written from the point of view of someone who asks the rain
who it was? And the rains answer him “I am the song of the Earth.” And then it
continues to till how it comes from the earth, only to return once again to wash it and
nourish it…that if it were not for the rain, the seeds would remain seeds and we won’t
get any flowers from them.
Also, if the rain hasn’t return then the seeds would remain seeds and not flower into
the full potential and giving back life to its origin. Afterwards, the poem turns into a
story which tells a song. The song tells the story of rain its birth-place, wandering,
Reck’d or unchecked duly with love returns. It means that songs come from the soul
after they’ve been heard, and thought good or bad, return with love.
When the rain rises and falls the poem also do the same. Like songs and other
forms of beauty from the soul. Besides, the rain is like a song that originates from its
birth-place i.e. the heart of the poet. Moreover, it travels everywhere around the globe
and returns back to the poet in the form of praise. However, whether it is ruined or not,
and it returns back with a lot of love for its birth-place.
1.4. Comments: 'Personification' is used in the poem.
1. The poem ‘The Voice of the Rain’ is a conversation between ___?

A. poet and rain
B. poet and mountains
C. rain and trees
D. birds and rain
2. What does the poet ask to the soft – falling shower?

A. What do you do?
B. What is your name?
C. Who are you?
D. How are you doing?
3. What does the rain reply to the poet’s question ‘Who are you’?
A. she is rain
B. she is poem of earth
C. she is rain from mountains
D. she is poem of mountains
4. Why does the rain tell the poet that she cannot be touched?
A. because she is water
B. because she rises in the form of water vapour
C. because she is in the form of clouds
5. From which two places does the rain rise in the form of water vapour?
A. land and bottomless sea
B. land and ocean
C. mountains and land
6. What happens to the earth when the rain falls back on the surface of earth?
A. it provides water
B. it beautifies and purifies the earth
C. it helps in greenary
D. it provides water to flora and fauna
7. How does the rain help the seeds inside the earth?
A. provides water
B. provides life and helps them grow
C. provides life
8. What does the rain do when she doesn’t care if anyone bothers about her
deeds or not?
A. she talks to the land
B. she works harder
C. she completes her work and talk to the earth
D. she completes her work and comes back home
9. What does the poet compare the rain with?
A. Song
B. Heaven
C. Beauty
D. Flowers
10. Why does the poet compare the rain with a song?
A. because she beautifies the earth
B. because she provides life on earth
C. as they both share a common journey
11. From where does the song originate?

A. from heaven
B. from ocean
C. from the heart of the singer
D. from the soul of earth
12. If the poet has used a Metaphor in the poem, what is it?
A. I am the Poem of Earth
B. voice of the rain
C. Soft-falling shower
13. What Hyperbole was used in the poem?

A. I am the Poem of Earth
B. Soft-falling shower
C. Bottomless sea
D. voice of the rain
14. What happens to the rain in the sky?

A. rain drops form
B. rain it condenses
C. it forms clouds
15. What does the word ‘Descend’ mean?
A. not clear
B. come down
C. to wash
D. hidden
16. Why does the rain descend to the earth?

A. to wash the drought and provide water
B. she provides life on earth
C. it beautify and purify the earth
D. it provides life
17. What does ‘Reck’d or unreck’d’ mean?

A. enrichment or no enrichment
B. cared for or not cared for
C. to purify or not
D. to wash or not to wash
18. Where does the song return in the poem?

A. to its originator, i.e. singer
B. to the poet
C. to earth
D. to ocean
19. What is the meaning of ‘who art thou’?

A. Who are you?
B. What are you?
C. How are you?
D. Whose art is this?
20. Who is the poet of the poem ‘The Voice of the Rain’?
A. Walt Whitman
B. Kushwant Singh
C. Naipul
D. Shirley Toulson
1.6. Key
Q. Q. Q. Q.
No. No. No. No.
1 A 6 B 11 C 16 A
2 C 7 B 12 A 17 B
3 B 8 D 13 C 18 A
4 B 9 A 14 A 19 A
5 A 10 D 15 B 20 A
4. Childhood
1.1. Introduction:
‘Childhood’, is written by ‘Markus Natten’.
1.2. Important Points:
1. Rationality 2. Hypocrisy 3. Individuality
1.3. Summary:
Childhood is from the poet Marcus Natten. In the Childhood summary, the poet
discusses the loss of his childhood. The poet talks about that very moment where this
innocence was lost. He talks about the various instances when he could have lost his
childhood. Furthermore, a realization comes to the poet that the world is not what it
seems. He recalls when a change in his thoughts took place. The poet believes that
the people around him are hypocrites. It seems that the poet will never be able to trust
people around him ever again. This is because he is aware of their hypocrisy. The poet
believes that adults preach love but their actions don’t reflect that. The author tells us
that his childhood went to some forgotten place. Moreover, the poet explains that his
childhood is hidden in the face of an infant who is innocent.
First of all, the poet thinks and wonders about the end of his childhood. He thinks
where his childhood came to an end. He wonders that was it the day on which he was
no longer eleven years of age. Another option could be the time when the author came
to the realization that Hell and Heaven didn’t exist and one could not find them in
geography. So, this was the time when the author could make a distinction between
reality and fantasy. The poet comes to the realization that they are imaginary places
that have no existence in this world.
Once again the poet again repeats the same question about losing his childhood.
Now, the poet wonders that was it the time when he began to view the world with a
different perception. Naturally, when humans grow older, their perception of the world
changes. However, the poet seems to be deeply affected by it. Furthermore, the poet
came to the realization that adults are hypocrites. This is because the adults are not
what they appear or seem to be. According to the author, adults preach about love but
their behaviour is not so loving. So the author believes that a double-face nature is
displayed by the adults. So, was this the time when his childhood go?
Moving on, the poet deliberates on the same question regarding the loss of his
childhood. Furthermore, the author asks himself about various possibilities. Moreover,
the poet thinks about the day when he came to the realization that his mind was his
own. This was the time when the poet came to the realization that he can use his mind
in any way he wants. Also, the poet realizes that his thoughts were his own and no one
can affect them. One can say that the poet became aware that he can produce his own
thoughts and that he had free will. This was the time when the poet became aware of
his own individuality and personality. So, was that the day where his childhood became
lost?
In the last stanza, the poet becomes remorseful about his lost childhood. It seems
the poet has a desire to live his childhood once more. He concludes that his childhood
had vanished into a forgotten place from which it can never return. The poet cherishes
his now lost innocence. This is the type of innocence that one can only see in a baby’s
face. He only has sweet childhood memories which would fade away rather quickly.
According to the poet, the innocence of childhood remains only until one is an infant.
1.4. Comments: Poet lost his childhood, symbolic representation of, 'Happiness'
when he became rational, individual and understand the hypocrisy in the world.
1. What is the poem ‘Childhood’ about?

A. Poet’s lost childhood
B. Childhood of every person
C. Childhood of poet’s child
D. Poet’s father’s childhood
2. After what age did the poet realise that he had lost his childhood?
A. Twelve
B. Eleven
C. Ten
D. Thirteen
3. What the poet could not find in the Geography book?

A. Hell and Heaven
B. End to sky
C. Island
D. Country
4. What did the poet find out about Hell and Heaven?
A. They could be found in Geography books
B. They were imaginary places
C. They were in America
D. They were in India
5. What did the poet realise about adults?

A. That they are mature
B. They have to earn money
C. They are not what they seem to be
D. They are cunning
6. Why are the adults not what they seem to be?

A. They talk and preach of love but do not act so
B. They are very shrewd
C. They are selfish
D. They are lazy
7. What did the poet realise about his mind when he lost his childhood?
A. That he can use it in whichever way he wants
B. That he is very intelligent
C. That he is dumb
D. That he cannot use it in whichever way he wants
8. What did the poet conclude about his lost childhood at the end of the poem?
A. It went to another dimension
B. It went to some forgotten place
C. It moved away with time
D. It shifted to his younger sibling
9. Where could he see his childhood now?

A. In an infant’s face
B. Only in his memories
C. Nowhere
D. In his brother
10. What type of Rhyme Scheme is used in the poem ‘Childhood’?

A. ABABAB
B. ABBABA
C. ABABCB
D. ABBCCD
11. Who is the poet of the poem ‘Childhood’?

A. Shirley Toulson
B. Walt Whitman
C. Marcus Natten
D. Naipul
12. What is the meaning of the word ‘ceased’?

A. Starting of something
B. Come to an end
C. In the middle
D. To chase something
13. What is the opposite of the word ‘hidden’?

A. Open
B. Closed
C. Partial
D. Exposed
14. According to the poet, adults are _______

A. Hypocrites
B. Smart
C. Lovable
D. Intelligent and Cunning
15. What did the poet sense about himself when he realised he could use his own
mind the way he wants?
A. He sensed that he is as intelligent as his friends
B. He sensed his own individuality and a separate personality
C. He sensed that he is very smart
D. He sensed that he could use his mind in creative work
16. What refrain literary device is used in the poem ‘Childhood’?

A. When did my childhood go?
B. Hell and Heaven
C. Could not be found in Geography
D. That’s all I know
17. Antihesis is where two opposite words are used together in a sentence in a
poem, where did the poet use it?
A. Infant’s face
B. Forgotten place
C. Hell and Heaven
D. Preached of love
18. Which of these is NOT one of the options where the poet thinks that his
childhood has gone?
A. The time when he ceased to be twelve
B. The time when he realized that hell and heaven could not be found in
Geography
C. The time when he realized that adults were hypocrites
D.None of the Above
19. Which poetic device has been used in the following line-
Was it when I found my mind was really mine.
A. Alliteration
B. Simile
C. Metaphor
D. Personification
20. What question does the poet put forth?

A. “When did my childhood go?”
B. “Where did my childhood go?”
C. Both A and B
D. None of these
1.6. Key
Q. Answer Q. Answer Q. Answer Q. Answer

No. No. No. No.
1 A 6 A 11 C 16 A
2 B 7 A 12 B 17 C
3 A 8 B 13 D 18 A
4 B 9 A 14 A 19 A
5 C 10 D 15 B 20 C
5. Father to Son
1.1. Introduction:
‘Father to Son’, is written by ‘Elizabeth Jennings’.
1. Father 2. Son
1.3. Summary:
The poem ‘Father to Son’ is by the author Elizabeth Jennings. The Father to Son
summary deals with the anguish of a father who lacks a good relationship with his son.
Furthermore, his son is now an adult. Moreover, his son is now busy in life. Also, the
father is bitter regarding the generation gap between him and his son. He is troubled by
a feeling of separation with his son. The father expresses his feeling by saying that he
does not know much about his son. There also is no sign of understanding. The father
has a desire that he wants his relationship with his son to be just like when his son was
a child. He tries to mend the relationship but the efforts are in vain. He tries his best to
resolve this issue with his son but with no success. So, they are drifting apart.
The poet shares his feelings regarding the relationship with his son. The poet
explains they he and his son have spent many years in the same house. However, in
spite of spending so many years together, the father still doesn’t understand his son.
Furthermore, the father doesn’t know anything about his son. He doesn’t know what his
son likes or what he dislikes. The father made an effort to build up a relationship with
his son since he was small. However, over the years, change has come in his son. As
a grown-up man, his son certainly has changed.
The father acknowledges his role in the communication gap between him and his
son. He explains that despite his efforts, things are not turning to his side. He says that
his son was in a place that he could not access. Furthermore, the father tells us that
their communication is like the communication of strangers. It seems there is not much
attachment between the two. Moreover, there has been no signs of understanding
between the father and son. His child had a resemblance in appearance with his father.
However, in spite of this resemblance in appearance, the father didn’t know what his
son loved.
There is a silence between the father and the son. As a child, his son was of a
prodigal nature. His father had a desire for his son to return home, the one he knew.
The father does not want his son to move around in the world and make his own world.
The father was willing to express his forgiveness to his son. Furthermore, the father
was willing to let go of the sorrows that he had inside of him due to the existing
distance between them. The father certainly had a desire to love him again.
Now, the son speaks for the first time and expresses his feelings. Furthermore, the
son has a feeling of sadness about the distance between them. Furthermore, the son
tells that he is at a point in his life where he does not understand himself. Moreover, the
son explains that his anger is due to sadness. Hence, it becomes pretty clear that both
the father and son feel the same frustration due to this gap in the relationship. Also,
both the father and son are willing to forgive each other. However, they are failing to
find a solution to their problem. Both of them put out an empty hand for each other but
in futility.
1.4. Comments:
In this poem, father compramises with his son.
1. Who is the poet of the poem ‘Father to Son’?

A. Walt Whitman
B. ShirleyToulson
C. Elizabeth Jennings
D. Khushwant Singh
2. What is the poem ‘Father to Son’ about?

A. Unsettling relationship between father and son
B. father’s old age
C. son comparing him to his father
D. father talking to son about his childhood
3. How old is the son when his father rants about his agony to his son?
A. teenager
B. grown-up
C. child
D. just became adult
4. Father tells him that although they have lived in the same house for years, he
______
A. envy him
B. adore him
C. doesn’t understand him
D. finds him cunning
5. What happened when he tried to build a relationship with him in his childhood?
A. he was successful
B. his efforts were in vain
c. he was half-way successful
6. Does father know about his son’s likes and dislikes?

A. Yes
B. No
C. Maybe
C. Can’t say
7. "Why does the father use ‘I’ in a line ‘The seed I spent or sown it where ‘where
he was talking about communication gap?"
A. to acknowledge his role in the communication gap
B. to acknowledge himself
C. to let his son know his importance
D. to make him understand about him
8. Despite all his efforts to fix the communication gap, was the son able to
understand him?
A. Yes
B. No
C. Can’t say
D. Maybe
9. "What is the meaning of ‘this child is built to my design yet what he loves I
cannot share’?"
A. his son looks like him and they share everything with each other
B. His son looks like him yet they don’t have anything to share
C. his son doesn’t look like him
D. neither does his son looks like him nor he understand him
10. What is the meaning of word ‘Prodigal’ used in the third stanza?
A. understanding son
B. someone who is smart
C. spending money freely
D. someone who doesn’t spend money freely
11. Is there a silence between the father and the son?

A. Yes
B. No
C. Can’t say
D. Maybe
12. Since his son was prodigal, why does he want him to come back home?
A. to make amends with him
B. to teach him a lesson
C. to give him money
13. Does the father want his son to move around in his own world?
A. Yes, absolutely
B. Not at all
C. Maybe
14. Why was the father ready to forgive him?

A. to let go of all the sorrows he had inside
B. to become a better person
C. to teach his son a lesson
D. to help his son
15. When the son spoke for the first time, does he also feel sad about the distance
between them?
A. Yes, he did
B. No, he did not felt anything
C. Maybe in his heart
D. He never thought about it
16. What does the son share about him understanding himself?
A. he is at a point where he doesn’t understand himself
B. he understands him so well
C. he don’t want to think about it
D. he is very busy to think about understanding himself
17. From where does the son’s anger arise?

A. out of his nature
B. out of his sadness
C. out of his father’s attitude
D. out of his childhood memories
18. What happens when they both put out an empty hand for the others to seek?
A. efforts are always in vain
B. they got successful in the end
C. father wasn’t interested
D. they never had a chance to talk
19. Find out the simile used in the poem ‘Father to Son’?
A. Silence surrounds us
B. The seed I spent or sown it where
C. We speak like strangers
D. Yet what he loves I cannot share
20. Which of the following is an Alliteration?

A. Silence surrounds us
B. We speak like strangers
C. I do not understand this child
D. I would have
1.6. Key
Q. Q. Q. Q.
No. No. No. No.
1 C 6 B 11 A 16 A
2 A 7 A 12 A 17 B
3 B 8 B 13 B 18 A
4 C 9 B 14 A 19 C
5 B 10 C 15 A 20 A
3. Snapshots
1.1. Introduction:
‘The Summer of the Beautiful White Horse’, is written by, ‘William Saroyon’.
1. Aram 2. Mourad 3. Uncle 4. John Byro
1.3. Summary:
The summer of the beautiful white horse summary gives a brief account of the story
using easy language. In this story, the author describes a childhood incident. He gets
very nostalgic when talking about this incident. The incident is about his cousin Mourad
and a beautiful white horse. One fine summer morning, Mourad brings a white horse
for riding. Thus, he explains how the horse riding was full of thrill. We learn about the
author’s cousin, Mourad, in detail. He goes on to tell about his nature and how
everyone loved him in the village. We learn that Mourad had a very eccentric
demeanour. Moreover, he also tells us that he had a speciality of remaining calm in the
most stressful situations. Thus, we also learn about the incident of the horse.
Moreover, it tells how they got the horse and the story behind it.
The Summer of the Beautiful White Horse revolves around two Armenian boys. The
boys belong to the Garoghlanian tribe. We learn that even though they were poor, they
never sacrifice their honesty. In fact, even in the worst of situations, they were always
honest.
Similarly, the boys never steal or lie, whatever the situation may be. This story
describes the particular incident about the white horse they once got. Aram is 9 years
old and his cousin, Mourad is 13 years old. Aram is very fascinated by the world as
things are easy in childhood. Moreover, Mourad is the crazy one, as everyone calls
him.
The story begins with Mourad visiting Aram’s house in the morning at 4. To Aram’s
surprise, Mourad has brought a beautiful white horse which he is riding. Mourad
assures him that it is indeed a horse and he is not dreaming. Aram did not believe it
because he knew that they were poor and wouldn’t be able to afford a horse.
Therefore, the two boys kept the horse with them for weeks. They use to ride it and
sing to it. However, the boys did not let the world know they have a horse. They were
keeping him at a barn of a deserted vineyard. After a while, Aram finds out that Mourad
stole the horse from John Byro. Thus, they made a plan of not returning it to him,
although they had second doubts about keeping it due to their ethics.
Finally, on one day, John sees the boys with the white beautiful horse. However, as
his family was known for their honesty, John did not accuse them of stealing. On the
other hand, his belief was so strong he just said that their horse resembles his horse a
lot.
Consequently, this was a very poignant experience for the boys. They decide to
return the horse and John found it at the vineyard the next day. John gets very happy
and shares the news with Aram’s mother. We also see that his horse is now healthier,
well-behaved and more decent than before.
1.4. Comments:
It shows how they boys wants to retain the hallmarks of their tribe.
Q1. Who is the author of “The Summer of the Beautiful White Horse”?
A. AJ Cronin
B. William Wordsworth
C. William Shakespeare
D. William Saroyan
Q2. What were the hallmarks of the Garoghlanian tribe?
A. Trust
B. Honesty
C. Both (A) and (B)
Q3. “The Summer of the Beautiful White Horse” is a story of two _________ boys.
A. Armenian
B. Arabian
C. Assyrian
D. African
Q4. Mourad enjoyed being _______ more than anybody else.

A. crazy
B. alive
C. funny
Q5. What according to Aram, was his first longing?
A. To own a horse
B. To become rich
C. To ride a horse
D. To visit a vineyard
Q6. Why couldn’t Aram believe when he saw Mourad with the horse?
A. Because Mourad was crazy
B. Because they were poor to afford a horse
C. Because he was sleepy
D. Because he was dreaming
Q7. Where did Aram live?
A. In the centre of the town
B. In the country
C. Olive Avenue
D. At the edge of town on Walnut Avenue
Q8. How does Aram describe the horse?
A. Magnificent & lovely
B. Beautiful white horse
C. Both (A) and (B)
Q9. No member of the Garoghlanian family could be _______.
A. poor
B. rich
C. a thief
D. crazy
Q10. Mourad was considered the natural descendant of his _________.
A. father
B. uncle
C. grandfather
D. great-grandfather
Q11. How would you describe uncle Khosrove?
A. Hot tempered
B. Irritable
C. Impatient
D. All of the above
Q12. What did uncle Khosrove do to stop anyone from talking?
A. By beating them
B. By walking away
C. By shouting at them
D. By ignoring them
Q13. What was uncle Khosrove’s customary line?
A. Ignore it; pay no attention.
B. Forget it.
C. It is harmless; ignore it.
D. It is no harm; pay no attention to it.
Q14. When Aram rode the horse alone, it ran down the road to the
A. vineyard
B. irrigation ditch
C. field
D. countryside
Q15. Mourad had been hiding the horse _________.

A. in a stable
B. in a barn of a vineyard
C. at a secret place of his house
Q16. What was the behaviour of the horse initially?
A. It wanted to be trained
B. It wanted to rest
C. It wanted to run wild
D. All of the above
Q17. What sort of an understanding did Mourad mention with the horse?
A. Mature
B. Simple and honest
C. Complicated
D. Difficult
Q18. John Byro learned to speak Armenian out of ________.
A. necessity
B. fun
C. eagerness
D. loneliness
Q19. Who was the true knower of the horse?
A. John Byro
B. Fetvajian
C. Dikran Halabian
D. Zorab
Q20. For how long did Mourad have the horse before Aram got to know about it?
A. One day
B. One year
C. One month
A. One week
Q21. At what time did Aram and Mourad ride the horse?
A. Late night
B. Early morning
C. Evening
D. Afternoon hours
Q22. “I have a way with farmers.” Who says it to whom?
A. Aram to Mourad
B. Mourad to John Byro
C. Aram to John Byro
D. Mourad to Aram
Q23. John Byro said, “A suspicious man would believe his eyes instead of his
heart.” What does it tell about him?
A. He believed in the honesty of Garoghlanian family
B. He was impractical
C. He was foolish
Q24. Why did the horse’s owner refuse to believe that the boys had stolen his
horse?
A. Because he didn’t examine the horse carefully
B. Because their family was known for honesty
C. Because he had found his horse elsewhere
D. Because his horse had a twin
Q25. When did the boys return the horse?
A. After Aram learned to ride it
B. After an year
C. After six months
D. After they ran into John Byro
Q26. Why did the boys return the white horse to its owner?
A. Because they were conscience stricken
B. Because they were afraid
C. Because they found it difficult to hide the horse
D. Because they were accused of theft
Q27. After the horse was stolen and returned, it became ______.
A. rougher
A. sick & ill
B. stronger & better-tempered
C. Both (A) and (C)
Q28. “Quiet, man, quiet. Your horse has been returned.” Who said this?
A. Mourad
B. Aram
C. Uncle Khosrove
D. Not mentioned in the story
Q29. Who is the narrator of the story “The Summer of a Beautiful White Horse”?
A. William Saroyan
B. Aram
C. John Byro
D. Mourad
Q30. What idea/theme does “The Summer of a Beautiful White Horse” entails?
A. Honesty
B. Honour
C. Trust
D. All of the above
1.6. Key
Q. Q. Q. Q.
No. No. No. No.
1 D 9 C 17 B 25 D
2 C 10 B 18 D 26 A
3 A 11 D 19 A 27 C
4 B 12 C 20 C 28 C
5 C 13 D 21 B 29 B
6 B 14 A 22 D 30 D
7 D 15 B 23 A
8 C 16 C 24 B
2. The Address
1.1. Introduction:
‘The Address’, is written by ‘Margo Minco’.
1. Mrs. S 2. Mrs. S’s Daugher 3. Mrs. Dorling
1.3. Summary:
The Address summary will help you learn easily about the story written by Margo
Minco. It gives an account of the chaos which follows war. We see what it does to
humans and their behaviour. You can feel the pain, grief and mental torture the
survivors of war have to go through. It is about the author’s story, who is a Jew and
returns to her native home post-war. After suffering many losses, she even loses her
mother. Further, it is about how she handles the world alone after going through so
much pain. Moreover, we learn about the world’s cruelty towards the oppressed. Upon
suffering from further oppression, she realizes a lesson in a tough way. She comes to
realize that nothing is kept in materialistic things and she gives everything up. Thus, it
shows us about human pain and self-actualization.
The Address begins with a victim of war going back to her native place. It is about a
daughter who returns to her home in Holland. She goes there to search for her
mother’s belongings after the war. When she reaches her native place, she does not
receive a warm welcome. She follows the address she has on her. It is House Number
46 in Marconi Street. A woman opens the door and refuses to recognize the girl on the
door. The author notices the woman wearing her mother’s green knitted sweater. Thus,
she became even surer that she was in the right place. However, the woman did not
deny not knowing her mother.
Despite the author’s resistance, the woman did not entertain her and close the door
on her. The author was going back when she starts thinking about the bygone days.
She got the address from her mother years ago. After returning to her home post-war,
she notices a lot of things missing from the place. Thus, her mother gives her an
address of Mrs Dorling. She learns that Mrs. Dorling is an old acquaintance of her
mother. Thus, her mother handed over all their valuable possessions to Mrs. Dorling to
keep them safe. Thus, after many years, the author thinks of going back to take them
possessions. Thus, after being told to go away by Mrs. Dorling on her visit, she goes
back once again. On her second visit, fifteen-year-old answers the door.
We learn that the mother was not at home. The author told her about her wish to
meet her mother. The girl takes her in the house. To the author’s surprise, she notices
the room full of things her mother possessed. The room was not similar but the things
were all very familiar. She started to feel so uncomfortable; she now had no desire to
possess her mother’s belongings. Thus, she leaves the home and thought of forgetting
the address and the thought of ever getting those things back.
1.4. Comments:
This story shows how people change in adversity.
Q1. How did Mrs. Dorling treat the author when the author visited her?
A. Warm & welcoming
B. Cold & inhospitable
C. Overjoyed
D. Both (A) and (C)
Q2. “Her face gave absolutely no sign of recognition.” Who is her?
A. Mrs. S
B. Mrs. Dorling’s daughter
C. Mrs. Dorling
D. Mrs. S’s daughter
Q3. In what attire did the author find Mrs. Dorling?
A. Author’s mother’s green knitted cardigan
B. Author’s green knitted cardigan
C. Author is unable to recognise it
A. Not mentioned in the story
Q4. “I thought that no one had come back.” Why does Mrs. Dorling say this?
A. Because she was happy to see the protagonist
B. Because she had been waiting for the protagonist for a long time
C. Because she thought everyone in the protagonist’s family were dead
Q5. What was the address that the author’s mother asked her to remember?
A. Number 50, Marconi Street
B. Number 46, Baker Street
C. Number 54, Marconi Street
D. Number 46, Marconi Street
Q6. Mrs. Dorling’s was _________ of Mrs. S.
A. a sister
B. an old acquaintance
C. an old friend
D. a relative
Q7. Mrs. Dorling took the possessions of the things on the pretence of
__________.
A. using them
B. selling them
C. keeping them safe
D. Both (A) and (B)
Q8. Was the author convinced with her mother’s idea of letting Mrs. Dorling take
away their things?
A. Absolutely
B. Partially
C. Not at all
Q9. How does the author describe Mrs. Dorling when she saw her the first time
during the war?
A. A woman with a broad back
B. A woman with a round back
C. A woman with a straight back
Q10. Why did the author wait for such a long time before visiting “The Address”?
A. Because she was not interested
B. Because she was afraid to confront her mother’s belongings
C. Both (A) and (B)
Q11. Why had the author come to visit Mrs. Dorling?
A. Because Mrs. Dorling had belongings of author’s mother
B. Because Mrs. Dorling called her
C. Because she missed Mrs. Dorling
Q12. Who opened the door upon the author’s second visit to Mrs. Dorling’s
house?
A. Mrs. Dorling
B. Mrs. Dorling’s daughter
C. Mrs. Dorling’s husband
D. No one opened the door
Q13. Unlike Mrs. Dorling, her daughter was __________ towards the author.
A. rude
B. mature
C. hospitable
D. mean
Q14. What was the protagonist’s reaction when she entered the living-room?
A. Thrilled
B. Emotional
C. Nervous
D. Horrified
Q15. “I was in a room I knew and did not know.” What does author mean by this?
A. She saw familiar things but in unfamiliar surroundings
B. She saw unfamiliar things but in familiar surroundings
C. She did not recognize the things she saw
D. She did not want to remember anything
Q16. How does the author describe the living room?
A. Muggy smell
B. Strange atmosphere
C. Sophisticated
D. Both (A) and (B)
Q17. In what condition did the author find the living room?
A. Haphazard
B. Well arranged
C. Empty
D. Old fashioned
Q18. The author remembered that the woollen table-cloth had _________.
A. an ink-mark
B. a defect
C. a burn mark
Q19. According to the author, when do we notice the things in the house?
A. When they are out of our sight
B. When they are used
C. When they are shown
D. All of the above
Q20. What was the ‘silver’ that the author was once asked to clean by her
mother?
A. Jewellery
B. Cutlery
C. Sculptures
D. Stones
Q21. Why did the author leave Mrs. Dorling in a hurry?
A. Because she was getting late for the train
B. Because she no longer wanted to stay there
C. Both (A) and (B)
Q22. Why did the objects lose their value for the author?
A. Because their prices fell down
B. Because they were difficult to take along
C. Because she had new objects
D. Because she saw them in different surroundings
Q23. At the end, what does the author decide?
A. To forget the address
B. To visit next year again
C. To remember the address forever
Q24. Who is the protagonist of “The Address”?
A. Mrs. Dorling
B. Mrs. S’s daughter
C. Mrs. S
D. Mrs. Dorling’s daughter
Q25. The author had come to visit Mrs. Dorling _______ the war.
A. during
B. before
C. after
Q26. What was the very first out of her mother’s possessions that the protagonist
could recognize?
A. Hanukkah candle-holder
B. Woollen table-cloth
C. White tea pot
D. Green knitted cardigan
Q27. In total, how many times did the author visit the given address?
A. Twice
B. Once
C. Thrice
D. Never
Q28. Who is the author of “The Address”?
A. Manon Uphoff
B. Marga Minco
C. Marente de Moor
Q29. After reading “The Address”, how would you describe Mrs. Dorling?
A. Materialistic
B. Selfish
C. Opportunist
D. All of the above
Q30. What message does “The Address” talk about?
A. Importance of things
B. Not to trust someone C.
Human predicament of war
1.6. Key
Q. Q. Q. Q.
No. No. No. No.
1 B 9 A 17 A 25 C
2 C 10 C 18 C 26 D
3 A 11 A 19 A 27 A
4 C 12 B 20 B 28 B
5 D 13 C 21 C 29 D
6 B 14 D 22 D 30 C
7 C 15 A 23 A
8 B 16 D 24 B
3. Mother’s Day
1.1. Introduction:
‘Mother’s Day’, a once act play, is written by ‘J B Priestly’.
1. Mrs. Annie Pierson 2. Mr. George Pierson 3. Mrs. Fitzerald

4. Mr. Cyril 5. Ms. Dorris
1.3. Summary:
Mother’s Day Summary – Mother’s day is a play by J. B. Priestley. It is a satirical

and humorous depiction of the status of the women, in particular, a housewife in a
family. Moreover, a housewife dedicates all her time in the service of her family but her
family takes her service for granted and never take notice of her needs. The family
never acknowledge her services or thank her for all that she does for them. Everyone
neglects her and this issue is prominent and relevant today. Many houses out there
sulk and suffer in silence. Also, the issue the play raises is genuine the issue can’t be
set by mere changes of the personality of husbands, sons, and daughters. In order to
give wives the praise, they deserve the family needs to give them the desired attention.
The chapter portrays the practical experience of a mother, Mrs Pearson. On a daily
basis, her kids disrespect and disregard her. In her own home, she was treated as a
slave. Thus, she fell a lot of ignorance and embarrassment every day not only from her
Daughter Doris and son Cyril but also from her husband George Pearson who has
completely turned a blind eye from his wife.
Mrs Pearson life turns when she meets Mrs Fitzgerald, a fortune teller, and
discusses her family members and their terrible behaviour. She tells Mrs Fitzgerald
everything about her family behaviour. Moreover, Mrs Fitzgerald (strong and sinister
personality) recommends her to exchange personalities. So as to teach her family a
good lesson. At first, Mrs Pearson didn’t agree but after some encouragement, she
agrees to switch bodies.
After that, Mrs Fitzgerald casts a spell and swaps her personality with Mrs Pearson.
In a matter of seconds, their personality switch and Mrs Pearson who was calm and
composed is now smoking and drinking. And Mrs Fitzgerald is now sitting idle.
The scene changes, and now Mrs Pearson is in her home and Doris enters home.
She hands her a dress and asks her to iron as she has to go on a date with her
boyfriend Charlie Spence. Also, she even objects her mother’s smoking. And when she
asks her, Mrs Pearson replies very harshly and advise her to do her work herself.
Further, she makes fun of her boyfriend. Afterwards, Doris feels miserable and shamed
and starts crying when her mother insults and rebuke her.
After this, her son Cyril enters, asks his mother hurriedly if his tea is ready. On
which Mrs Pearson refuses and advises him to prepare it himself. After seeing her
mother reaction and her sister crying he raises his voice. Also, calls Mrs Fitzgerald an
old hag on which Mrs Pearson instructs him to mind his language.
When the kids talk about being worn-out after work. She makes it very clear to both
of them that they all will work equally from that day onwards. And she will not work at
weekends and enjoy with her friends.
At that point, Mr Pearson enters the house and expresses his surprise on seeing
her wife drinking and smoking. He objects Mrs Pearson makes him realise that if he
can drink then she can too. Further, he tells him that instead of spending his time with
her wife he is spending time with people who are making fun of him behind his back.
Mrs Pearson on seeing her family insult asks Mrs Fitzgerald to stop all this.
However, she doesn’t let her speak until she teaches all of them a good lesson of
respecting and honouring their mother. Soon after they switch personality again. And
after that, the son, daughter, and husband learn their lesson and start supporting their
mother and wife.
1.4. Comments:
This plays humorously portrays, the position and condition of a mother in her family.
Q1. Who is the writer of the play “Mother’s Day”?
1. A.J. Cornin
2. William Wordworth
3. Patrick Pringle
4. J.B. Priestley
Q2. What does the play “Mother’s Day” talk about?
1. Status of the mother in the family

2. Status of the father in the family
3. Status of the children in the family
4. Status of the family in the society
Q3. How does the author describe Mrs. Fitzgerald?
1. Worried looking
2. Sinister looking
3. Has a deep voice
4. Both (B) and (C)
Q4. Mrs. Fitzgerald is a __________ of Mrs. Pearson.
1. relative
2. neighbour
3. maid
4. None of the above
Q5. “It’s wonderful having a real ____________ living next door.” Complete the
dialogue.
1. doctor
2. writer
3. fortune-teller
4. chef
Q6. Where did Mrs. Fitzgerald learn to tell the future?
1. The West
2. The East
3. The Middle-East
4. Not mentioned in the play
Q7. How does Mrs. Pearson describe her family members?
1. Thoughtless and selfish

2. Pleasant and helpful
3. Hardworking
4. Mindful
Q8. In what endeavour does Mrs. Fitzgerald help Mrs. Pearson?
1. To see future
2. To make her family treat her well
3. To run errands
Q9. How would you describe Mrs. Pearson?
1. Dominating
2. Considerate
3. Compliant
4. Both (B) and (C)
Q10. How does Mrs. Fitzgerald plan to help Mrs. Pearson?
1. By talking to Mrs. Pearson’s family

2. By listening to Mrs. Pearson rants
3. By swapping personalities with Mrs. Pearson
4. Both (A) and (B)
Q11. Mrs. Pearson was ___________ about Mrs. Fitzgerald’s plan.
1. excited
2. hesitant
3. sure
4. envious
Q12. What is the first thing that Dorris does as soon as she enters the house?
1. Asks her mother to give her tea

2. Asks her mother to cook something for her
3. Asks her mother about her day
4. Asks her mother to iron her yellow silk
Q13. What makes Dorris astounded as soon as she enters the house?
1. The sight of her mother smoking

2. Because the tea was not ready
3. Because her mother was not there
Q14. Where was Dorris headed for the night?
1. She had to work overtime

2. She was going out with Charlie Spence
3. She was going for her friend’s birthday
4. She had some appointment
Q15. “Buck teeth and half-witted…” Who has been described here?
1. Cyril Pearson
2. George Pearson
3. Charlie Spence
4. Mrs. Fitzgerald
Q16. What are the ‘changes’ that Mrs. Pearson referred to Cyril?
1. Change in the way she is treated by the family

2. Changes in her daily routine
3. Changes related to her work
Q17. Why was Dorris red-eyed?
1. Because of an infection
2. Because of a fight
3. Because of crying
4. Because she was getting ready to head out
Q18. “Well, she’s suddenly all different.” Who said this and for whom?
1. Cyril for Dorris

2. Dorris for her mother
3. Cyril for her mother
4. George for Dorris
Q19. How does the author describe George Pearson?
1. Pompous
2. Solemn
3. Fifty-ish
4. All of the above
Q20. What was George’s reaction when he saw his wife drinking stout during
daytime?
1. He did not like it

2. He did not mind
3. He accompanied her
4. He ignored her
Q21. Mrs. Pearson tells George that he is being ___________ at the club.
1. respected
2. laughed upon
3. called names
4. Both (B) and (C)
Q22. According to Mrs. Pearson, where Cyril had been wasting his time and money?
1. Races
2. Ice shows
3. Both (A) and (B)
4. Clubbing
Q23. “It’s that silly old bag from next door- Mrs. Fitzgerald.” Who said this?
1. Dorris
2. Cyril
3. George
4. Mrs. Pearson
Q24. What does George mean when he says ‘we’re at sixes and sevens here’?
1. In a state of confusion and disorder

2. In a middle of a conflict
3. In a middle of taking a decision
4. In a state of agony
Q25. When do Mrs. Pearson and Mrs. Fitzgerald get back to their original selves?
1. When Mrs. Pearson’s family gets to know about them

2. When they both get bored
3. When the situation goes out of hand
Q26. Mrs. Pearson’s family had been _________ towards Mrs. Pearson.
1. respectful
2. polite
3. biased
4. unappreciative
Q27. Mrs. Fitzgerald asks Mrs. Pearson to be ___________ with her family.
1. rude
2. polite
3. ignorant
4. firm
Q28. What does Mrs.Pearson suggest them to do for that night?
1. Family game of rummy

2. Getting the supper ready
3. Both (A) and (B)
Q29. The attitude of Mrs. Pearson’s family changes towards her. Comment.
1. No
2. Yes
3. Maybe
4. Not clear from the story
Q30. What message does the author of “Mother’s Day” try to convey?
1. To appreciate wives/ mothers for their work

2. To work hard for your mother
3. To spend time with family
4. To respect everyone
1.6. Key
Q. Q. Q. Q.
No. No. No. No.
1 D 9 D 17 C 25 C
2 A 10 C 18 B 26 D
3 D 11 B 19 D 27 D
4 B 12 D 20 A 28 C
5 C 13 A 21 D 29 B
6 B 14 B 22 C 30 A
7 A 15 C 23 B
8 B 16 A 24 A
4. Birth
1.1. Introduction:
‘Birth’ is written by, ‘A J Cronin”
1. Andrew Manson 2. Mr. Joe Morgan 3. Mrs. Joe Morgan 4. Midwife
1.3. Summary:
Birth Summary – Starts with Andrew Manson, recently out of medical school who
had an argument with her girlfriend. Also, his mood was very low while returning home.
At home, he saw Joe Morgan who was persistently waiting for him. As her wife was
expecting the birth of his first child after twenty years of marriage. Hence, a doctor was
therefore necessary for the delivery. On reaching Joe’s house he discovers her wife in
labour pain. And all the member were eagerly waiting for the birth. However, Mrs
Morgan was under anaesthesia, and at the break of dawn, a lifeless child was born.
The child was pale and look like had witnessed suffocation. Therefore, Manson
instantly recalls a similar case in medical school. So he started working on the child as
family happiness depends on it. After half an hour of hard work, he manages to save
the child.
The story is an extract from The Citadel. Moreover, it narrates how a medical
fresher handles a case of child delivery. Also, in a secretive way, he gets back living in
an apparently dead child. He applies all his medical knowledge and instincts for doing
so. Further, the story states the excitement of the doctor and his team.
At the start, the story describes how Andrew Manson recently out from medical
school, was returning home after a quarrel with her girlfriend, Christine. On reaching
home, he finds Joe Morgan waiting for him to attend to his wife. Despite the night he
agrees to attend her as she was expecting her first child in 20 years.
At Joe’s house, he saw midwife attending the lady who was very serious. Andrew
sees Mrs Morgan and took a pause as he could understand that it would take some
time. While sitting his mind starts to wander in the thoughts of other people. Like
Barnwell who foolishly devoted all his life to a woman who betrayed him. In addition, he
remembers Edward page who married an ill-nature Bowden and was now living
unhappily, separately from his wife. Meanwhile, Andrew had to go back to attend the
patient.
After an hour-long and harsh struggle a child was born towards the dawn but it was
lifeless. On seeing the child Andrew shook with horror. Subsequently, he looks to the
mother who needs immediate attention. So, Andrew has to choose whom to attend: the
mother or the child.
He gave the child to nurse and attend the mother first who was unconscious.
Steadily, her heartbeat strengthens and Andrew could now attend the baby.
Afterwards, Andrew inquired the midwife about the child whom she had put it under the
bed among the soaked newspaper. So, Andrew pulls out the child who was perfectly
formed. He couldn’t recognise that it’s a case of asphyxia due to lack of oxygen and
excess of carbon dioxide in the blood. Moreover, he did not lose heart and starts to
give the necessary treatment to the child. However, the midwife told him again and
again that it is stillborn but he didn’t listen. Also, he continues his treatment.
Near the conclusion, a wonder occurred, he rubbed the child with a towel crushed
and relaxed the little chest with both his hands. He tries to fill breath into the limp body.
After some time, the little chest gave a short difficult motion and the child starts turning
around.
Eventually, Andrew flung a sigh of relief and handed the child to the nurse.
Afterwards, he stated the whole story to Joe who was standing outside and walked
down the street. He has a sense of deep satisfaction that he could achieve something
great.
1.4. Comments:
Anrew realizes how great to give life and live life.
Q1. Who is the author of “Birth”?
1. A.J. Cornin
2. J.B. Priestley
3. Andrew Manson
4. Edward Page
Q2. Andrew did his medical practice under the assistance of _________.
1. Dr. Page
2. Dr. Morgan
3. Dr. William
4. Dr. Shane
Q3. Who was waiting for Andrew at midnight?
1. Dr. Edward
2. Christine
3. Joe Morgan
4. Mrs. Morgan’s mother
Q4. Where did Joe Morgan live?
1. Number 11, Blaina Terrace

2. Number 14, Bryngower
3. Number 12, Blaina Terrace
4. Number 12, Bryngower
Q5. How does the author describe the bedroom of Joe’s house?
1. Well furnished
2. Poorly furnished
3. Dirty
4. Both (B) and (C)
Q6. How has the author described Mrs. Morgan’s mother?
1. Wise
2. Grey-haired
3. In her seventies
4. All of the above
Q7. When Andrew approached, Susan was accompanied by her mother and
_________.
1. Joe
2. father
3. a midwife
4. mother-in-law
Q8. “Don’t fret, mother, I’ll not run away.” Why did Andrew say this?
1. To reassure Mrs. Morgan’s mother

2. To fulfill his obligations
3. To break the silence
4. To handle a critical situation well
Q9. Andrew decided to __________ at Joe’s house.
1. sleep
2. study
3. stay
4. eat
Q10. While waiting at Joe’s house, what did Andrew think about?
1. Mrs. Morgan condition

2. Failed marriages
3. Christine
4. Both (B) and (C)
Q11. How was the newborn child?
1. Healthy
2. Lifeless
3. Underweight
4. Ana emic
Q12. What dilemma did Dr. Andrew confront?
1. Whether the child could be saved or not

2. Whether the treatment would be successful
3. Whether to attend the child or the mother
4. Whether to inform Joe or not
Q13. In the dilemma he faced, what did Andrew do?
1. Check upon Susan first

2. Check upon the child first
3. Ran away
4. Left it to handle to the midwife
Q14. Where had the midwife placed the stillborn child?
1. She held the child in her arms

2. Gave him to Susan’s mother
3. Under the bed
4. Handled him to Joe
Q15. What did Andrew conclude from the whiteness of the child?
1. That he was dead

2. That he suffered from lack of oxygen
3. That he should be taken to hospital
4. That Andrew couldn’t save him
Q16. What did Andrew remember about Samaritan?
1. A place he went to volunteer

2. Someone he met there
3. A treatment he witnessed
4. Not mentioned in the story
Q17. What all things did Andrew use in the treatment?
1. Hot and cold water

2. Basins and towels
3. A blanket
4. All of the above
Q18. How did Andrew try to save the still born?
1. Using a special method of respiration

2. Calling Dr. Edward
3. Taking him to a hospital
4. Giving him blood
Q19. After trying for fifteen minutes, Andrew felt ________.
1. accomplished
2. hopeful
3. hopeless
4. confident
Q20. What did Andrew remember in the middle of ongoing treatment?
1. About his love for Christine

2. Morgan family’s longing for a child
3. His time in Samaritan
4. About his obligation as a doctor
Q21. Why did the child become slippery in Andrew’s hand?
1. Because of atmosphere in the room

2. Because Andrew was losing his focus
3. Because of constant juggling between waters
Q22. How long did it take for Andrew’s efforts to yield results?
1. Fifteen minutes
2. All efforts went into vain
3. One hour
4. Half an hour
Q23. What does the author refer to as ‘a miracle’?
1. Life getting into the stillborn

2. Morgan family welcoming a child
3. Susan getting consciousness
Q24. “But her hands were together, her lips moved without sound.” Who is her?
1. Susan
2. Midwife
3. Mrs. Morgan’s mother
Q25. Why did Andrew get oblivious to all the work he had done in Blaenelly?
1. Because he got all hopeless

2. Because he did something extraordinary that night
3. Because he was leaving Blaenelly
4. Because he got tired
Q26. During the whole incident, Joe did not enter the house. Why?
1. Because he was superstitious

2. Because he didn’t want to disturb
3. Because he didn’t want to see the child
4. Because he was anxious
Q27. After how many years were Joe and Susan blessed with a child?
1. Ten years
2. One year
3. Five years
4. Twenty years
Q28. Why is the lesson is named “Birth”?
1. Because the doctor is specialist in childbirths

2. Because a lot of childbirths take place
3. Because it is about birth of a child
4. Because it talks about philosophy of life
Q29. Birth of Susan’s child was a turning point in Dr. Andrew’s life. Do you agree?
1. Absolutely
2. Not at all
3. Partially
Q30.What can you say about Dr. Andrew after reading “Birth”?
1. He did not put all his efforts

2. He fulfilled his obligations well as a doctor
3. His skills were not enough
4. He was arrogant
1.6. Key
Q. Q. Q. Q.
No. No. No. No.
1 A 9 C 17 D 25 B
2 A 10 D 18 A 26 D
3 C 11 B 19 C 27 D
4 C 12 C 20 B 28 C
5 B 13 A 21 C 29 A
6 D 14 C 22 D 30 B
7 C 15 B 23 A
8 A 16 C 24 C
1.1. Introduction:
‘The Tale of Melon City’, is a peom written by, ‘Vikram Seth’.
1. King 2. Architect
1.3. Summary:
The Tale of Melon City Summary – It is a poem by Vikram Seth in which he mocks
any government system. These tails age-old customs or being proud of beliefs and
traditions too simple. Moreover, through the melon city, the poet represents any nation
whose policies are on the basis of superstitions and old age beliefs. However, the king
in the poem is peace-loving, but soon we find out how hollow/ironic that claim is.
Further, the king wants to establish peace by eliminating anyone who committed a trifle
of mistake. And we can easily get this by his order of execution of innocent people. By
watching how criminals escape the law and also how people benefit from the nation’s
policy.
Vikram Seth through this poem, satire on people in power. He has amusingly
presented the idea that it does not matter to people who king, ruler or head of state is
with the understanding that he let them live in peace, liberty, and leniently.
Long ago, there was a city that people call Melon City. Where a peace-loving and
just king rule. The king announces the construction of an arch across the street for the
enlightenment of people. After the arch was complete the king pass below it and his
crown fell down. Moreover, he became angry and wanted to punish the chief builder for
making the arch so low by hanging them.
So, they set up the gallows and the soldiers bring in the builder for hanging. Builder
fell on his keens and plead for mercy. Further, he said it was workmen’s fault. So, the
kin pardons the builder and order hanging of workmen. The minute workmen to be
hanged, they plead the king and said that it was masons fault because he supplies
wrong size brick.
The mason said it was architects fault. In this way, everyone passes the blame to
someone else. However, the architect said it was the king who made modifications in
the plan.
As whom should be hanged become very tricky and the king was very confused.
Hence, he calls the wisest man of the kingdom. Subsequently, a man who was on his
death bed was taken to the king. The wise man advice the king to hang the arch as it
was the criminal. Consequently, a huge gallows were set up to hang the arch. But, the
councillor said that we cannot hang the arch as it has become pure by touching the
kings head.
By this moment the crowd became restless and impatient for a hanging. By fear of
rebellion, the king ordered the instant hanging of anyone to soothe the crowd. Hence,
everyone who was present tries to fit the high set noose But only the king fitted it
perfectly. And as per his order executioner hanged him.
In addition, the city had a bizarre custom of electing a new king. The custom was
that anyone who passes through the streets the next day will choose the king. Hence,
the next morning, when the guard asks a passer-by who must be the king, he replied,
“Melon.” Because the pedestrian was an idiot whose answers all the questions with just
one word “Melon.”
Therefore, they crown the melon as their king. And from that day onwards, they
pronounce the city as “Melon City.” And the locals tell this story to anyone who asks
them the reason behind the name of the city.
1.4. Comments:
It shows how foolis the king and the citizen of the Melon City.
Q1. Who is the writer of “The Tale of Melon City”?
1. Amitav Ghosh
2. Agha Shahid Ali
3. Vikram Seth
4. Suketu Mehta
Q2. How does the writer describe the King?

A. Arrogant
B. Just and placid
C. Egocentric
D. Merciful
Q3. What did the King order to be constructed?
A. An arch
B. A tomb
C. Footsteps
D. A building
Q4. What was the purpose of the construction ordered by the King?
A. To continue a legacy
B. To solidify the King’s rule
C. To improve viewers morally
D. To carry out a ritual
Q5. What happened when the King rode down the thoroughfare?
A. The crowd cheered
B. No one was impressed
C. The King’s crown fell
D. Not mentioned
Q6. Why did the King’s crown fall?

A. Because the arch was built too low
B. Because he lost his balance
C. Because the crown was heavy
D. Because he was attacked
Q7. “This is a disgrace.” What was a disgrace?
A. Poorly built arch
B. Unenthusiastic crowd
C. Crown being stroked
Q8. What order did the King give after the incident?
A. He ordered workmen to be hanged
B. He ordered to hang the chief of builders
C. He ordered to summon the architect
D. He ordered to gather all people
Q9. Who did the chief of builders blame?

A. The public
B. The architect
C. The masons
D. The workmen
Q10. What reason did the workmen give to the King?

A. Instructions given were wrong
B. Time provided was less
C. Bricks were of the wrong size
D. Changes were made at the last point
Q11. According to the architect, who made the amendments?

A. The King
B. The chief of the builders
C. He himself
D. The masons
Q12. Listening about his own hanging, who did the King call for?
A. The oldest man in the country
B. The wisest man in the country
C. The wisest minister in his administration
D. All the people
Q13. Who according to the counsel was the culprit that was brought before the
King?
A. The King
B. The crown
C. The arch
D. The chief of the builders
Q14. Why was it shameful to hang the arch’?

A. Because it was innocent
B. Because it was non-living
C. Because it was newly built
D. Because it had touched the King’s head
Q15. After all the considerations and discussions, the crowd was getting __
A. restless
B. amused
C. horrified
D. bored
Q16. What was the public demand that the King sought to fulfill?
A. They wanted no one to be hanged
B. They wanted a hanging
C. They wanted the arch to be demolished
D. The wanted a new king
Q17. How was the public demand fulfilled?

A. By voting
B. By the King’s discretion
B. By measuring height one by one
D. By the councillors’ decision
Q18. Finally, who was tall enough to reach the noose?

A. The chief of the builders
B. The architect
C. Someone from the crowd
D. The King
Q19. Who was to choose the next King?

A. The next to pass the City Gate
B. The Ministers
C. The public
D. The heir of the deceased King would be the king by rule
Q20. Who passed the City Gate?

A. An old wise man
B. An idiot
C. A beggar
D. A child
Q21. Who was chosen as the new King?

A. A minister
B. A horse
C. A melon
D. A sword
Q22. Why did the idiot reply the way he did?

A. Because he liked melons
B. Because he rode horses
C. Because he knew how to use sword
D. Because he grew melons
Q23. What sort of perception does the public hold for their chosen King after so
many years?
A. They don’t like him
B. They are enraged
C. They like him very much
D. They have no problem whatsoever
Q24. What is most important to the public of the state?

A. Their peace and liberty
B. How the state is ruled
C. Their wealth
D. Their involvement in state decisions
Q25. What sort of principles seem to thrive in the state?

A. Democratic
B. Laissez faire
C. Authoritative
D. Communistic
Q26. After reading “The Tale of the Melon City”, what opinion do you form of the
King?
A. He was a just King
B. He was a rule abiding King
C. He was a foolish King
D. He was a wise King
Q27. Do you think that the King took his ‘notion of justice’ too far?
A. No, he did what a just King would do
B. Maybe
C. Yes, he lost his life in the process
D. Can not determine
Q28. What impression do you form of the crowd of the state?
A. They were of no good
B. They were supportive of their King
C. They were indifferent who was throned
D. Both (A) and (C)
Q29. The ministers were foolish to ask an idiot about their next King. Do you
agree?
A. Yes
B. No
C. Partially
D. Not clear from the poem
Q30. What is the genre of “The Tale of the Melon City”?
A. Thriller
B. Humorous
C. Ironical
D. Both (B) and (C)
1.6. Key
Q. Q. Q. Q.
No. No. No. No.
1 C 9 D 17 C 25 B
2 B 10 C 18 D 26 C
3 A 11 A 19 A 27 C
4 C 12 B 20 B 28 D
5 C 13 C 21 C 29 A
6 A 14 D 22 A 30 D
7 C 15 A 23 D
8 B 16 B 24 A
2. Class 12 Lessons
Flamingo
1. Prose
1. The Last Lesson

2. Lost Spring
3. Deep Water
4. The Rattrap
5. Indigo
7. The Interview
8. Going Places
2. Poetry
2. Keeping Quiet
4. A Roadside Stand
3. Supplimentary
1. The Third Level

2. The Tiger King
4. The Enemy
1. Prose
1. The Last Lesson
1.1. Introduction:
‘The Last Lesson’, is written by ‘Alphonse Daudet’.
1. Franz 2. M. Hamel
1.3. Summary:
The last lesson is by the author Alphonse Daudet. In the Last Lesson summary, the
author narrates events about the year 1870 when France was captured by Bismarck
led Prussian forces. Furthermore, the Lorraine and Alsace districts went under
Prussian rule. There was the discontinuation of teaching French in these two districts.
There was an order for the French teachers to leave. Consequently, M. Hamel was not
able to stay in his old school. In spite of this, the last lesson from him was full of
devotion and sincerity. One student of M. Hamel was afraid of him. There was an
anticipation of punishment from this student when he came to school that day.
However, he learnt that this will be his last lesson. Soon, he realized the importance of
this subject. This story shows us how people feel when they don’t learn their language.
The narration of this story is by a French boy, Franz. Franz is a lazy boy. However,
in spite of his laziness, Franz likes to play and is of a sensitive nature. Furthermore,
Franz hates his teacher M. Hamel in his school and has no interest in studying French.
An order has come from Berlin after taking over the districts of Alsace and Lorraine
in France that the German language rather than the French should be taught in the
schools there. Furthermore, it is the school French teacher M. Hamel’s last day. This
teacher has been working there for forty years. Moreover, the teacher has feelings of
patriotism. He is also full of nostalgia and grief. The village men also attend his ‘last
lesson’ so as to honour and respect him. The village is regretting and is sad that they
didn’t learn their mother tongue in their childhood.
Franz receives a big shock when he learns that this is his last lesson in French. He
is shocked because he does not know French. Furthermore, on learning about the last
lesson, a sudden interest arises in him for learning French. Moreover, he pays careful
attention and learns everything taught on this last day.
Instantly, he develops liking for the teacher M. Hamel. His feelings of hatred for him
suddenly came to an end. Moreover, Franz develops respect for the hard work and
sincerity of his teacher. Franz is sad and ashamed for being unable to recite his
lesson.
Hamel explains that they all are at fault for lacking eagerness to learn. Furthermore,
he also includes himself in this fault. He blames himself for lack of sincerity in teaching
them.
There is a reflection of his patriotism in his praise for the French language. He says
that the French language is the most logical and beautiful language in the world. It
seems that M. Hamel got emotional on this occasion. Furthermore, he asks the class to
guard their language. He says that being close to one’s language is a way to escape
the clutches of slavery. This language will assist them in attaining freedom from the
Germans. The people realize the significance of their mother tongue. Moreover, they
feel the reason for their defeat is illiteracy.
Franz feels that it is impossible to remove one’s language from a person. This is
because it is something that is natural to a person. This means that no matter how hard
the opposition may try, they will fail to remove one’s language.
1.4. Comments:
This lesson shows, the importance of Language.
1] What Does ‘The Last Lesson’ Symbolize?

A- Loss
B- Loss of freedom
C- Loss of language
D- Loss of language and freedom
2] Don't Go So Fast, You Will Get To Your School In Plenty Of Time Means
__________
A- getting late
B- very early
C- not early
D- early enough
3] Expression 'Thunderclap" in the lesson means _______
A- loud but not clear
B- loud and clear
C- startling and unexpected
D- unpleasant
4] Who is the writer of the lesson ‘The Last Lesson’?
A- Alphonse Daudet
B- William Douglas
C- Anees Jung
D- Louis Fischer
5] The story ‘The Last Lesson’ highlights which human tendency?
A- Procrastination
B- Fear
C- Anger
D- Sadness
6] From Where Did The Orders Come To Teach Only German In The Districts Of
Alsace And Lorrain?
A- Moscow
B- Paris
C- Berlin
D- London
7] Why Was Franz Reluctant To Go To School ?
A- Lesson on participles was not prepared.
B- School was boring.
C- He didn’t like his teacher.
D- None of the above.
8] What was the image of Mr M hamel among his students initially ?
A- A loving teacher
B- A strict teacher
C- An understanding teacher
D- A kind and humble teacher
9] For how many years did M. Hamel serve the school ?
A- 20 years
B- 35 years
C- 30 years
D- 40 years
10] What attitude of M.Hamel surprised Franz ?
A- soft and kind
B- rude
C- firm and strict
D- none of these
11] What bad news used to come from the Bulletin Board ?
A- lost battles
B- the draft
C- orders of commanding officers
D- All of these
12] What changes did the order from Berlin cause in school that day ?
A- hustle-bustle
B- people were happy
C- teachers were sad
D- strange quietness and sadness
13] What did Franz notice that was unusual that day ?
A- quietness in the school
B- soldiers in the school
C- crowd in school
D- all of these
14] What do the marching soldiers under the windows represent?
A- The Dawn of Prussia in the defeat of French people
B- The defeat of Prussia
C- The victory of French
D- None of these
15] What does the expression "in great dread of scolding" mean ?
A- to be happy about it
B- very badly scared of scolding
C- To be indifferent
D- None of these
16] What had been put up on the Bulletin Board that day?
A- Teach only French
B- Speak only English
C- Teach only German
D- Teach all these
17] What made Franz and the people realize about the preciousness of
their mother tongue?
A- Hamel's words
B- School orders
C- Sudden orders from Berlin
D- School Principal
18] What made Franz forget M.Hamel's ruler and crankiness ?
A- Police Patrolling
B- Strange Quietness
C- Bustle on the streets
D- The idea of his going away
19] What was there in front of the Bulletin Board?
A- Children
B- police
C- hawkers
D- a crowd
20] When people are enslaved, what key do they have to the prison,
according to M.Hamel?
A- their behavior
B- power
C- aggressiveness
D- mother tongue
21] Where did the parents send their children?
A- school
B- coaching
C- farms and mills
D- movies
22] Which language would the students study from the next day?
A- English
B- German
C- Dutch
D- Spanish
23] Who was M.Hamel?
A- a spy
B- language teacher
C- soldier
D- School Principal
24] Whom did M.Hamel blame for not sending students to school?
A- Parents
B- friends
C- teachers
D- watchman
25] Why was Franz feeling regretful and sad?
A- for reaching late
B- for not learning participles
C- for change of the Government
D- for not learning his mother tongue
26] Why was Franz shocked to see M. Hamel?
A- Because of his formal dress
B- because he gave sweets
C- because he had a flower in his hand
D- all of these
27] Why were the parents sending their children to the farms and mills?
A- to play
B- to meet friends
C- to meet relatives
D- to earn money
28] ‘Viva la France’ became emotional evidence of M. Hamel’s?
A- sadness and patriotism.
B- finality and depression.
C- nostalgia and emotional outburst.
D- love for the school and teaching as a profession
29] “The Last Lesson” story was written in which year ?
A- 1869 – 1870
B- 1870 – 1871
C- 1872- 1873
D- 1870 – 1872
30] Alphonse Daudet was from which country ?
A- India
B- France
C- England
D- Canada
31] What distracted Franz in the chapter ‘The Last Lesson'?
A- Chirping birds
B- Warm and bright day
C- Prussian soldiers drilling
D- All of the above
32] For the last two years, where did all the bad news come from ?
A- the Bulletin Board
B- Town Hall
C- school
D- M. Hamel’s House
33] Franz thinks- will they make them sing in German- even the pigeons?
What could this mean ?
A- German would use brutal force over everyone
B- harsh orders will be passed
C- when people are deprived of their essence even the surroundings are
affected
D- the Germans will rob France of its language.
34] M. Hamel emerges as a ________ when he teaches his last
lesson.
A- meek person
B- true patriot
C- repentant man
D- defeated the man
35] M. Hamel is introduced as a ruler-wielding teacher. This demonstrates that:
A- he is concerned
B- he is adamant.
C- he is unfeeling
D- he is a hard taskmaster.
36] What did Franz find on reaching the school?
A- People were dancing
B- school was closed
C- Police patrolling
D- strange quietness
37] What does M. Hamel’s motionless posture reflect?
A- the school is dismissed
B- changing order of life
C- sense of finality
D- feeling of nostalgia
38] I never saw him look so tall” Who is the person mentioned here?
A- Franz
B- M.Hamel
C- Villagers
D- Students
39] What is the moral that the Alphonse Daudet wants to bring out?
A- not to put off things that one can do that day
B- old order changed to new
C- one should accept everything that happens
D- teachers should be respected
40] What order had come from Berlin?
A- The new teacher
B- teach German in schools of Alsace and Lorraine
C- to open a new school in Alsace and Lorraine
D- that Hamel would have to leave
41] What was Franz banking on to enter the class as he was late?
A- M.Hamel’s teaching on the blackboard
B- commotion in the class
C- Hauser helping him sneak in
D- to quietly walk in when everyone was preoccupied with participles
42] What was Franz expected to be prepared for at school that day?
A- song
B- dance
C- essay writing
D- Participles
43] What was unusual about M. Hamel’s dress?
A. wore clean clothes
B. wore a brand new outfit
C. wore clothes he wore on prize days
D. wore traditional French clothes
44] What were the things being taken for granted by the people of Alsace?
A. Teachers of the school
B. Time and school
C. People around
D. Money and power
45] Which district came under the Prussian rule?
A. Alsace and Berlin
B. Berlin and Lorraine
C. Alsace and Lorraine
D. the southern districts of France
46] Who asked Franz not to hurry to school?
A. Old Hauser
B. former Mayor
C. former Postmaster
D. blacksmith Watcher
47] Who occupied the back benches in the class?
A. weak students
B. teachers
C. monitors of the class
D. village elders
48] Who sat on the back bench on the last lesson?
A. Franz
B. Prussians
C. the village people
D. The new teacher
49] Why did Hamel blame himself?
A. not having taught them enough French
B. not being strict
C. giving students a holiday at times
D. None of above
50] Why did Mr. M. Hamel call French language the most beautiful?
A. Because it was the clearest and logical
B. Because it was his native language
C. Because people were from France
D. None of these
51] Why did the villagers come to meet M. Hamel in the school?
A. to complain
B. to say goodbye
C. to gossip
D. to show gratitude
52] Why does the author urge the reader to respect his language?
A. It is what makes you respect your countrymen.
B. It is the key to freedom.
C. You can express yourself.
D. It is unique and reflects literature and art.
53] Who was Franz’s teacher?
A- Joe
B- M. Hamel
C- Vincet Daudet
D- Anees
54] Why could M. Hamel not speak at the end of the lesson?
A- He was sad and choked
B- He had cold and cough
C- He did not wish to talk
D- He was exhausted
55] “What a thunderclap these words to me!” Which poetic device is used in the
above given line?
A- alliteration
B- Simile
C- Metaphor
D- hyperbole
1.6. Key
Q. Q. Q. Q.
No. No. No. No.
1 D 15 B 29 B 43 C
2 D 16 C 30 B 44 B
3 C 17 A 31 D 45 C
4 A 18 D 32 A 46 D
5 A 19 D 33 C 47 D
6 C 20 D 34 B 48 C
7 A 21 C 35 D 49 C
8 B 22 B 36 D 50 A
9 D 23 B 37 A 51 D
10 A 24 A 38 B 52 B
11 D 25 D 39 A 53 B
12 D 26 A 40 B 54 A
13 A 27 D 41 B 55 C
14 A 28 A 42 D
2. Lost Spring
1.1. Introduction:
‘Lost Spring’ is written by, ‘Anees Jung’.
Sometimes I find a rupee in the garbage
1. Shaeb E Alam 2. Anees Jung
I want to drive a car
1. Mukesh 2. Savitha
1.3. Summary:
The Lost Spring summary describes the terrible condition of poor children. These
children are those who didn’t get to enjoy childhood because of the prevailing socio-
economic condition in this world. This is something that one can see all over the world.
These children don’t have the opportunity for schooling. Moreover, there is a lot of
pressure on these children to enter into labour early in life. These unfortunate children
are forced into labour. This certainly denies them education as well as the opportunity
to have enjoyment. The author Anees Jung raises voice to eliminate child labour. Jung
does so by raising awareness regarding child education and strict law enforcement
against child labour. The call is to put an end to the exploitation of children. This way
the children will be able to enjoy the days of the spring and have fun.
The first part tells the author’s impressions regarding the life of poor rag pickers.
The rag pickers have come from Dhaka. Furthermore, the settlement of the rag pickers
is in the area of Seemapuri. Destruction has come in their fields and homes due to the
storms. They had come to the big city in the hope of finding living there. However, the
reality was, in fact, painful for them and they had to face many hardships. They are
certainly poor and lack various resources.
The writer watches Saheb every morning as he scrounges for “gold” in the
neighbourhood. The means of survival for these rag pickers is the garbage.
Furthermore, for the children, it is a wondrous thing. The children are able to find a coin
or two from it. These people have ambitions and desires. The problem is that they do
not know the way to make them possible. There are quite a few things that they are
unable to reach. Later Saheb joins a tea stall where there is a possibility for him to earn
800 Rupees and all the meals. However, this job has deprived him of his freedom. As
such their condition is pretty hopeless and full of misery.
The second part explores the life of Mukesh. Mukesh is a boy who belongs to the
family of Bangle-makers. Firozabad is famous for its amazing glass-blowing industry.
There is an engagement of nearly 20,000 children in this particular business.
Furthermore, no one over there understands or respects the law that forbids child
labour. Moreover, the living condition, as well as the working environment, are both
horrendous.
These children live in dreary cells. Also, they work close to hot furnaces. This is
certainly very dangerous as it makes these children blind when they enter adulthood.
Furthermore, these children have to deal with the pressure of debt. Moreover, they are
unable to think of a solution to solve this problem. There is no way for these children to
come out of this trap.
The policemen, bureaucrats, middlemen, and politicians will all hinder their way of
progress. The women in the household consider it to be their destiny or fate. As a
result of such thinking, they just follow the established tradition. There is something
different about Mukesh. He is not like the rest of the folk there. This is because Mukesh
has big dreams. He has a desire to become a motor mechanic in future. The garage is
far away from where he lives but he has the determination to walk.
1.4. Comments:
The lesson depicts the pathetic storis of Shabe and Mukesh.
1] Who Is The Writer Of Lost Spring?
A- Janees Jung
B- Anees Jung
C- Alphonse daudet
D- None
2] Who was Saheb?
A- a shopkeeper
B- a student
C- a soldier
D- a rag picker
3] From where did Saheb come?
A- Dhaka
B- Delhi
C- Dwarka
D- Mumbai
4] Why did Saheb and his family come to India leaving Bangladesh?
A- they liked India

B- they were expelled from there
C- because of communal violence there
D- because storms destroyed their homes and fields
5] What did Saheb look for in the garbage?
A- gold
B- copper
C- silver
D- platinum
6] What advice was given to Saheb by the writer?
A- go to tea stall
B- go to his home
C- go to some other street
D- go to school
7] What does ‘scrounging ‘mean?
A- looking for
B- searching for
C- rubbish
D- both a & b
8] What is Saheb’s full name?
A- Saheb-e-Alam
B- Alam-e-Saheb
C- Laheb-e-Salam
D- Maheb-e-Lalam
9] What is the meaning of Saheb-e–Alam?
A- Great Rag Pickers

B- Chief Of Pick-pockets
C- Lord Of Universe
D- None
10] Saheb’s full name is-------?
A- humorous
B- ironical
C- satirical
D- ridiculous
11] Saheb’s full name means “lord of the universe” but he leads a life of ______. ?
A- wealth and power

B- opulence
C- prosperity
D- poverty and misery
12] Who appeard like ‘morning birds ‘ ?
A- writer and her friends

B- Saheb’s parents
C- Saheb and his friends
D- group of ladies
13] Who are called “ army of barefoot boys “ ?
A- Saheb and his friends

B- writer and her friends
C- Saheb’s parents
D- group of ladies
14] Where does Saheb live?
A- Seemapuri
B- Manipur
C- Dhaka
D- Patna
15] Where is Seemapuri situated?
A- in the center of Delhi

B- on the periphery of Delhi
C- outside Delhi
D- in Dhaka
16] Who lived in Seemapuri?
A- farmers
B- traders
C- politician
D- ragpickers
17] What change has come in Seemapuri over the years?
A- it is no longer a wilderness
B- structures of mud , with roofs of tin and tarpaulin have appeared here
C- about 10,000 ragpickers live here
D- all of the above
18] The houses in Seemapuri are made of.............?
A- bricks and concrete

B- asbestos sheets
C- mud, tin and tarpaulin
D- plywood
19] For the people of Saheb’s colony, what is more important than identity?
A- gold
B- coats
C- silver
D- food
20] Squatters who came from Bangladesh in _______?
A- 1970
B- 1971
C- 1972
D- 1973
21] Seemapuri is the home of ___________.
A- 10,000 rag pickers

B- 20,000 rag pickers
C- 5,000 rag pickers
D- 15,000 rag pickers
22] Survival in Seemapuri means ______.
A- working in a tea-stall
B- begging
C- working in glass factory
D- rag-picking
23] Who sometimes, finds a rupee, even a ten rupee note ?
A- the writer
B- the story teller
C- Saheb
D- the narrator
24] What does heap of garbage stand for the children's parents?
A- a source of water
B- a means of survival
C- source of unending joy
D- all of the above
25] The word ‘garbage’ means --------.
A- rubbish
B- rare material
C- expensive thing
D- useful material
26] What does ‘a heap of garbage’ stand for the children?
A- wrapped in wonder
B- a means of survival
C- a source of water
D- all of the above
27] What is Saheb watching from the fenced gate of a club?
A- two young men playing tennis

B- two women dancing
C- two dogs quarrelling
D- a gardener planting flowers
28] Later, Saheb is found wearing shoes. Who gave him the shoes?
A- the writer
B- a doctor
C- a policeman
D- a rich boy
29] Why did the rich boy give the tennis shoes to Saheb?
A- he liked Saheb
B- he hated his shoes
C- there was a hole in one of them
D- Saheb bought them from him
30] Which game is out of Saheb's reach?
A- football
B- tennis
C- cricket
D- hide and seek
31] Why does Saheb remain barefoot?
A- his feet are beautiful

B- he hates shoes
C- he is so poor that he cannot buy shoes and chappals
D- his employer forbids him to wear shoes
32] Where does Saheb work after leaving the work of being a ragpicker?
A- a factory
B- on a farm
C- in a tea-stall
D- in a school
33] Who was no longer his own master?
A- the writer
B- Saheb
C- tea shop owner
D- Saheb’s friend
34] _________ seems heavier than the plastic bag.
A- the glass
B- tumbler
C- steel canister
D- kettle
35] What was the salary of Saheb in the tea shop?
A- 700 rupees
B- 800 rupees
C- 500 rupees
D- 900 rupees
36] What is Firozabad famous for?
A- bangles
B- clothes
C- sandles
D- electronics
37] Which is the centre of India’s glass-blowing industry?
A- Ferozepur
B- Aurangabad
C- Faridabad
D- Firozabad
38] Find the word which means ‘false appearance’.
A- looms
B- furnace
C- mirage
D- welding
39] Find the word which means ‘hearth’.

A- amidst
B- furnace
C- mirage
D- insists
40] What is illegal for children?
A- to be a motor mechanic
B- to have a dream
C- to work in the glass furnaces
D- all of the above
41] Where do most of the children in Firozabad work?
A- in a factory
B- in glass industry
C- at tea stall
D- as rag-pickers
42] What is the condition of the lanes in Mukesh’s colony?
A- stinking
B- chocked with garbage
C- both a & b
D- beautiful and clean
43] How many children work in glass industry?
A- 10,000
B- 20,000
C- 25,000
D- 15,000
44] Find the word which means ‘dark and dirty’.
A- beam
B- hovels
C- dingy
D- slog
45] Find the word which means ‘toil’.
A- furnaces
B- dingy
C- beam
D- slog
46] Where does Mukesh’s family work?

A- in a school
B- in a club
C- on a farm
D- in a bangle factory
47] What does the writer say about the street in which Mukesh’s house situated?
A- a fine street
B- a wide street
C- a street with civic amenities
D- a stinking lane chocked with garbage
48] In what kind of house does Mukesh live?
A- in a big house
B- in a bungalow
C- in a half-built rough hut
D- in a flat
49] What art has the elder taught his two sons?
A- the art of making bangles

B- the art of renovating a house
C- the art of sewing clothes
D- the art of teaching children
50] Find the word which means ‘poor’.
A- custom
B- renovate
C- veil
D- impoverished
51] Who is Savita?
A- a married woman
B- an elderly woman
C- a young girl
D- a lovely bride
52] What sanctity attached to bangles?
A- they are made of pure glass

B- they symbolize an Indian woman’s suhaag
C- they are worn by all girls and all women
D- they are worn on all auspicious occasions
53] What job is Savita doing?

A- she is soldering pieces of glass
B- she is draping a bride with a red veil
C- she is dying the hands of a girl red
D- she is rolling bangles on to the wrist of an old woman
54] What do the bangles symbolize in Indian culture?
A- ‘suhaag’
B- chastity
C- corruption
D- farming
55] Find the word which means ‘dull’.
A- light
B- drab
C- sanctity
D-draped
56- Find the word which means ‘coloured’.
A- dyed
B- drab
C- drained
D- reaped
57- Find the word in the passage which means 'holiness'.
A- tongs
B- veil
C- sanctity
D- dyed
58- What forces conspire to keep the workers in bangle industry of Firozabad?
A- Sahukars, middlemen
B- policemen
C- bureaucrats and politician
D- all of the above
59- Find the word which means ‘blemish/ disgrace’.
A- vicious
B- baggage
C- distinct
D- stigma
60- Find the word which means ‘evil’.
A- vicious
B- imposed
C- cheered
D- caste
61- What does Mukesh want to become?
A- a doctor
B- a motor mechanic
C- a teacher
D- a writer
62- Find the word which means ‘burden’.
A- Vicious
B- Baggage
C- Law
D- distinct
63- What does the writer try to depict in the lesson ‘Lost Spring”?
A- Lost adolescence
B- Lost childhood
C- Lost freedom
D- Lost spring season
64- What is the probable reason for children remaining barefoot?
A- Lack of money
B- A tradition to remain barefoot
C- Physical illness
D- Perpetual state of poverty
65- Mukesh’s dream looms like a ________________ amidst the dust of streets
that fills his town Firozabad.
A- Wonder
B- Mirage
C- Reality
D- None
66- This story is an excerpt from which book of the author?
A) Lost Spring – Stories of Stolen Childhood
B) Spring tales
C) Silent spring
D) None
67- Mukesh wants to learn to become a motor mechanic by
A- finding a tutor
B- going to a garage to learn
C- by reading books
D- None
68- What bothers the author most about the bangle makers?
A- the stigma of poverty and caste
B- the affluence of the landlords
C- the behaviour of the factory owners
D- the labour laws
69- What is the central theme of the story Lost Spring?
A- Pitiable Poor children and their lost childhood
B- garbage
C- Saheb and Mukesh
D- Spring Season
70- Firozabad is the center of which industry?
A- cotton industry
B- furniture industry
C- textile industry
D- glassblowing industry
1.6. Key
Q. Q. Q. Q.
No. No. No. No.
1 B 19 D 37 D 55 B
2 D 20 B 38 C 56 A
3 A 21 A 39 B 57 C
4 D 22 D 40 C 58 D
5 A 23 B 41 B 59 D
6 D 24 C 42 C 60 A
7 D 25 A 43 B 61 B
8 A 26 A 44 C 62 B
9 C 27 A 45 D 63 D
10 B 28 D 46 D 64 B
11 D 29 C 47 D 65 B
12 C 30 B 48 C 66 A
13 A 31 C 49 A 67 B
14 A 32 C 50 D 68 A
15 B 33 B 51 C 69 A
16 D 34 C 52 B 70 D
17 D 35 B 53 A
18 C 36 A 54 A
3. Deep Water
1.1. Introduction:
‘Deep Water’ is written by, ‘William Douglas’
1. William Douglas
1.3. Summary:
Deep Water summary will assist you in understanding the meaning of this chapter.
It is an extract from the book ‘Men and Mountains’ by William Douglas. Over here, the
author tells us about how he overcomes the deep-rooted fear of water. We learn that
the author develops fear of water following two very dreadful incidents. In this first one,
he is four years old when a wave knocks him down. Similarly, in the second one, he is
11 years of age. A bully throws him in the deep end of the pool and almost drowns.
Thus, having gone through such scary experiences, he fears water deeply. However,
he does work really hard to overcome it. Finally, we learn about the measures he takes
to overcome this fear. Moreover, he accomplishes in overcoming the fear and gives us
all a great lesson of determination and will power.
Deep Water is about the writer’s journey of overcoming the fear of water, which is
deeply rooted in him since childhood. The author started fearing water since the age of
four. It starts when he was visiting California with his father. He visits a beach where a
wave knocks him down and sweeps over him. This terrifies the author, although the
father laughs at this knowing it was no danger. However, this experience terrifies him
and develops a fear of water. After that, when the author is 11 years old, he
experiences another incident which escalates his fear.
He is at a swimming pool in Yakima, trying to learn swimming. On one fine day, a
bully decides to pull a dangerous prank. He pushes him in the deep end of the pool
which frightens the author. He reaches nine feet into the water and starts struggling
desperately to hold on to something.
Moreover, he yells for help but he starts feeling paralyzed and only his heart was
moving now. Thus, he gives up and readies himself to die but wakes up at the side of
the pool. However, the terror he experiences while drowning never goes away. It
continues to haunt him for many years and even spoiled his future expeditions
concerning canoeing, swimming, fishing and more.
He even visits Marine Lakes, Columbia, New Hampshire and more but is not able to
enjoy it. Thus, he decides to overcome this fear by hook or by crook. He enrols himself
in a swimming class and tries to learn from the instructor. The instructor teaches him
many tips and tricks for swimming. He begins with the inhaling and exhaling part then
he practices it for many weeks.
Further, he moves on to the kicking the legs on the side of the pool. Finally, he
combines all this with the final move of swimming. Although the author knows how to
swim, he is still terrified of water. Thus, in order to get rid of the fear, he decides to
confront it. He mocks it by thinking what can it really do? Consequently, he plunges in
to the water and to his surprise, his fear goes away. He faced it in many places and at
last, manages to conquer it.
1.4. Comments:
This story show, how William Douglas overcame the fear of water.
1] Who is the writer of deep water?
A- William Douglas
B- Alphonse Daudet
C- Anees Jung
D- Selma Lagerlof
2] This chapter is------
A- a narrative
B- a biography
C- a travelogue
D- an autobiography
3] Name The Pool William Douglas Mentioned In The Chapter.
A- Tieton pool
B- Yakima pool
C- Y.M.C.A. Pool
D- Teanaway pool
4] What revived unpleasant memories to the author?
A- his introduction to the YMCA swimming pool

B- his introduction to the YMCA college
C- both a & b
D- his introduction to Yakima river
5] What did the author try to learn by aping other boys?
A- writing neatly
B- Dancing
C- Swimming
D- riding a bicycle
6] How did the author prepare himself for swimming?

A- with new water wings
B- trying to learn by aping other boys
C- watching other boys
D- all of the above
7] What did the author start feeling after two or three times in the pool?
A- feel at ease
B- feel fear
C- feel confident
D- nothing
8] Pick out the word which means the same as: ‘misadventure’.
A- event
B- Accident
C- Episode
D- occurrence
9] Who came to William Douglas at the Y.M. C.A. swimming pool?
A- the instructor
B- a big bruiser of a boy
C- the owner of Y.M.C.A. pool
D- no one
10] He was a beautiful ___________ specimen
A- Physical
B- Mental
C- Spiritual
D- both a & b
11] What was true about the other boy?
A- he had thick hair on his chest

B- he was eighteen years old
C- he was muscular
D- all of the above
12] He tossed Douglas into the pool towards its-------.
A- shallow end
B- Middle
C- Edge
D- deep end
13] Though Douglas was frightened, he was not-----

A- afraid to die
B- going to strive
C- out of his wits
D- able to shout to help
14] When his feet would hit the bottom Douglas planned to-------
A- make a big jump

B- lie down
C- start his stroke
D- float
15] Find out the word which means the same as: ‘pushed under water’.
A- Bruiser
B- rippling
C- ducked
D- wits
16] Pick out the word which means the same as: ‘waved his hands’
A- Paralyzed
B- Flailed
C- Throbbed
D- strategy
17] What did Douglas try to do?
A- to pull his legs up

B- to pull his arms up
C- to raise his head
D- nothing
18] Who heard Douglas’ screams?
A- Swimmers
B- People
C- Water
D- his mother
19] What happened with his legs?
A- they hung as dead weights

B- they got paralyzed
C- they became rigid
D- all of the above
20] What is the meaning of ’thrash’?

A- hit with stick
B- hit with force
C- hit with hands
D- hit with legs
21] What had Roosevelt said?
A- “All we have to fear is fear itself.”

B- “All we have to fear is fear of death.”
C- “All we have to fear is fear of accident.”
D- “All we have to fear is fear of murder.”
22] Who was Roosevelt?
A- William Douglas’ friend

B- Ex. President of America
C- an instructor
D- both a & b
23] The Yakima river was ______
A- Killer
B- haunted
C- Treacherous
D- bouncing
24] Y.M.C.A. stands for------
A- young men’s Christians authority

B- young men’s Christopher association
C- young men’s Christian army
D- young men’s Christian association
25] Where is Yakima river situated?
A- In Washington, The US city

B- In California, The US city
C- In New Zealand , The US city
D- In Chicago, The US city
26] The author had an aversion to ____
A- Water
B- Height
C- depth
D- loneliness
27] How old was the big bruiser?

A- twelve years
B- fifteen years
C- sixteen years
D- eighteen years
28] “Hi skinny! How’d you like to be ducked”? Who said these words?
A- the narrator
B- people at Y.M.C.A.
C- the big bruiser
D- narrator’s father
29] What was the depth of the pool at the end?
A- nine feet
B- seven feet
C- ten feet
D- eight feet
30] What is the story ‘Deep Water speaking about?
A- fear of people
B- fear of swimming
D- fear of water and the way to overcome it
D- fear of height
31] Where did the writer go when he was 3 or 4 years old in the story?
A- Washington
B- Canada
C- New Zealand
D- California
32] What is haunting the author?
A- terrible experience in the pool

B- Ghosts
C- his mother’s words
D- a push by a young boy
33] What were the author’s feelings while drowning in the pool?
A- terror in fear of death

B- terror in swimming
C- terror of being pushed
D- none
34] What strategy did the author remember while he was drowning in the pool ?
A- to try to jump and push himself up
B- to shout for help
C- to hold ropes
D- to call the instructor
35] How many times did Douglas try to come to the surface of the pool?
A- Twice
B- Once
C- Thrice
D- four times
36] What lesson did Douglas learn from his experience of drowning?
A- learnt swimming
B- love of swimming
C- swimming is not difficult
D- face the fear
37] What was the colour of the pool water when Douglas was in it?
A- dirty yellow
B- clear blue
C- dirty off white
D- dirty blue
38] Why did Douglas hate to walk with bare legs?
A- because of ugly looking legs

B- because of fat legs
C- because of skin colour
D- because of skinny legs
39] ‘I flailed at the surface of water ‘. What is the meaning of ‘flailed’ in the
sentence ?
A- to strike with
B- to keep
C- to come
D- to swim
40] What does ‘Deep Water’ signify?
A- depth of sea
B- Beauty
C- depth of ocean
D- frantic
41] What were the series of emotions and fears that Douglas experienced when
he was drowning in the pool?
A- Confidence
B- Overconfidence
C- Fear
D- mixed feelings of confidence and fear
42] Suddenly Douglas saw light in the water. What did that mean?
A- some people came with a torch

B- there was a bulb in the water
C- he was coming out of the water
D- he saw light was coming from heaven
43] Why did Douglas cease all efforts?
A- he felt as if he was going to become unconscious

B- he did not want to live
C- he wanted to be in the water
D- he was already out of danger
44] What did the boy say to the author?
A- “I did the wrong thing”

B- “I did the right thing”
C- ”I’ll throw you again”
D- “But I was only fooling.”
45] What are ‘salmon’, ‘trout’, ‘bass’ ?
A- kinds of boat
B- kinds of fish
C- kinds of swimming techniques
D- all of the above
46] How did the author feel when he walked back to his home after coming into his
senses?
A- his legs were trembling

B- he was sad
C- he was weeping
D- he had temperature
47] Where did the author go in order to overcome his fear of water?
A- to a sea beach
B- into a well
C- in the same pool where the accident took place
D- lake Wentworth in New Hampshire
48] How did instructor make Douglas a good swimmer?
1. by giving Instructions
2. by pushing him into the pool
3. by making him watch others
4. by using belts and ropes
49] What was stopping Douglas to get into the water of cascades?
A- memories of California
B- memories of Washington
C- instructions given by his mother
D- memories full of terror in pool
50] What distance Douglas covered while swimming across the lake Wentworth?
A- four miles
B- three miles
C- two miles
D- one mile
51] How could Douglas know that he was still alive?
A- his heart beating and head pounding told him

B- his legs were very active which told him
C- he could plan to jump with foot
D- none of the above
52] What did Douglas’ mother remind him?
A- about the deep YMCA pool

B- about the treacherous Yakima river
C- about the drawings in Y.M.C.A. pool
D- all of the above
53] How old was Douglas when the misadventure took place?
A- Nine to ten years old

B- Ten to eleven years
C- Eleven to twelve years
D- welve to thirteen years
54] Name the treacherous river mentioned in the chapter ‘Deep Water’
A- Bumping river
B- Thames river
C- Yakima river
D- Teton river
55] Which word does the eighteen year old boy use while bullying the author at the
pool side?
A- Douglas
B- Bruiser
C- Lanky
D- Skinny
56] How long did it take for Douglas to perfect the art of swimmimg?
A- October to April
B- October to March
C- October to February
D- October to December
57] What do you infer from the line “The instructor was finished”?
A- He was exhausted
B- He stopped midway
C- He gave up
D- His task was complete
58] How does the author describe going beneath the water the final time?
A- His head throbbed

B- He was paralyzed with fear
C- His legs felt limp and blackness swept over his brain
D- His lungs ached
59] Which proverb most aptly describes the theme of the story ‘Deep water’?
A- Slow and steady wins the race

B- Time and tide wait for none
C- A bad workman blames his tools
D- Where there is a will, there is a way
60] When did Douglas finally conquer his fear?
A- When his instructor gave his approval

B- When he tried swimming alone at different places
C- When he was able to put his face under the water
D- None
61] Which statement aptly conveys the message of the story “Deep Water”?
A- Fears are dangerous

B- Old fears return
C- Most fears are baseless
D- Fear confines and limits one’s scope
62] The water was still and the tiled bottom was as _________ and clean as a
bath tub.
A- White
B- Blue
C- Black
D- None
63] With his hard work, Douglas had
A- conquered his fear of water

B- conquered Mount Everest
C- got a good job
D- None
64] ‘Now you can swim’. These words were spoken by
A- Douglas’ father
B- teacher in school
C- Mother
D- instructor
65] A rope was attached to
A- Douglas’ legs
B- Douglas’ arms
C- Douglas’ belt
D- None
66] Every time Douglas attempted to go inside water, his legs would
A- be shaky
B- make him run
C- help him keep afloat
D- be paralyzed
67] When his feet would hit the bottom Douglas planned to
A- make a big jump

B- lie down
C- start his strokes
D- float
68] He tossed Douglas into the pool towards its
A- shallow end
B- middle
C- edge
D- deep end
69] The introduction to the Y.M.C.A swimming pool revived for Douglas
A- childhood fear of water

B- memories of a holiday at the beach
C- Both a and b
D- None
70] What plan did Douglas make to learn swimming?
A- Planned to get an instructor

B- Planned to swim more
C- Planned to watch swimmers
D- Planned to jump
1.6. Key
Q. Q. Q. Q.
No. No. No. No.
1 A 19 D 37 A 55 D
2 D 20 C 38 D 56 A
3 C 21 A 39 A 57 D
4 A 22 D 40 D 58 C
5 C 23 C 41 D 59 D
6 D 24 D 42 C 60 B
7 A 25 A 43 A 61 D
8 B 26 A 44 B 62 A
9 B 27 D 45 D 63 A
10 A 28 C 46 A 64 D
11 D 29 A 47 D 65 C
12 D 30 C 48 D 66 D
13 C 31 D 49 D 67 A
14 A 32 A 50 C 68 D
15 C 33 A 51 A 69 A
16 B 34 A 52 B 70 A
17 A 35 C 53 B
18 C 36 D 54 C
4. The Rattrap
1.1. Introduction:
‘The Rarttrap’ lesson is written by, ‘Selma Lagerlof’.
1. Rattrap Seller 2. Iron Master 3. Edla
1.3. Summary:
The Rattrap summary is about a man who is a peddler. He has a pessimistic

attitude towards the world. The peddler has not always been like this and was a fine
man before. However, due to misfortune, he now resorts to selling rattraps, begging
and even stealing to survive. Moreover, he also views the world as a big rat trap. He
believes that much similar to the cheese we put for mice, the world offers us
materialistic things to lure us. So, when we fall for these things, it traps us and takes
everything away from us. In this story, a young generous woman takes in the rattrap
seller. Thus, the generosity and kindness she shows changes his pessimistic take on
life. This story teaches us about the essential human goodness we all must possess.
The story begins with a rattrap peddler who is in a rugged condition. He is dressed
in rags and is very frail and looks starved. We learn he has no home and sometimes
even begs and steals to survive in the world. He leads a lonely life with no one to care
about him. One fine day, it strikes to him that this whole world is a rattrap itself. If we
touch it, it will trap us and never let us go. He goes on to think that there are people out
there who are already in this rattrap and reaching for the bait. On one cold evening, he
reaches at a cottage to ask for shelter. An old crofter lived in that cottage who took in
the peddler.
The crofter needed company so he welcomes the peddler. He gives him hot food
and even tobacco to smoke. They play cards and start talking. The peddler learns that
the crofter got thirty kronor for selling his cow which he keeps in a pouch on the
window frame. The peddler leaves the next day but after seeing the crofter leave his
cottage, he comes back to steal the pouch of money.
After stealing it, he takes the woods to remain unsuspected. In the wood, the
peddler meets an ironmaster who mistakes him to be his old comrade. He invites him
over for Christmas but he refuses. After that, the ironmaster’s daughter, Edla visits him
and insists him to stay with them. In between, he feels sorry for stealing the crofter’s
money. They help the peddler get a makeover and dress him in nice clothes and shave
his beard off. After this, the ironmaster realizes he has made a mistake; the peddler
was not his comrade.
Thus, the ironmaster thinks he is a fraud and decides to turn him in. However, Edla
insists on letting him stay and celebrate Christmas with them. Her father agrees, and
they celebrate Christmas together. Next day, the ironmaster and Edla learn that the
peddler was a thief through the church about the incident at the old crofter’s. They
head home in a hurry thinking he must have stolen all the silver. However, to their
surprise, the peddler did not steal a thing. He left a note for Edla in the form a tiny
rattrap. There was also a note thanking her for her kindness which saved him from the
rattrap he got caught in. Most importantly, he also left the crofter’s money asking to
return it to him.
1.4. Comments:
This lesson shows how people get trapped by three baits in life, beauty, money and
power.
1. What did the package left for Edla contain?

(a) a small rattrap with 30 kroner on it
(b) a small bangle
(c) a necklace
(d) a diamond ring
2. The rattrap peddler spent most of his Christmas Eve

(a) laughing
(b) singing
(c) playing
(d) sleeping
3. What did the ironmaster’s daughter say when the peddler was about to leave?
(a) she asked him to stay for that day only
(b) she said she wanted to go with him
(c) she told him not to mind what her father had said
(d) she asked him to leave after 2 days
4. The rattrap peddler gave the ironmaster a lecture on

(a) how the world is a rat trap
(b) how to be honest
(c) how to be ethically correct
(d) how to be professional
5. The stranger’s reaction to the ironmaster was

(a) he made no attempt to hide his feelings
(b) he was angry
(c) he denied it completely
(d) he started screaming
6. What did the ironmaster feel when he saw the rattrap seller after he was well
groomed by his valet?
(a) Not pleased
(b) Very happy
(c) Suspicious
(d) Angry
7. The first move of the ironmaster was to make sure that the guest could
(a) gain some flesh on his bones
(b) have verification done
(c) be given some money
(d) be given some clothes
8. The girl had brought with her the following article to make him feel warm
(a) A blanket
(b) A woollen shawl
(c) A sweater
(d) A fur coat
9. The purpose of her visit to the iron-mill was to
(a) persuade the rattrap seller to spend Christmas Eve at their house
(b) propose to him
(c) counsel him
(d) advise him to give up stealing
10. The name of the ironmaster’s daughter was

(a) Emily Dickinson
(b) Edla Willmansson
(c) Sophia Loren
(d) Mary
11. The ironmaster lived in the manor with his

(a) sons
(b) wife
(c) oldest daughter
(d) old mother
12. The ironmaster mistook the rattrap peddler for
(a) an old regimental comrade
(b) an old servant
(c) an old employee
(d) an old cousin of his wife
13. The peddler entered the gate of the iron mill with the intention of
(a) asking for food
(b) meeting the master smith
(c) shelter from rain and cold
(d) chatting with his friends
14. He felt he had been fooled by a

(a) prankster
(b) bait
(c) crofter
(d) policeman
15. The rattrap peddler returned to the man’s house in order to

(a) steal the thirty kroner
(b) say thanks to the old man
(c) take the bag he had left behind
(d) note down the address of the old man
16. The crofter had received a payment of
(a) forty kroner
(b) thirty kroner
(c) twenty-five kroner
(d) ten kroner
17. The old man was very generous with his
(a) confidence
(b) money
(c) food
(d) guest
18. The old man in the grey cottage
(a) welcomed the peddler
(b) shooed away the peddler
(c) fought with the peddler
(d) got into an argument
19. The vagabond compared the whole world to a
(a) planet
(b) universe
(c) space
(d) rattrap
20. The peddler’s rattraps were made of
(a) wood
(b) aluminium
(c) wire
(d) plastic
21. How much money had the peddler stolen from Crofter?
(a) 20 kronors
(b) 10 kronors
(c) 40 kronors
(d) 30 kronors
22. How did the Crofter tempt the Peddler to steal his money?
(a) By his kindness
(b) By his warm care
(c) By showing him money
(d) None of these
23. What was the Peddler’s profession and who he was?
(a) Selling, traveller
(b) Begging, traveller
(c) Stealing, thief
(d) None of these
24. When does the ironmaster realise his mistake?
(a) when the peddler speaks
(b) when he sees an old photograph
(c) when the peddler changes clothes and cleans his face
(d) All of these
25. How did Crofter treat the Peddler?
(a) Very rudely
(b) In a strange manner
(c) Friendly manner
(d) None of these
26. Who used to make rattraps?
(a) Crofter
(b) Edla
(c) Ironmaster
(d) Peddler
27. Why did Crofter show 30 Kronor to the Peddler?
(a) To show him down
(b) To flaunt
(c) Because he is sad
(d) To share his feelings of pride
28. Why did the Peddler not reveal his true identity?
(a) Because of fear
(b) He didn’t want to hurt them
(c) In the greed of getting money
(d) None of these
29. How is the Peddler influenced by meeting the Crofter and Edla?
(a) He was encouraged to steal money
(b) He became a rattrap seller
(c) His heart was changed
(d) None of these
30. Why did Elda bring the Peddler to her house for Christmas cheer?
(a) Because she knew him
(b) He was very funny
(c) He was good looking
(d) Because of his resemblance to her father’s old friend
31. Why was he amused by his idea of a rattrap?
(a) It was a bad joke
(b) It was a good comparison
(c) It was the exact situation and was humorous
(d) None
32. What earns the sympathy of the reader towards the peddler?
(a) His actions
(b) His stories
(c) His face
(d) His sense of humour and innocent acceptance
33. What does the metaphor Rattrap in the lesson signify?
(a) Humans
(b) Thieves
(c) Attractions
(d) Human greed and distractions
34. Who offered shelter to the Peddler?
(a) A beggar
(b) A friend
(c) A milkman
(d) An old Crofter
35. According to the seller what leads us to various miseries?
(a) Attractions
(b) People
(c) Friends
(d) Wishes and greed of comfort
36. Why does the peddler knit up various kind of thoughts?
(a) Because of greed
(b) Because of travelling
(c) Because of loneliness and poverty
(d) None
37. This story revolves around whom?
(a) Around Crofter and his daughter
(b) Around crofter
(c) Around ironman
(d) Around peddler- the Rattrap seller
38. In what manner has the story been narrated?
(a) Non-fictious style
(b) Realistic manner
(c) Fairy tale manner
(d) None of these
39. Where has the story been set up?
(a) Jewellery shops
(b) Forests of Sweden
(c) Roads of Sweden
(d) Mines of Sweden
40. Who is the author of The Rattrap?
(a) Selma Lagerlof
(b) Thomas B. Allen
(c) Howard Phillips
(d) Sudha Murthy
41. Why did Edla plead her father not to send the Vagabond away?
(a) Because of her father
(b) Because he resembled her father’s friend
(c) Because she liked him
(d) Because of sympathy and his poor life condition
42. Why did the Peddler decline the invitation?
(a) Because he had stolen money
(b) He wanted to run
(c) He wanted to hide money
(d) He wanted to remain at the mill
43. Why did the Peddler feel like stealing?
(a) has to repay a loan
(b) has to buy a drink
(c) habitual of it
(d) due to others’ indifference to his needs
44. What made the Peddler finally change his heart?
(a) Edla’s words
(b) Edla’s appearance
(c) Edla’s father
(d) Edla’s goodness and care
45. Why did Peddler sign himself as Captain Von Stahle?
(a) He didn’t want to hurt them
(b) Because he forgets his name
(c) Because he wants to meet Edla’s expectations of him being an army man
(d) None of these
1.6. Key
Q. Q. Q. Q.
No. No. No. No.
1 A 15 A 29 C 43 D
2 D 16 B 30 D 44 D
3 A 17 A 31 C 45 C
4 A 18 A 32 D
5 A 19 D 33 D
6 A 20 C 34 D
7 A 21 D 35 D
8 D 22 C 36 C
9 A 23 C 37 D
10 B 24 C 38 C
11 C 25 C 39 D
12 A 26 D 40 A
13 C 27 D 41 D
14 B 28 C 42 A
5. Indigo
1.1. Introduction:
‘Indigo’ lesson is written by, ‘Louis Fischer’.
1. Mahathma Gandhi 2. Rajkumar Shukla
1.3. Summary:
Indigo summary is going to assist students in learning about the chapter in a

summarized version. Indigo is about how Mahatma Gandhi struggled for the
underprivileged peasants of Champaran. They were the sharecroppers with the British
planters. The peasants use to live a wretched life and were under an agreement to
grow Indigo. As Bihar has the landlord system back then, it worsened their condition.
Thus, Gandhi decided to fight against injustice. He waged a war which lasted for a year
to tackle the discrimination and got justice for the peasants. After that, it helped the
peasants become courageous and aware of their fundamental rights. Moreover,
Gandhiji did not just work to tackle political or economic issues, but he also took up
social issues. He worked to provide them with education, health, hygiene and taught
them self-confidence.
This story is set in 1916 where Gandhi steps up to help a bunch of poor peasants
from Champaran. It gives an account of how he struggled to bring them justice and
equality. Thus, it begins with most of the arable land of Champaran that divides into a
large estate. The owners of the estate are Englishmen and the workers are Indian
tenants. We learn that the chief commercial crop on this land is Indigo. Moreover, we
also see that the landlords compel all the tenants to plant 15% of their Indigo and
submit the whole harvest in the form of rent. The tenants are under a long-term
agreement to do so.
However, Germany starts developing synthetic Indigo. Thus, the British do not
require the Indigo crop any more. Thus, in order to release the poor peasant from their
agreement of 15%, they start demanding compensation. While some of the
uneducated peasants agreed on this, the other did not agree. Thus, we notice that one
of the sharecroppers, Raj Kumar Shukla arranges for a meeting with Gandhi.
He meets him for the same issues and insists Gandhi to visit the place to end the
longstanding injustice. Gandhi agrees and boards a train to Patna in Bihar. After that,
Raj Kumar Shukla helps Gandhi visit the house of Rajendra Prasad, a lawyer. As
Gandhi dresses simply, the servants thought of him to be a poor peasant. Thus,
Gandhi planned before trying to get the peasants any justice. It is because the British
government are punishing anyone who is keeping national leaders or protestors.
Thus, when Gandhi arrived in the place, the news of his arrival and mission spread
across the town like wildfire. This resulted in a lot of lawyers and peasant groups
pouring in large numbers in his support. Consequently, the lawyers did accept that the
charges are quite high and too unreasonable for a poor peasant.
However, Gandhi was criticizing them for collecting huge fees from the
sharecroppers. He was emphasizing on counselling as this will provide the peasants
with confidence to fight their fear. Thus, he manages to get justice after a yearlong fight
for the peasants. He has also arranged for the education, health, and hygiene for the
families of the poor peasants. Finally, he teaches them a lesson of self-sufficiency and
self-confidence.
1.4. Comments:
This lesson shows how Gandhi raised a rebellion against the mighty British in a non
violent way.
1. Health conditions in Champaran

(a) miserable
(b) tolerable
(c) under control
(d) fairly good
2. Who volunteered to work in Champaran?
(a) two disciples of Gandhi and their wives
(b) Kasturba and the eldest son of Gandhi
(c) Mahadev Desai and his wife
(d) Narhari Prasad and his wife
3. The representative of the planters offered to refund—– percent to the
peasants
(a) 5
(b) 10
(c) 20
(d) 25
4. For how long did Gandhi remain in Champaran?
(a) seven weeks
(b) three months
(c) one and a half year
(d) seven months
5. What amount of repayment did the big planters think Gandhi would demand?
(a) repayment in full
(b) double the amount
(c) fifty percent of the amount
(d) no payment, just an apology
6. Gandhi was summoned by ___ the Lt. Governor
(a) Sir Edward Gait
(b) Sir Henry Gait
(c) Sir Richard Andrews
(d) Sir Freer Andrews
7. Who were ready to follow Gandhi into jail?
(a) peasants
(b) lawyers
(c) Shukla
(d) J.B. Kriplani
8. The magistrate asked Gandhi to furnish bail for __ minutes
(a) 30
(b) 60
(c) 90
(d) 120
9. How did Gandhi behave with the officials outside the court?
(a) demonstrated his power
(b) was firm and resolute
(c) he said that he would disobey the order
(d) cooperated with them
10. Why did Gandhi start out on the back of an elephant?
(a) a peasant had been maltreated in a village nearby
(b) he set out to meet the secretary of British Landlords Association
(c) he set out to meet British official commissioner
(d) he was summoned by Sir Edward Gait, the Lt. Governor
11. After Tirhut, where did Gandhi go?
(a) Lucknow
(b) Motihari
(c) Cawnpore
(d) Ahmedabad
12. What happened when Gandhi visited the secretary of British landlord’s
association?
(a) the secretary proceeded to bully him
(b) the secretary advised him forthwith to leave Tirhut
(c) the secretary said that they could not give any information to an outsider
(d) the secretary was very helpful
13. Why was Gandhi not permitted to draw water from Rajendra Prasad’s well?
(a) the servant thought Gandhi was another peasant
(b) as Rajendra Prasad was not at home
(c) Gandhi looked like a vagabond
(d) Gandhi was a Harijan
14. Where is Champaran district situated?
(a) in the south-west of Orissa
(b) in the foothills of the Himalayas in Bihar
(c) in the northeast of Orissa
(d) in the south of Bihar
15. What did the British landlords and from the peasants after synthetic indigo
was developed?
(a) indigo as rent
(b) 15% of produce
(c) money as compensation
(d) a new settlement
16. What were the places visited by Gandhi between his first meeting with Shukla
and his arrival at Champaran?
(a) Cawnpore, Ahmedabad, Calcutta, Patna, Muzaffarpur
(b) Calcutta, Patna, Gaya, Muzaffarnagar
(c) Cawnpore, Ahmedabad, Gaya, Calcutta, Patna, Muzaffarpur
(d) Cawnpore, Ahmedabad, Patna and Muzaffarnagar
17. Who received Gandhi at the Muzaffarpur station?
(a) Shukla
(b) J.B Kriplani
(c) Rajendra Prasad
(d) Nehru
18. Shukla led Gandhi to the house of a lawyer who later became the President of
India. He was
(a) J.B Kriplani
(b) Rajendra Prasad
(c) Zakir Hussain
(d) Mahadev Desai
19. What was the full name of the peasant from Champaran?
(a) J.B Shukla
(b) Rajkumar Shukla
(c) Ramkumar Shukla
(d) Roopkumar Shukla
20. When did Gandhiji go to Lucknow?
(a) December 1917
(b) October 1916
(c) February 1917
(d) December 1916
21. Where did Gandhiji stay for two days?
(a) At a peasant’s house
(b) At a lawyer’s house
(c) In a guest house
(d) At Prof. Malkani’s house
22. What was the condition of the peasants in Champaran?
(a) Very happy
(b) Independent
(c) Very rich
(d) Terror stricken and oppressed.
23. What was the attitude of the average Indian in smaller localities towards
advocates of home rule?
(a) Very welcoming
(b) Very courageous
(c) Pleasing
(d) Very fearful and indifferent
24. Why did Gandhi consider the Champaran episode a turning point?
(a) Its voice spread far and wide
(b) It became famous
(c) The British were scared
(d) To protest the courts’ order to postpone the trial
25. What was the statement that Gandhiji read pleading himself guilty?
(a) That he was a law breaker
(b) That he wanted to command respect
(c) He was not a law breaker and came to render humanitarian and national
service
(d) None
26. Who was Sir Edmund in the lesson Indigo?
(a) A British lawyer
(b) A british Businessman
(c) A British Politician
(d) An Administrator in Indian Civil Services
27. Why did the British want the peasant to pay compensation?
(a) Because they freed them
(b) Because they got orders from the British headquarters
(c) Because they were leaving India
(d) They gave 15% of landholding and entire Indigo harvest
28. Where was Champaran?
(a) In Lucknow
(b) In Delhi
(c) In Uttar Pradesh
(d) A district of Bihar in British India.
29. Why is Champaran famous?
(a) For fighting
(b) For Indigo
(c) Because Gandhiji visited
(d) For the first Satyagrah movement in 1917
30. Why did Raj Kumar Shukla come to Lucknow at Annual Congress party
session?
(a) To be rich
(b) To be famous
(c) To fight and get money
(d) To complain against injustice of landlord system in Bihar
31. Who was Raj Kumar Shukla?
(a) A lawyer
(b) A government official
(c) A politician
(d) A poor peasant
32. Why did Gandhiji decide to go to Muzaffarpur?
(a) To have detailed information of the sharecroppers of Champaran
(b) To have information about lawyers
(c) To know different capacities of the people
(d) To have a personal bond with the people
33. How did Gandhiji help peasants of Champaran?
(a) By fighting and securing justice for them
(b) By hiring lawyers for them
(c) By educating them
(d) By teaching them cleanliness
34. How much did Indigo planters offer to pay?
(a) 30%
(b) 10%
(c) 25%
(d) 40%
35. What was Gandhiji’s demand from the British landlords?
(a) 30% refund as repayment
(b) 40% refund as repayment
(c) 50% refund as repayment
(d) 10% refund as repayment
36. Why was Motihari back with peasants?
(a) Because of people’s rights
(b) Because of the oppression of the British
(c) Because their champion was in trouble
(d) None
37. Why did M.K. Gandhi fight in Champaran?
(a) To secure justice for the oppressed
(b) To get popularity
(c) To show power
(d) To boast of his intelligence
38. Indigo is an excerpt from which book of the author?
(a) Men and Politics
(b) Life of Lenin
(c) The Life of Mahatma Gandhi.
(d) None
39. When did the author serve in the British army?
(a) 1918 – 1920
(b) 1909 – 1910
(c) 1912-1913
(d) 1900-1902
40. Who is the author of Indigo?
(a) Louis Fischer
(b) Leo Tolstoy
(c) Mark Twain
(d) Charles Dickens
41. Why was the government baffled?
(a) Because of lawyer’s power
(b) Because of farmers
(c) Because of sharecroppers
(d) Because of the success of Satyagrah movement by peasants
42. Whom did Gandhiji send a telegram to?
(a) Sir Edmund
(b) British Government
(c) Peasants
(d) Prof. J.B Kriplani
43. What was the purpose of the advocates of home rule?
(a) To get money
(b) To be popular
(c) To instigate the people
(d) To encourage people to participate in the freedom movement
44. How did Kasturba help Gandhiji?
(a) By speaking to the people
(b) By walking with him
(c) By moving here and there
(d) By teaching Ashram rules and cleanliness
45. Why did Gandhiji protest at Motihari court house?
(a) To be famous
(b) To show his power
(c) To humiliate the British
(d) To protest the court’s order to postpone the trial
1.6. Key
Q. Q. Q. Q.
No. No. No. No.
1 A 15 C 29 D 43 D
2 A 16 A 30 D 44 D
3 D 17 B 31 D 45 D
4 D 18 B 32 A
5 A 19 B 33 A
6 A 20 D 34 C
7 B 21 D 35 C
8 D 22 D 36 C
9 D 23 D 37 A
10 A 24 A 38 C
11 B 25 C 39 A
12 C 26 D 40 A
13 A 27 D 41 D
14 B 28 D 42 D
1.1. Introduction:
‘Poets and Pancakes’ lesson is written by, ‘Ashokamitran’.
1. Ashokamitran 2. Vasu 3. Subbu
1.3. Summary:
Poets and Pancakes summary will help you learn about this chapter in a simplified
manner. The chapter has been taken from the book ‘My Years with Boss’ by
Asokamitran. It is about his time when he worked in Gemini Studios. It was quite a
famous film studio back in those days. We learn that Asokamitran’s job is to cut
newspaper clippings concerning different topics and maintaining a file of the same. In
this story, we learn about a lot of things relating to the film industry, especially the one
in India. We get an inside glimpse of the working it and also of the beginning of India
post-independence. He first writes his take on the make-up department. Moreover, he
makes fun of the looks the actors try and the glaring lights. After that, we learn that
‘pancakes’ is actually the name of a makeup brand used by the Gemini studio.
The lesson begins with Asokamitran telling us about Gemini studios. We learn
about the very popular make-up brand whose name was ‘Pancakes’. The Gemini
studios use this brand excessively and orders truckloads of their products. After that,
he goes on to tell the readers about the troubles the actors and actresses face.
We learn about the many lights glaring in their faces when they are getting ready in
the make-up room. Moreover, he also mentions how the make-up department uses
loads of makeup to make them look ugly. He also tells us about the office boy in the
make-up department. He has a job to slap paint, during crowd-shooting, on the faces of
players.
Further, we learn that the author is a poet who joins the studio to become an actor,
screenwriter, director or lyricist. He has a cubicle to work where he has to collect
newspaper cuttings. The office boy always came in with his complaints to the author.
The author thinks that Subbu is the one who troubles him. As Subbu is a Brahmin, the
author thinks he has an upper hand.
We see that Subbu is a resourceful man with a loyalty that sets him apart. Subbu is
the perfect one for films and film-making is impossible without him. Everyone loves
Subbu for being friendly and hospitable. Along with many others, Subbu also does
poetry. He works for the story department that also has a lawyer. However, people
considered him to be the exact opposite of a legal consultant.
Moreover, he is a logical man with a neutral mindset in a group where there are
only dreamers. After that, we learn how the Gemini Studios got the opportunity to host
the Moral Rearmament Army. They are a group of international performers named
Moral Rearmament Army. While they did not have very complex plots or messages,
their sets and costumes were almost perfect.
Further, another guest, Stephen Spender, makes a visit to Gemini Studios.
However, turns out, he is not that famous and many people have not even heard of
him. Moreover, owing to language barriers, many could not understand him. Thus, his
visit remained a mystery until after many years the author saw Stephen’s name in a
book and recognized him from his visit to the studio.
1.4. Comments:
This lesson shows the culture of ‘Gemini Studios’ in Madra in oldern times.
1. Who was heading the make-up department?

(a) a Madrasi
(b) A tamilian
(c) A bengali
(d) A Bengali and later was succeeded by a Maharashtrian
2. Why was Subbu a trouble shooter?
(a) because of his gossip style
(b) because of his flattery
(c) ability to mix up with everyone
(d) because of his problem resolving quality
3. When did MRA visit Madras?
(a) 1942
(b) 1922
(c) 1932
(d) 1952
4. In this lesson, what is the purpose of humor and satire used by the author?
(a) to highlight human abilities
(b) to show capabilities
(c) to show varied capacities
(d) to show and highlight human infancies and flaws
5. How was Kothamanglam Subbu treated in the Gemini studio?
(a) with hatred
(b) rudely
(c) disrespectfully
(d) with high respect
6. How does the author come to know that English author was Stephen
Spender?
(a) From a painting
(b) From the newspaper
(c) from a television show
(d) from a book- The God that failed
7. What is the example of National Integration in Poets and Pancakes?
(a) Make up department of Gemini
(b) rehersal room
(c) office of Gemini studio
(d) none
8. Who imitated the scenes of Sunset and Sunrise of Jotham Valley?
(a) Police
(b) Scouts of Madras
(c) Social Workers
(d) All Tamil Plays
9. Why was Subbu considered number 2 at Gemini studio?
(a) because of his flattery
(b) because of his abilities
(c) because of creative skills
(d) none
10. The boy in the make up room was jealous of whom?
(a) actors
(b) author
(c) the visitor
(d) Subbu’s success and his closeness to the boss
11. Why was the author praying for crowd shooting at all times?
(a) to attract the crowd
(b) to avoid people
(c) to avoid epical narrations
(d) none
12. Why did everybody in the studio think of giving some work to the author?
(a) because of the idle appearance of his work
(b) because he was an office boy
(c) because he was a helper
(d) none
13. What was MRA?
(a) British Army
(b) The Moral Rearmament Army- a counter movement to International
Communism
(c) a wing of Indian Army
(d) A drama company
14. Who was the Englishman?
(a) Salman Rushdie
(b) D.H Lawrence
(c) George Orwell
(d) Stephen Spender- Editor of a British Periodical The Encounter
15. For whom was Gemini studio making films?
(a) for English people
(b) for illiterate
(c) for elderly peole
(d) for simple Tamilians who have no interest in English poetry
16. Who was the founder of Gemini studio?
(a) Mr. S.S Vasan
(b) English man
(c) a Tamil boy
(d) a director
17. What has Asokamitran brought up through this write up?
(a) topics of film industry
(b) topics of make up industry
(c) topics of gossip
(d) topics of heroines
18. Who was Greta Garbo?
(a) A Swedish actress- an Oscar winner
(b) a german actress
(c) a French actress
(d) a bengali actress
19. When was Gemini studio set up?
(a) 1920
(b) 1930
(c) 1910
(d) 1940
20. Who is the author of Poets and Pancakes?
(a) Asokamitran (1931), a Tamil writer
(b) Charu Nivedita
(c) Jayakanthan
(d) Balakumaran
21. What does the expression ‘made to look ugly’ refer to ?
(a) make up done to look presentable before camera
(b) faces made by actors
(c) faces nade by office boy
(d) arrangements in the make up room
22. What does the expression ‘ fiery misery’ mean?
(a) the glow of lights
(b) the bright lights
(c) the bright colorful dresses of heroines
(d) discomfort to the actors in the makeup room
23. What things attracted the audience in the plays staged by MRA?
(a) their jewellery
(b) their make up
(c) their dialogues
(d) their sets and costumes
24. How many people were there in MRA group?
(a) 150
(b) 180
(c) 140
(d) 200 people from 20 nationalities
25. Why was Subbu termed as ‘many sided genius’?
(a) his flattery
(b) gossip style
(c) interaction with others
(d) ability to create and manage things
1.6. Key
Q. Q. Q. Q.
No. No. No. No.
1 D 8 D 15 D 22 D
2 D 9 C 16 A 23 D
3 D 10 D 17 A 24 D
4 D 11 C 18 A 25 D
5 D 12 A 19 D
6 D 13 B 20 A
7 A 14 D 21 A
7. The Interview
1.1. Introduction:
‘Interview’ lesson is written by, ‘Christopher Silvester’.
1. Umberto Eco 2. Mukund
1.3. Summary:
The Interview summary is a simplified version of the chapter using easy language.
This chapter is an excerpt taken from ‘The Penguin Book of Interviews’. It is written by
Christopher Silvester. In this chapter, the author talks about the technique of ‘interview’
as a new way of interrogating. He talks about it with reference to the field of
Journalism. Moreover, he also discusses the importance of this new technique. He
goes on to state how the interview has become a vital arena in everyone’s lives,
regardless of the class, literacy or anything. We learn about the opinions of many
celebrities concerning an interview. Thus, it teaches us about the functions, methods
and merits of an interview. Moreover, the author also incorporates an excerpt from an
interview with the notorious writer, Umberto Eco. This part allows us to get a glimpse at
his literary method.
The chapter starts with the author introducing us to the method of an interview. We
learn that it is pretty common in journalism and its origin dates back to 130 years
before. He expresses that unsurprisingly, various people carry different opinions about
the concept of the interview and its uses. Some people think of it very highly while
others cannot bear giving an interview. The chapter tells us that an interview can make
a lasting impression. Moreover, as per an old saying, when we make perceptions about
a particular person, the original identity of their soul is taken away. We learn how the
most popular celebrities have criticized interviews.
Similarly, Rudyard Kipling’s wife writes in her diary about how two reporters in
Boston ruined her. He thinks of interviewing as an assault. Moreover, he even believes
that this crime should have a punishment. Further, Kipling is of the thinking that no
respectable person asks for or gives an interview. Moreover, this chapter also contains
an excerpt from an interview between Mukund, belonging to The Hindu Newspaper
and Umberto Eco. Eco is a professor at the University of Bologna in Italy. He has a
daunting status as a scholar for his philosophies on semiotics (the study of signs),
literary interpretation, and medieval aesthetics before taking up writing fiction.
In the interview, we see it centres on his successful novel, The Name of the Rose.
His novel sold more than 10 million copies. Mukund begins by asking him how he
manages to do such different things. Umberto replies saying he is doing the same
thing. Further, he goes on to justify his books that revolve around peace and non-
violence. We learn that Umberto classifies himself as an academic scholar. He attends
various academic conferences throughout the week and writes novels on Sundays.
Moreover, he expresses that others considering him as a novelist and not scholar does
not affect him at all. He agrees it is rather tough to influence millions of people with
academic work.
Moreover, we also learn how he believes that our lives have empty spaces like the
ones in atoms. He refers to them as interstices and admits that he does most of his
productive work in the course of that time. Speaking about his novel, he remarks that it
is not an easy read. It has got a detective feature to it alongside metaphysics, theology
and medieval history. Similarly, he thinks that if he wrote the novel ten years earlier or
later, it would not have achieved the same success. Thus, the reason for the success
of the novel remains a mystery.
1.4. Comments:
This lesson gives information about the techniques in conducting interviews.
1. What do Rudyard Kipling and his wife express about interviews?

(a) immoral
(b) not good
(c) very bad
(d) immoral and offensive crime against a person
2. Why were the journalists and publishers puzzled by the success of The Name
of the Rose?
(a) because readers like trash and it was a serious novel
(b) because it was becoming popular
(c) because of its high rated success
(d) none
3. What was Lewis Caroll’s opinion of interviews and autographs?
(a) wonder
(b) terror
(c) horror
(d) none
4. Which period of history do Umberto’s novels deal with?
(a) Renaissance
(b) dark age
(c) modern era
(d) Medieval period
5. Why did Umberto start writing novels?
(a) to avail an opportunity
(b) to be in limelight
(c) to share his views
(d) to make best use of empty spaces means free time
6. What facts are being showcased in the interview held between Eco and
Padamanabhan?
(a) he takes pride in being an academician, a university Professor first
(b) Being a novelist is a secondary thing for him
(c) uses his free time for writing novels
(d) All these
7. How many novels has Umberto written?
(a) 10
(b) 8
(c) 15
(d) 5
8. What do his works for children speak about ?
(a) his passion for children
(b) children are nuisance
(c) children love to be happy
(d) non-violence and peace
9. Explain ‘Denis Brain’s statement “Almost everything of moment reaches us
through one man
asking questions of others.’
(a) The interviewer has the power
(b) The interviewer has status
(c) The interviewer can elicit the truth and has the power to influence
(d) All these
10. Enumerate ‘An Interview is a supremely serviceable medium of
communication?
(a) a medium to gossip
(b) a medium to be the talk of the town
(c) a medium to prosper
(d) a noble medium of interaction and introspection
11. What satisfied Umberto’s taste for narration?
(a) stories
(b) children’s works
(c) interviews
(d) Novels
12. What do you understand by the expression ‘Thumbprints on his windpipes”?
(a) creating excessive pressure on throat
(b) creating excessive pressure on vocal chords
(c) creating excessive pressure and tension for someone
(d) none
13. Why do the celebrities feel embarassed most often?
(a) because of question attacks during interviews
(b) because of interviewer’s gestures
(c) because of interviewer’s appearance
(d) none
14. At what age did he start writing novels?
(a) at the age of 55
(b) at the age of 52
(c) at the age of 57
(d) at the age of 50
15. Why do most celebrity writers despise being interviewed?
(a) they don’t like journalists
(b) unwarranted intrusion in their life
(c) their privacy is hurt
(d) none
16. What is the reason for huge success of the novel The Name of The Rose?
(a) mystic
(b) metaphysics and medieval history period used
(c) detective style and theology
(d) All these
17. How does Umberto Eco find so much time to write so much?
(a) using early morning time
(b) using his office time
(c) using his family time
(d) using empty spaces (free times) like waiting for someone, break time
18. What did he present in this book?
(a) varied opinions of politicians
(b) varied opinions of civilians
(c) varied opinions of armymen
(d) varied opinions of celebrities regarding an interview
19. What does Naipaul present in his travel books?
(a) his feelings
(b) his feelings about interviews
(c) impression of the country of his ancestors that is India
(d) none
20. Who is the author of the lesson ‘The Interview’?
(a) Christopher Priest
(b) Christopher Silvester (1959)
(c) J.B. Priestley
(d) Alfred John Churchley
21. What kind of a novel was The Name of The Rose?
(a) hilarious
(b) fiction
(c) non-fiction
(d) a serious one
22. In what way interviews have become a common place of journalism?
(a) because of its power, influence and medium of communication
(b) because of its pomp
(c) because of its glory
(d) because of its rapport
23. Who has written Alice in Wonderland?
(a) Christopher
(b) Mukand
(c) Rudyard Kripling
(d) Lewis Caroll
24. Why does Eco call the success of his book a mystery?
(a) because of its success
(b) because of its popularity
(c) because of many factors
(d) because of many factors and many other books were written on the same
medieval period
25. According to Umberto what will happen to the world if we eliminate empty
spaces from the universe?
(a) The world will become beautiful
(b) The world will be completely ours
(c) The world will shrink and will become as big as a fish.
(d) The world will be round
1.6. Key
Q. Q. Q. Q.
No. No. No. No.
1 D 8 D 15 B 22 A
2 A 9 D 16 D 23 D
3 C 10 D 17 D 24 D
4 D 11 D 18 D 25 C
5 D 12 C 19 C
6 D 13 A 20 B
7 D 14 D 21 D
8. Going Places
1.1. Introduction:
‘Going Places’ lesson is written by, ‘A R Barton’.
1. Sophie 2. Jansie 3. Denny Casey
1.3. Summary:
Going Places summary will help you get a better understanding of the story written
by A.R. Barton. It revolves around fantasies and daydreams. The story tells us about
the teenage period where people are often found dreaming which is far from reality.
This period is all about desires and achieving the impossible. In addition, teens usually
have a hero they look up to or adore in this age. However, the main background of the
story is indeed a reality. It tells us about a girl, Sophie, who belongs to a lower-middle-
class family. She dreams of owning the best boutique in the whole town. However, she
lacks money and means. Sophie looks up to a young football player, Danny Casey.
She dreams about him so much, she believes she has actually met him. Finally, these
fantasies are what cause her disappointment.
The story begins by telling the reader about a teenage girl, Sophie. Being a normal
teenager, she has also got many fantasies and dreams. Sophie belongs to a lower-
middle-class family that struggles with finances. However, she dreams to own a
boutique one day. Further, she also dreams of becoming an actress of a fashion
designer. Similarly, Jansie, her friend, is more practical and level-headed. She knows
that they do not have a strong financial background, thus they have to work in a biscuit
factory. Jansie does not have any unachievable fantasies. She tries her best to help
Sophie stay in touch with reality, but all that goes in vain as Sophie does not listen.
Sophie has got two brothers and lives with her parents in a small house. She does
not shy away from expressing her desires and fantasies. However, her parents do not
pay much heed to it as they are far more mature than her. They are already facing the
harsh realities of life, thus, they do not believe in her fantasies. Sophie’s elder brother
is Geoff who is tall, strong, and handsome and remains reserved. She is sort of
fascinated by her elder brother. It is so because his silence makes her jealous and
wonders what he keeps thinking about.
Further, we learn that Sophie is always fantasizing about a young Irish football
player, Danny Casey. She has seen him play in a number of matches and thus starts
liking him. As she is always living in her fantasy world, she makes up stories about him.
In one made-up story, she tells her elder brother, Geoff, that they met one day in the
streets. Being more sensible, Geoff does not believe her story. He feels it is highly
unlikely that she just met such a sensation in the streets just like that.
However, as Sophie is so good at immersing herself in fantasy land, she starts
describing life-like details. Thus, upon hearing these details, even Geoff wishes that
what she was saying turns out to be true. She even goes on to say that they will meet
again as Danny has promised her. Thus, Sophie immerses herself so much in the
make-believe story that she starts thinking of it as true. She keeps waiting for Danny to
arrives, but alas he does not. Thus, on the way back, she is thinking about how
Danny’s not turning up will disappoint Geoff. Nonetheless, she still keeps fantasizing
about him and believes they will definitely meet.
1.4. Comments:
This lesson shows the teenage fantasizing and hero worship.
1. Danny had a freckled nose and the colour of his eyes was
(a) grey
(b) green
(c) blue
(d) brown
2. Outside the pub, Sophie saw something. It was
(a) her dad’s bicycle
(b) her brother’s car
(c) her mother’s motorcycle
(d) Derek’s tricycle
3. While Sophie waited for Danny, she realized that
(a) Danny would come
(b) Danny would not come
(c) she was hungry
(d) she was thirsty
4. According to Sophie, the place she had chosen to meet Danny was
(a) a hidden alley
(b) a perfect place
(c) behind the walls
(d) near the trees
5. Sophie told Jansie that her father if he got to know about her meeting with
Danny would
(a) agree to their marriage
(b) murder her
(c) ask her to call him over for dinner
(d) ask to be introduced to him
6. Geoff had told about Sophie’s meeting with Danny Casey to
(a) the entire neighbourhood
(b) Frank
(c) Jansie
(d) the teachers in school
7. ‘I wish he was an Englishman’. These words were spoken with reference to
(a) Geoff
(b) Derek
(c) Danny Casey
(d) a passenger in the bus
8. The match on Saturday was witnessed by
(a) the whole family
(b) only father and Sophie
(c) Geoff alone
(d) Sophie, father, Derek and Geoff
9. Danny Casey was a player in the football team of
(a) Ireland
(b) Finland
(c) England
(d) Denmark
10. Sophie told Geoff that Danny was unable to sign an autograph for her
because
(a) his secretary did not allow it
(b) he didn’t have paper or pen
(c) he said he’d do it later
(d) he was in a hurry to go home
11. When Sophie told her father that Danny had met her and told her that he was
going to buy a shop, father
(a) called her a liar
(b) asked her if it was another of her wild stories
(c) disbelieved her outright
(d) asked Geoff to verify facts
12. The father talked about a man who knew
(a) Pele
(b) Beckham
(c) Tom Finney
(d) Jeffrey, Archer
13. After describing Danny’s appearance, Sophie chose not to tell Geoff about
(a) Danny’s qualification
(b) Danny’s address
(c) his teeth
(d) his car
14. What did Sophie tell Geoff one day that made him look surprised?
(a) she had seen a ghost
(b) she had met her principal
(c) she had got a job
(d) she had met Danny Casey
15. Geoff never took Sophie out with him because he thought she was
(a) immature
(b) badly behaved
(c) too young
(d) too restless
16. Sophie felt bad because of her brother
(a) never spoke much
(b) laughed a lot
(c) teased her a lot
(d) never took her out for dinner
17. Geoff had been out of school for a period of
(a) three years
(b) five years
(c) one year
(d) two years
18. What was Sophie’s father keen to buy if Sophie ever came into money?
(a) a luxury car
(b) a decent house
(c) a yacht
(d) a shop
19. She wanted to be a designer like
(a) Calvin Klein
(b) Versace
(c) Armani
(d) Mary Quant
20. Sophie’s best friend was
(a) Derek
(b) Geoff
(c) Jansie
(d) Danny
21. Why does Sophie feel jealous of her brother?
(a) because he keeps silent
(b) because he is a mechanic
(c) because he reveals his secret
(d) because of inability to reach unknown areas of his mind
22. What does Geoff’s silence symbolise in Sophie’s view?
(a) distant places
(b) his vague personality
(c) his jovial nature
(d) wandering of his mind to distant places
23. What kind of person is Sophie’s father ?
(a) a kind hearted
(b) a loving and caring
(c) a hard core realistic
(d) carefree
24. Sophie’s dreams and disappointments are all in her mind?
(a) they all represent her imagination and nothing in reality
(b) they represent her nature
(c) they explain her personality
(d) they tell us her future
25. Why does Sophie get angry with her brother?
(a) Because he revealed her secret to Jansie’s brother
(b) he doesn’t speak to her
(c) because of his silence
(d) none
26. Who is Sophie’s younger brother?
(a) Geoffe – a trainee mechanic
(b) Casey
(c) Frank
(d) Derek
27. Which game are Sophie and her family fans of ?
(a) cricket
(b) Badminton
(c) volleyball
(d) football
28. What secret did Sophie share with her brother?
(a) She met Mary Quaint a famous fashion designer
(b) She met Prime Minister
(c) She met Christopher
(d) She met Danny Casy a famous footballer
29. Who is Sophie’s elder brother?
(a) Geoffe – a trainee mechanic
(b) Jansie
(c) Dany Casey
(d) none
30. Why is Jansie not able to support Sophie’s view?
(a) because he is a happy go lucky man
(b) because his imagination is poor
(c) because he is unable to believe
(d) because he is a realistic and believes in practicality
31. What was Sophie’s reply to Jansie?
(a) That she will go door to door to collect money
(b) She will open a boutique
(c) she will open an office
(d) she will become an actress or a manager to realize her dream.
32. What does Jansie tell Sophie?
(a) talk unrealistic
(b) be wise
(c) be practical
(d) be sensible and not to dream big
33. Explain – Words had to be prized out of him like stones out of a ground.
(a) ii was difficult to speak to him
(b) it was difficult to locate him in a shop
(c) it was difficult to locate him in factory
(d) it was difficult to get information out of him
34. What story she make up in front of her brother?
(a) She will become an actress
(b) she will become a manager
(c) she will be a famous beautician
(d) Casey will come to meet her.
35. What does Sophie dream about?
(a) Becoming an actor
(b) becoming a manager
(c) a sophisticated person
(d) becoming rich and sophisticated
36. What kind of girl is Sophie ?
(a) a happy go lucky kind
(b) a realistic
(c) Day dreamer
(d) a naughty child
37. what is the meaning of the words :“nosey”, “gawky”?
(a) “nosey”, meaning inquisitive and “gawky”, meaning awkward, ungainly.
(b) noisy and beautiful
(c) noisy and useful
(d) noisy and gainful
38. What are the literary devices used in the lesson?
(a) metaphorical expressions and slangs
(b) similes
(c) irony
(d) none
39. What is the sub theme of the story?
(a) Relationships- family and friends
(b) friends
(c) family members
(d) adolescents
40. Who is A. R. Barton?
(a) A modern writer
(b) author of Going Places
(c) lives in Zurich and writes in English
(d) All these
41. Why is Sophie attracted to Danny and does she meet him in reality?
(a) Because he is a heroic footballer and she meets him in imagination only
(b) because he earns well
(c) because he plays football
(d) because he is smart
42. Which country did Danny play for?
(a) Netherland
(b) Newzealand
(c) Switzerland
(d) Ireland
43. Why did Sophie like her brother Geoff more than anyone else?
(a) he keeps silent
(b) because he keeps her secret
(c) because she can confide in him
(d) all these
44. What are the advantages and disadvantages of fantasizing?
(a) helps in dreaming big
(b) helps in achieving big
(c) develops creative imagination and disadvantage is that it makes people
self obsessed.
(d) none of these
45. Where does Sophie visit to meet Casey in her imagination?
(a) a football ground
(b) in the match
(c) in a hotel (d) a secret place near canal
1.6. Key
Q. Q. Q. Q.
No. No. No. No.
1 B 15 C 29 A 43 D
2 A 16 A 30 D 44 C
3 B 17 A 31 D 45 D
4 B 18 B 32 D
5 B 19 D 33 D
6 B 20 C 34 D
7 D 21 D 35 D
8 D 22 D 36 C
9 A 23 C 37 A
10 B 24 A 38 A
11 B 25 A 39 A
12 C 26 D 40 D
13 C 27 D 41 A
14 D 28 D 42 D
2. Poetry
1.1. Introduction:
‘My Mother at Sixty Six’ is written by ‘Kamala Das’.
1. Kamal Das 2. Kamala Das’ Mother
1.3. Summary:
My mother at sixty-six is a poem whose author is Kamala Das. The writer is famous
for capturing the complications of relationships between human beings. This poem is
one of the best examples of bonding in humans. Especially the bond between a mother
and a daughter. This poem defines the fear of the author of losing her mother. My
mother at sixty-six summary will elaborate on the feelings of the author and will also
define the meaning of the poem.
Ageing is an inescapable phase of every human’s life. A person enters their
childhood, experiences adolescence when they are energetic and have so many
dreams. Finally, every person approaches their old age and then they die.
Relationships between people become much stronger in every phase of life. No one
can’t bear the separation from their loved ones just because of ageing.
Firstly, when the author going to the Cochin airport with her mother she looks at her
carefully and presents before us her image. As she looks at her mother’s soft and
whitish face, she gets stuck with the fear of losing her mother. Her mother with a sleepy
face and open mouth is comparable to a corpse. Here, the author shows love and
affection in a relationship between a mother and a daughter.
The poet is hurt and sad and shifts her attention outside the car for driving out the
undesirable feelings. She changes her bad mood. The scene from the window of the
car is of rising life and energy. The fast sprinting green and huge trees alongside the
cheerfully playing kids represent life, youth, and vitality. The poet here is remembering
about her own childhood. In her childhood, her mother was young and beautiful.
Whereas now her mother is surrounded by the fear of losing her life and that made her
insecure and sad.
She reaches the airport to take her flight. It shows departure and parting which
makes her sad. As she said goodbye to her mother, the image of the old mother in the
dusk of years strikes her. Here again, a simile is comparable with her mother with a
late-night moon of the winters. The light of the moon is an obstacle by the fog and haze
as she appears older now.
The poet is now feeling the pain of getting separated because of leaving her
mother. Her childhood fear of losing her loving mother now became so terrifying. Now
her mother could die of old age anytime unexpectedly. She is so sad that she starts
crying slowly without control but keeping a brave heart she hides her tears and starts
smiling. Thus, she offers her farewell to her old mother and keeps her hope of seeing
her mother alive again. She says “see you soon, Amma”. She hides her tears and
sorrow as she does not want to make a painful and emotional environment. Moreover,
she doesn’t want her mother to cry and shows her that she is enjoying her life. She
expects her mother to be happy and enjoy her life just like her.
1.4. Comments:
This poem show the bond between mother and daughter.
1. The mother’s old age and lack of energy is a depiction of

(a) the poet’s helplessness in old age
(b) joy and fun of old age
(c) bonding of mother with family members
(d) sickness and ill-health
2. The poem is made up of
(a) twenty lines
(b) a single sentence
(c) ten stanzas
(d) five stanzas
3. The image of merry children has been brought out by the narrator in order to
(a) show energy and exuberance of young children
(b) to show the children playing
(c) to show the children playing pranks
(d) to compare with herself
4. The narrator is only using her smile to
(a) cover up her pain
(b) make herself happy
(c) to make her mother happy
(d) to make her father happy
5. Smile and smile and smile is
(a) alliteration
(b) repetition
(c) simile
(d) metaphor
6. She said to her mother
(a) goodbye
(b) au revoir
(c) good morning go.
(d) see you soon, Amma
7. When the narrator looked at her mother again she felt a pang of
(a) her familiar ache
(b) guilt
(c) heartache
(d) a headache
8. The narrator again compared her mother too
(a) summer’s sun
(b) rain clouds
(c) late winter’s moon
(d) trees and plants
9. ‘Children spilling out’ is an
(a) simile
(b) metaphor
(c) personification
(d) transferred epithet
10. ‘Trees sprinting’ is a poetic device. It is
(a) personification
(b) alliteration
(c) repetition
(d) simile
11. She soon put that thought out of her mind and
(a) smiled
(b) laughed heartily
(c) cried bitterly
(d) looked out of the window
12. The poetess says her mother looked pale like a
(a) corpse
(b) ghost
(c) malnourished child
(d) anaemic person
13. The person in the car, beside the poetess, was,
(a) her aunt
(b) her niece
(c) her uncle
(d) her mother
14. She was going to
(a) Goa
(b) Mumbai
(c) Cochin
(d) Kolkata
15. Kamala Das was an
(a) Bengali
(b) Punjabi
(c) Keralite
(d) Gujarati
16. What were the words she used while parting from her mother?
(a) See you soon Ba
(b) See you soon beeji
(c) See you soon mata ji
(d) See you soon, amma
17. Whose house the poet was leaving?
(a) her friend’s house
(b) in-law’s house
(c) her husband’s house
(d) her parents’ house
18. What does the expression smile, smile and smile signify?
(a) poet was going home and was elated
(b) poet was happy
(c) poet was hopeless
(d) poet’s desperate efforts to hide her fears
19. What question arises from the complexity of the situation in the poem?
(a) what to do in old age
(b) how to take care of one’s skin
(c) how to drive
(d) How to strike a balance between duties and responsibilities
20. What does the narrative single sentence style of the poem highlight?
(a) Poet’s feelings
(b) Poet’s insecurities
(c) poet’s thoughts
(d) poet’s intertwining thoughts
21. Why does the poet feel parted, upset and sad?
(a) because of her fears
(b) because she was getting late
(c) fear of missing her flight
(d) because of her duty towards mother and her own needs
22. Quote an example of personification used in the poem.
(a) sprinting trees
(b) home to cochin
(c) airport’s security check
(d) All of these
23. Quote an example of a metaphor used in the poem.
(a) as a late winter’s moon
(b) ‘Trees sprinting, the merry children spilling out of their homes’
(c) Driving from my parent’s home
(d) None
24. Which Rhyming scheme is used in the poem?
(a) coupled rhyme
(b) monorhyme
(c) Alternate rhyme
(d) free verse
25. Why did the poet look at her mother again?
(a) because she was busy
(b) because she was going away
(c) because she wanted to stay back
(d) because of fear and insecurity
26. What is the universality of the theme of the poem?
(a) death is a truth
(b) Life is a reality
(c) everyone is happy
(d) to show old age
27. What do the parting words “See you soon Amma” signify?
(a) her carelessness
(b) Her optimistic farewell full of cheerfulness
(c) she bids goodbye like this
(d) she is in a hurry
28. What does ‘ashen face ‘ signify?
(a) colour of face
(b) face is covered with ash
(c) Pale and lifeless face of poet’s mother
(d) to show ugly face
29. What do the running trees signify?
(a) fast moving appearance
(b) speed of the moving car
(c) fast moving change in human life from childhood to old age
(d) none
30. What did the poet realize with pain?
(a) her mother’s appearance like a corpse
(b) she is inconsiderate
(c) old age is pleasant
(d) she has duties
31. What does this narrative style of the poem signify?
(a) differing thoughts
(b) many thoughts
(c) contrasting thoughts
(d) a single thread of thought mixed with harsh realities
32. Which poetic device is used in “Trees sprinting-” ?
(a) metaphor
(b) simile
(c) alliteration
(d) Personification
33. Name the poetic devices used in the poem.
(a) metaphor
(b) similie
(c) alliteration
(d) all of these
34. What is the kind of pain and ache that the poet feels?
(a) Losing her mother
(b) heart attack
(c) headache
(d) children screaming at her
35. Who is the poet of this poem?
(a) John Keats
(b) Rudyard Kipling
(c) William Wordsworth
(d) Kamala Das
36. What pangs did she feel when she looked at her mother?
(a) Pangs of headache
(b) Pangs of stomachache
(c) Pangs of knee pain
(d) Pangs of heartache
37. What was the poet’s childhood fear?
(a) Parting from her husband
(b) Parting from her friends
(c) Parting from her siblings
(d) losing her mother
38. What was the expression of the poet’s face while parting from her mother?
(a) satirical
(b) funny
(c) sad
(d) smiling
39. How is the imagery of ‘young trees and merry children’ a contrast to the
mother?
(a) mother is old in comparison to the trees and children
(b) mother is like ash while the trees are green and children are happy
(c) like spring and autumn season
(d) Mother’s health-hopelessness and trees and merry children- youthfulness
and hope
40. What does the poem revolve around?
(a) poet’s fears
(b) poet’s love for her mother
(c) Theme of old age
(d) All of these
1.6. Key
Q. Q. Q. Q.
No. No. No. No.
1 A 15 C 29 C
2 B 16 D 30 A
3 A 17 D 31 D
4 A 18 D 32 D
5 B 19 D 33 A
6 D 20 D 34 D
7 A 21 D 35 D
8 C 22 A 36 D
9 B 23 B 37 D
10 A 24 D 38 D
11 D 25 D 39 D
12 A 26 A 40 D
13 D 27 B
14 C 28 C
2. Keeping Quiet
1.1. Introduction:
‘Keeping Quiet’ is written by ‘Pablo Neruda’.
The necessity of quiet introspection and creating of a feeling of mutual

understanding
1.3. Summary:
Keeping Quiet summary discusses peace, humanity, and brotherhood. This poem is
by the author Pablo Neruda. The poem is explosive as well as quiet at the same time.
Neruda speaks of a world of wisdom in a calm fashion. Neruda believes that staunch
activism is not the best way to get into the heart and minds of the masses.
Consequently, the author speaks with much serenity. Furthermore, this serenity creates
an aftermath of thought ripples in the minds of the reader. The poet wants the readers
to take time out of their busy lives for retrospection and introspection. The poem is
symbolic of stopping all activities and understanding the purpose of the world. Keeping
Quiet appeals to the heart of the readers in contrast to the intellect. Through this poem,
Neruda aims to get his readers thinking and pondering as opposed to intellectual
stimulation.
This poem emphasizes the importance of self-introspection and silence.
Furthermore, these two can transform the life of an individual. Moreover, they can also
transform the face of the earth. The poet says that self-introspection and silence do not
take much time to look within. Any individual can do it and examine oneself. This is
easy and takes only as long as it will take someone to count to twelve. During this time
of introspection (self-examination), it is important for the individual to keep quiet. The
individual must say nothing at all. Without silence and keeping quiet, self-introspection
will not work. Silently introspecting will give the individual a strange feeling of unity and
togetherness with all others.
In the beginning, it will certainly feel a little strange. However, eventually, it has the
power to bring us all together. This silence will be free from the annoying sounds of
engines. Furthermore, this silence will also be free from the people rushing to get their
work done. The author feels contentment while imagining the change that will take
place in those moments. The men who have to deal with the pain while collecting salt
will get a little relief. Even the people who desire war and destruction will put on clean
clothes and an opportunity to walk among their brothers. They will get to experience a
life that is free of enmity and hatred. There will be a halt to their destructive and
dangerous activities. Peace and tranquillity will prevail everywhere once such harmful
activities come to a stop, even if it is for a short time.
The poet clarifies that his wish should not mean “total inactivity”. The poet only
desires to interrupt the violent, cruel, and sad activities taking place all over the world
for a few moments and let individuals introspect their actions. In fact, there is a
connection to what he says with life rather than death. Activity is the very essence of
life whereas inactivity is symbolic of death. However, for a new, improved, and useful
activity, a little stillness is quite important.
The poet makes use of the image of the earth to explain how life exists in things
that seem dormant. In winter, the earth becomes very silent and it seems to be dead.
The Earth becomes lively again in spring. Furthermore, in spring, the addition of fresh
new beauties and colours takes place. In a similar fashion, man can resume his
activities in a better manner after a little silence and quietness.
1.4. Comments:
This poem shows if we don’t do self introspection and develop understanding

among humans then destruction of human is the end result.
1. The poet uses conversational style and personal pronouns as ‘you’, ‘we’ and
`I’ because
(a) he wants to be intimate with mankind
(b) he tries to read out to the readers
(c) he wants to establish contact easily
(d) third person is ineffective
2. The last line of the poem is
(a) and later proves to be alive
(b) life is what it is about
(c) I want no truck with death
(d) and you keep quiet and I will go
3. Man needs to learn a lesson from
(a) moon
(b) stars
(c) earth
(d) sun
4. According to the poet wars that are fought have no
(a) soldiers
(b) weapons
(c) fighter planes
(d) survivors
5. ‘Cold sea’ is a poetic device
(a) personification
(b) transferred epithet
(c) metaphor
(d) alliteration
6. Without rush, without engines’ refers to
(a) no noise
(b) no hurry to go to the office
(c) no travelling
(d) no holidaying
7. The poet wants the entire humanity to
(a) keep talking
(b) keep running
(c) keep laughing
(d) keep still
8. Have no truck with death’ means
(a) will not die of the truck accident
(b) remove poverty and illiteracy
(c) have no association or deal with death
(d) will not drive a truck
9. The poet advocates the balance of nature to be
(a) maintained
(b) destroyed
(c) temporarily disturbed
(d) ignored
10. What does man threaten himself with?
(a) death
(b) birth
(c) robbery
(d) suicide
11. Where would they be walking?
(a) in the park
(b) along the river
(c) in the shade
(d) on the road
12. The types of wars the poet talks about are
(a) green wars, wars with gas, wars with fire
(b) verbal wars
(c) technological warfare
(d) nuclear wars
13. Fishermen in the cold sea would not harm
(a) seahorses
(b) mermaids
(c) whales
(d) tortoises
14. What kind of a moment would it be when everyone is silent
(a) terrible
(b) painful
(c) exotic
(d) unforgettable
15. The poet appeals to the readers to keep quiet for
(a) twenty seconds
(b) 1 hour
(c) thirty seconds
(d) twelve seconds
16. What can human beings learn from nature?
(a) beauty
(b) keeping quiet
(c) to be happy
(d) working with silence
17. What symbol from nature the poet uses to prove that keeping quiet is not total
inactivity?
(a) Sun
(b) Soil
(c) earth
(d) Nature and earth
18. How will silence benefit the man and nature?
(a) both will be friends
(b) man will know nature better
(c) man will be healthy
(d) man will stop hurting nature and both will heal themselves
19. While gathering salt, what will happen to the man if he keep silent for a
moment?
(a) he will stop dropping it
(b) he will look at the ground
(c) he will walk carefully
(d) he will think of the harm the salt is doing to his hands
20. Why is the poet asking everyone not to speak any language?
(a) to avoid noise
(b) to avoid loud voices
(c) to avoid people
(d) to avoid conflicts and misunderstandings
21. What would everyone feel at that exotic moment?
(a) happy
(b) content
(c) dancing
(d) strange blissful oneness
22. What will happen if there are no engines and no crowd?
(a) noise will be lessened
(b) no crowd on roads
(c) no traffic rush
(d) it will create a perfect, happy moment
23. What will happen if there are no engines and no crowd?
(a) noise will be lessened
(b) no crowd on roads
(c) no traffic rush
(d) it will create a perfect, happy moment
24. What is always alive even when everything seems to be dead or still?
(a) mountains
(b) rivers
(c) Sun
(d) Earth and nature are always alive
25. What is the sadness in the poem that the poet speaks about ?
(a) violence because of unthoughtful ness of the people
(b) unnecessary movements
(c) speaking aloud
(d) fighting
26. What should not be confused with total inactivity or death?
(a) no movement
(b) a statue
(c) talking people
(d) Stillness and silence
27. Not move our arms’ what does this expression refer to?
(a) sit quietly
(b) stand quietly
(c) to be inactive
(d) sitting still without any movement
28. What does number 12 represent?
(a) hours of the day and months of a year
(b) earth
(c) clock
(d) cricket players
29. How will keeping quiet protect our environment?
(a) by creating peace and brotherhood feelings
(b) no noise will be there
(c) people will not fight
(d) none
30. What is the rhyming scheme used in the poem?
(a) enclosed rhyme
(b) Monorhyme
(c) sonnet
(d) Free verse
31. According to the poet what creates barriers?
(a) interactions
(b) reactions
(c) fighting
(d) languages
32. What is the essence or message of the poem ?
(a) introspection and retrospection to be more peaceful and be in harmony
(b) to prosper
(c) to be happier
(d) to reach out more people
33. What does the style of the poem symbolise, that the poet used to write with?
(a) desires
(b) happiness
(c) hope
(d) desire and hope
34. What does counting upto 12 signify and how will it help?
(a) hours of the day
(b) months of a year
(c) it will help to create peace and harmony
(d) all
35. What does the title of the poem suggest?
(a) Inactivity
(b) noise
(c) unhappiness
(d) Maintenance of silence
36. How does the poet perceive life?
(a) as stillness
(b) as silence
(c) a noisy place
(d) a continuous evolution of nature
37. What are the different kinds of wars mentioned in the poem?
(a) War against humanity
(b) War against nature
(c) War with gases and fire
(d) All these
38. Which images in the poem show that the poet condemns or hate violence?
(a) fishermen not harming whales
(b) wars leaving behind no survivors to celebrate
(c) poet’s refusal to deal with death
(d) All these
39. What does hurt hand refer to ?
(a) Growing needs of the man
(b) growing greed of man
(c) unfulfilled desires
(d) growing insensitivity of man to pain
40. What is the poet expecting from fishermen?
(a) to find more fish
(b) to go deeper into the sea
(c) to think and stop harming the fish
(d) none
1.6. Key
Q. Q. Q. Q.
No. No. No. No.
1 B 15 D 29 A
2 D 16 D 30 D
3 C 17 D 31 D
4 D 18 D 32 A
5 B 19 D 33 D
6 A 20 D 34 D
7 D 21 D 35 D
8 C 22 D 36 D
9 A 23 D 37 D
10 A 24 D 38 D
11 C 25 A 39 D
12 A 26 D 40 C
13 C 27 D
14 C 28 A
1.1. Introduction:
‘A Thing of Beauty’ is written by ‘John Keats’.
The poem is an excerpt from, ‘Endymion’, a poetic romance.
1.3. Summary:
A Greek legend happens to be the basis for A Thing of Beauty summary. In this
Greek legend, a young shepherd by the name of Endymion had a vision of Cynthia, the
moon goddess. This youth makes a resolution to go after her and seek her. In this
quest, he wanders through the forest and under the sea. In the poem, the poet tells us
that beautiful things bring immense pleasure and delight. Furthermore, the poet
explains that God’s creations provide happiness as well as energy. The things present
all around provide us with plenty of reasons to feel happy. Moreover, the brave soldiers’
stories bring inspiration and enthusiasm to the love life. Beauty is a heavenly tonic.
Furthermore, it is like an endless fountain of nectar. Also, beauty can come in various
forms. Beauty gives us good health and removes sadness from our lives, resulting in
everlasting joy.
The poem A Thing of Beauty by John Keats delivers the concept that beauty can be
discovered anywhere and at any time. The content of this poem is mostly concentrated
on nature and the unexpected beauty that it brings. The topic of this poem is that
beauty may be discovered anywhere and, when appreciated, can be used to lift one’s
spirits in times of adversity. Any beautiful object is always kept in our minds since it
brings us permanent and everlasting happiness. The enjoyment that a beautiful object
brings never fades away, but multiplies many times over anytime it returns to our mind.
A Thing of Beauty is by the famous poet John Keats. Furthermore, the poet says
that a beautiful thing can give us extreme happiness and delight. Moreover, a beautiful
thing is eternal that never declines or fades. Also, a beautiful thing resembles a shady
shelter which gives us a comfortable sleep comprising of sweet dreams and relaxation.
This will ultimately lead to good health. The sight of lovely and beautiful things will live
on in our memories for the rest of our lives. Thinking about them makes our bodies and
minds healthier, as the ideas give us serenity and mental calm.
The author says that individuals have an attachment to Earthly things. This
attachment is such that it has the resemblance of a flowery wreath. Furthermore, there
are traps that keep people connected to materialistic things. This connection with
materialistic things distracts humans from eternal happiness. This is because the focus
of such materialistic people will be on acquiring more and more resources rather than
on attaining eternal happiness. The world has a lot of negativity, hatred, and greed.
According to the poet, the cause of gloom and sadness is this negativity. Moreover,
one can fade away these negative vibes away with the help of beautiful things that
surround us. This is because these beautiful things bring nothing but positivity. Man
and nature are strongly intertwined. The beauty of nature is what keeps us connected
to this planet. Every morning, we select beautiful fresh flowers and make garlands.
They lift our spirits and make us forget about our problems for a while.
The poet informs us about some beautiful things that are all around us. Beauty is
certainly in the eyes of the one who beholds. This means one can see the beauty in
anything. Furthermore, the poet talks about the numerous creations of God which we
should admire. One such creation is the Sun which provides energy. Moreover, the
poet also talks about the beauty of the moon and the natural beauty of the trees.
There are various animals around that make our world lively. Pretty flowers like
daffodils enhance the liveliness and greenery of the world. Moreover, the flowing
streams of water provide a refreshment and cooling effect to us in the hot summer
season. The forests have plenty of pretty musk rose flowers. Such flowers are a
beautiful sight and eyes feel the delight due to them. All such things certainly are things
of beauty. Also, one must not forget the beautiful and inspiring stories of the brave
soldiers. These brave soldiers risked and sacrificed their lives in order to protect
others.
These beautiful things have a resemblance to the fountain of immortality bestowed
upon us by God as a gift and a blessing. Such beautiful things are an inspiration for all
of us to continue living. They make life worth living. Also, they also help us in
maintaining our faith in goodness. Life without these beautiful things would certainly
become very hard.
1.4. Comments:
This poem shows how beautiful things in nature makes us to feel happy.
1. The ‘endless fountain’ gets its immortal drink from

(a) the river banks
(b) the tap
(c) the waterfall
(d) heaven’s brink
2. ‘Immortal drink’ of the endless fountain is a reference to
(a) the continuous flow of sacred or holy water
(b) water of Ganges
(c) water from the Yamuna
(d) water from the tap
3. What are the things that are read or heard by us?
(a) plays and classical music
(b) novels and songs
(c) lovely tales
(d) poetry and western music
4. The poet talks about ‘grandeur’. Whose grandeur is he talking about?
(a) dooms of mighty dead
(b) tombs of our ancestors
(c) grand palaces
(d) grand towers
5. What makes for itself a cooling covert against the hot season?
(a) the sheep
(b) the daffodils
(c) the dogs
(d) the clear rills
6. ‘Clear rills’ are the
(a) clean windows
(b) streams of clear water
(c) clear thoughts
(d) clear solutions
7. ‘Sheep’ could also be a reference to
(a) mountainous animals
(b) human beings
(c) harmless creatures
(d) animals of prey
8. What is ‘sprout a shady boon for sheep’?
(a) human beings
(b) creepers
(c) trees new and young
(d) trees old and young
9. From our dark spirits’ is a reference to
(a) our dampened and demoralized spirits
(b) dark coloured ghosts
(c) unhappy moments
(d) the happy side of our personality
10. ‘Of all the unhealthy’ means
(a) ill-health
(b) pain
(c) neglect
(d) suffering
11. ‘Spite of despondency’ refers to
(a) sadness and depression
(b) health and well-being
(c) suffering and pain
(d) hatred and greed
12. Every morning, we all are
(a) brushing our teeth
(b) having breakfast
(c) wreathing a flowery band
(d) getting ready to go to work
13. ‘Full of sweet dreams’ means
(a) pleasant and peaceful sleep
(b) disturbed sleep
(c) nightmares
(d) wishes coming true
14. Beautiful things never ‘pass into nothingness’ means that they
(a) never increase
(b) never fade away
(c) always bring unhappiness
(d) create unpleasantness between friends
15. According to the poet, a thing of beauty is
(a) never joyful
(b) creates sadness
(c) a joy forever
(d) horrible to look at
16. What is inhuman in life?
(a) human inside a river
(b) human inside caves
(c) human on trees
(d) self centred tendency and inability to rise above shallow circles
17. What does morrow mean?
(a) morning time
(b) present time
(c) noon time
(d) the next day
18. Which figure of speech is used in the words-Some shape of beauty?
(a) Alliteration
(b) simile
(c) metaphor
(d) all
19. How does beauty help us when we are grief stricken?
(a) By giving a ray of hope
(b) sprouting a shady boon
(c) by giving daffodils
(d) none
20. What removes pall from our life?
(a) dark spirits
(b) Trees old, and young
(c) all the unhealthy things
(d) Nature’s beauty
21. What is the effect of immortal drink?
(a) no one is thirsty
(b) everyone is happy
(c) immense joy and happiness
(d) beauty never moves away
22. What does immortal mean?
(a) ever flowing
(b) evergreen
(c) forever beautiful
(d) never ending or endless
23. What is the endless fountain of immortal drink?
(a) rivers
(b) flowing streams
(c) Sunlight
(d) All the things of beauty
24. Why do we need sweet dreams, health and quiet breathing?
(a) to have a healthy mind and body
(b) to have sound sleep
(c) to have peace and happiness
(d) All these
25. Write the phrase which means ‘it is immortal’
(a) it will never fade
(b) it will never pass into nothingness
(c) it will never cease
(d) it will keep giving happiness for a longer time
26. How does a thing of beauty provide shelter and comfort?
(a) By giving a sense of joy and happiness
(b) by removing pain and suffering
(c) like a bower
(d) All these
27. Do we experience things of beauty only for a short time ?
(a) yes they are short lived
(b) yes beauty is a temporary thing
(c) it never lasts forever
(d) no, they make a lasting impression of happiness
28. What is Beauty in Keats’ opinion?
(a) a suffering
(b) a cause of suffering
(c) a cause of pain
(d) a joy forever
29. What is the endless fountain and what is its effect?
(a) Moving streams
(b) The Sunlight
(c) A thing of beauty is endless fountain and it gives happiness
(d) None
30. What is the message of the poem?
(a) Beauty never fades
(b) beauty lifts spirits high
(c) beauty is a joy forever
(d) All these
31. What does Endymion do to seek goddess?
(a) dances
(b) sings songs
(c) reads scriptures
(d) wanders through forests
32. What are the things of beauty mentioned in the poem?
(a) Sun and Moon
(b) Young trees and streams
(c) flowers
(d) All these
33. Where did the poet and Endymion live?
(a) in a hut
(b) on a hill
(c) in a tree house
(d) on mount Latmos
34. From where has this poem A Thing Of Beauty been taken?
(a) From Keats work- Endymion- A poetic Romance
(b) Ode to a Nightingale
(c) Ode on Melancholy
(d) Odeon Indolence
35. What kind of a poet was John Keats?
(a) a Realistic
(b) Religious
(c) Medieval
(d) A romantic
36. What circumstances make man unhappy?
(a) chilly cold waves on mountains
(b) moisture of flowing rivers
(c) crowded places
(d) tendency of hopelessness
37. Why do we need a flowery band?
(a) to look beautiful
(b) to smile
(c) to be joyful
(d) to have strength and joy inspite of all sadness
38. Why are our spirits referred as dark?
(a) because of dark clouds
(b) because of spirits around
(c) because of shady trees
(d) because of sadness and disappointments
39. What does poet mean by Some shape of beauty?
(a) beauty has no shape
(b) beauty is abstract
(c) beautiful object that gives happiness
(d) All
40. What is the meaning of gloomy?
(a) all the unhealthy things
(b) dark spirits
(c) dull and depressive
(d) none
1.6. Key
Q. Answer Q. Answer Q. Answer Q. Answer

No. No. No. No.
1 D 12 C 23 D 34 A
2 A 13 A 24 D 35 D
3 C 14 B 25 B 36 D
4 A 15 C 26 D 37 D
5 D 16 D 27 D 38 D
6 B 17 D 28 D 39 C
7 B 18 C 29 C 40 C
8 D 19 A 30 D
9 A 20 D 31 D
10 A 21 C 32 D
11 A 22 D 33 D
4. A Roadside Stand
1.1. Introduction:
‘A Roadside Stand’, is written by ‘Robert Frost’.
Poet depicts the lives of poor deprived people living in villages near by the highway.
1.3. Summary:
A Roadside Stand summary deals with the lives of poor deprived people.
Furthermore, the poet contrasts the struggling lives of the countryside people with the
insensitive life of the city dwellers. The city dwellers don’t even bother to ponder on the
harsh condition of the roadside stand people. The city dwellers don’t think about the
struggles these roadside people have to go through in order to sell their goodies.
These poor people have nothing to do except wait for the passing cars to stop and
purchase their products. If at all a car stops by, it is to know about directions or to make
complain about something. The poet deeply sympathises with these impoverished
people and feels compassion for them. This sympathy is evident in the portrayal of the
roadside sheds in a poignant manner.
There has been an extension of the shed in front by the occupants of the little old
house. Furthermore, this extension is around the edge of the road where the passage
of traffic takes place. It seems like the shack-owners want to implore the passers-by to
purchase something from the shack. These deprived people have a huge desire for the
currency.
Unfortunately, the traffic goes past ignoring the shack. If by chance the traffic does
stop, it would come with a feeling of disappointment. They are very disturbed to see
the poor unattractive signboards. There is an offer of wild berries shack for sale in a
wooden quart (a quarter of a gallon). This place offers a peaceful natural stay for those
who can afford it. The poet becomes angry at this attitude of the ‘polished traffic’ and
asks them to move ahead.
The poet shows more concern for the sadness of the shed-owners than he does for
the landscape blemish. He believes that these people have a longing to handle some
city money. This money can reduce their suffering as one can see in movies. The
political party that enjoys power is the one that deprives them of a happy life.
The poet makes mention of the news which points out the relocation of the poor
villagers to the vicinity of shops and theatres. There were big promises to ensure good
care for them. However, the government authorities became negligent of these
promises. Furthermore, the poet is angry at this behavior and calls them “greedy good-
doers”. He calls them “beasts of prey” who indulge in the exploitation of the poor
villagers.
The villagers pay a heavy price as they had to lose their land. The civic authorities
are successful in fooling these naïve villagers. They promise them a better life and a
good sleep. However, these civic authorities are the ones who sleep peacefully while
making the lives of villagers miserable. Work during the day and sleep at night was the
norm in ancient times. However, there has been a reversal of this norm as the villagers
are not able to sleep at night.
The poet expresses his distress while explaining the endless wait of shed owners
for buyers. There is an ambiance of sadness all over the place. Sometimes a car stops
but that is to enquire about the farmer’s price. Furthermore, others who stop just want
to make use of the backyard. One of the cars stops for a gallon of gas. Moreover, this
demonstrates the sense of alienation between urban and rural life.
The poet regrets that money is not abundant in the country-side. Furthermore,
money can raise spirits while a lack of it dampens it. The villagers have a tendency to
express their grievance about a life which has a lack of money. Moreover, the poet
becomes very emotional and contemplates their pain. He certainly wants to change
their lives in one go but understands that this will be a futile act.
1.4. Comments:
This poem shows the indifference and cruelty of city dwellers towards the village
sellers maintaining roadside shops
1. What does the speaker or narrator call the thought of the owner of the stand?
(a) A chid like longing
(b) a very good thought
(c) a wise thought
(d) A childish longing in vain
2. What would be the state of poor rural folk at new location?
(a) tension free as their needs will be looked after
(b) they will be able to visit city malls
(c) they will enjoy travelling malls and cinema halls
(d) they will be happy
3. What was the news?
(a) City people will give money
(b) city people will help the poor
(c) Relocation and resettlement of the rural folk to make them tension free by
the government
(d) None
4. Who wanted to feel the money at hand and from whom?
(a) The rural folk from the government
(b) The rural folk from the social agencies
(c) The rural folk from the government officials
(d) The rural folk from the city people
5. Why is the word pathetic used for road side stand?
(a) for city people’s attitude
(b) for government’s declaration
(c) for city people’s behavior
(d) for poor condition of the owner of the stand
6. What is the poet’s call to the polished traffic passing ahead?
(a) he admires this
(b) he is indifferent to this
(c) he condemns this indifferent attitude of the city folk and feels the pain of
the rural folk
(d) all these
7. Why did a stopping car react?
(a) to point out at the wrongly marked N and S directions
(b) to buy some items
(c) to appreciate their hard work
(d) to soothe the villagers
8. What does support the flow of cities?
(a) travelling
(b) rural people
(c) government
(d) flow of money
9. Who will soothe the rural poor?
(a) Government and Social agencies
(b) Government officials
(c) Promises made by the Government
(d) City people will soothe ‘out of their wits’
10. Why didn’t the polished traffic stop at the roadside stand?
(a) they didn’t like that place
(b) their focus was their interest of earning huge benefits
(c) they were greedy
(d) all these
11. What news in the poem ‘A Roadside Stand’ is making rounds in the village?
(a) City people are connive
(b) Villagers will be given homes near theatre and shopping malls
(c) Rural folk is earning money
(d) None
12. Why are the city people called beasts of prey?
(a) because of their selfishness and tendency to dupe others for it
(b) because they are well dressed
(c) they know how to earn money
(d) all these
13. What is the special quality of the city people or folk?
(a) They are connive
(b) They are smart
(c) They are snobbish
(d) know how to get benefits in a calculative manner
14. Who are the greedy Doers?
(a) the government
(b) old people
(c) The Rural people
(d) The polished city folk
15. Why was the childish longing in vain?
(a) because it was useless
(b) because they were shifting
(c) because their wish of earning from city folk couldn’t be realized or fulfilled
(d) none
16. What is being sold on roadside stand?
(a) furniture
(b) cosmetics
(c) Diesel
(d) wild berries, golden squash and some other similar products
17. Why was roadside stand built?
(a) so that people can wait there
(b) to make it a bus stop
(c) to earn money from polished city traffic
(d) none
18. What does Frost describe in the poem?
(a) the feelings of the owners of a roadside shed
(b) the feelings of passengers
(c) the feelings of people on footpath
(d) none
19. What does Frost’s poem deal with?
(a) human tragedies, fears and their solutions
(b) humans
(c) nature
(d) buildings
20. Who is the poet of A Roadside Stand?
(a) Samuel Taylor Coleridge
(b) Robert Frost
(c) Lord Byron
(d) Percy Shelley
21. What is the open prayer from near the open window?
(a) For money to fall from the sky
(b) for more number of people to stop
(c) for getting money from the government
(d) for the sound of coming cars to stop at the road stand to help the owner to
earn money from them
22. What does I stand for in the poem?
(a) owner of the stand
(b) city flower who stopped on the stand
(c) Poet of the poem-Robert Frost
23. Who are the ‘pitiful kin’ in the poem?
(a) social agencies
(b) government officials
(c) city people with cars
(d) The poor rural folk and farmers
24. Who went and waited in the lines?
(a) The rural folk to hear the government’s declaration
(b) The rural folk to talk to the social agencies
(c) The rural folk to have a word with the government officials
(d) The rural folk went to hear the sound of stopping cars
25. Who made roadside stand and where?
(a) The sarpanch made in the village
(b) The government made in the village
(c) social agencies made in the village
(d) The poor rural people made in the village
1.6. Key
Q. Q. Q. Q.
No. No. No. No.
1 D 9 D 17 C 25 D
2 A 10 D 18 A
3 C 11 B 19 A
4 D 12 A 20 B
5 D 13 D 21 D
6 C 14 D 22 D
7 A 15 C 23 D
8 D 16 D 24 D
1.1. Introduction:
‘Aunt Jennifer’s Tigers’, is written by ‘Andrienne Rich’.
This poem address the constraints of married life of a women in this world.
1.3. Summary:
Aunt Jennifer’s Tigers Summary – In the poem a woman expresses her deep
feeling through her art. She (Aunt Jennifer) is prey of male dominant society. Also,
there is no one with whom she can share her physical pain. So she makes a picture to
describe her deep feelings. Moreover, the narrator defines the tigers which her aunt
made on the panel. Like their motion and movements and their magnificence and
fearlessness. Further, there are men sitting under the tree but the tigers don’t. Besides,
now Jennifer finds it difficult to take pictures by using ivory needles. Also, after
marriage, she became weary of doing household work. Now she can’t involve herself in
artistic work instead she has to do it in leisure time. She is scared of her husband but
her art expresses her desire to move fearlessly and proudly like tigers.
In this poem, the poet describes a lady whom she addresses as Aunt Jennifer. The
poet also says that she is doing embroidery on a piece of cloth that could be a wall
hanging or table cloth. Moreover, she has made it with beautiful tigers that are running
fiercely in the green forest. Further, she describes their beauty in comparison to a
topaz. As in the green background of the forest, they appear bright yellow. Company of
men does not affect them as they are fearless. At this point, we can sense the contrast
of behaviour between the aunt and tigers. Although tiger made by her is fierce she is
afraid of her husband. According to the poet, tigers are the proud and fearless citizens
of the forests. These creatures are very elegant and shiny.
In this para, the poet defines Aunt Jennifer’s fear of her husband. While doing
embroidery she says that her fingers shake with the fear of her husband. As her
husband does not approve her hobby of embroidery. Hence, she quivers while she is
embroidering the piece of cloth. Also, it becomes difficult for her to pull the needle up
and down. After that, she defines her wedding ring which her husband give her on their
wedding day. In addition, she sees it as a kind of burden to wear this ring.
She feels this because her husband tortures her so much that she sees the
wedding ring as a burden instead of a beautiful gift by her husband. Due to the many
difficulties, she has faced in her married life that she describes the little wedding ring as
a heavy band on her trembling fingers. It also means that the ring is linked with some
bad experiences in the form of torture that she has faced. Further, this experience
relates to the dominating behaviour of her husband.
In the last part, the poet says that though aunt’s design of tigers can easily sense
her desire for freedom and fearlessness. However, the poet says that it is not possible
for her to achieve this freedom during her lifetime. Only after her death, she will attain
freedom. But the irony here is that even then she will be tied with chains in the form of
her husband’s wedding ring. This ring is the only proof of the pains that she had faced
from her husband. On the contrary, the tigers made by Aunt Jennifer will always portray
her desire for living a fearless life by jumping boldly and proudly on a piece of cloth.
1.4. Comments:
This poem shows, how women suffers in the institution of marriage created by men
in this world.
1. The attitude of the poet towards Aunt Jennifer is that of

(a) hatred
(b) love
(c) sympathy
(d) casual
2. ‘Massive’ means
(a) high
(b) huge
(c) minimum
(d) small
3. ‘Proud’ and ‘unafraid’. These two adjectives have been used for
(a) the uncle
(b) the males in the society
(c) the tigers on the forest
(d) the tigers on the panel
4. She was mastered by is a reference made to the
(a) hardships and difficulties that Aunt Jennifer faced during her lifetime
(b) she was a slave
(c) he had a rude master
(d) her teacher taught her nothing
5. ‘Still ringed’ means
(a) oppression will continue
(b) too many rings on her fingers
(c) ring of the bell
(d) quiet and peaceful
6. Aunt Jennifer’s family consists of
(a) she and her husband
(b) she and her tigers
(c) she and her kids
(d) she and her servants
7. The word ‘chivalric’ in the context means
(a) timid
(b) arrogant
(c) honourable and brave
(d) malicious
8. The word ‘prance’ in the poem means
(a) to jump ahead
(b) to dance
(c) to eat
(d) to prowl
9. The massive weight of Uncle’s wedding band is a subtle reference to
(a) male oppression
(b) suppression at the hands of her husband
(c) the heavy gold ring
(d) the huge gold wedding band makes her uncomfortable
10. What is Aunt Jennifer doing with wool?
(a) she is embroidering a wall panel
(b) she is knitting a scarf
(c) she is making a ball of wool
(d) she is knitting a cap
11. The rhyme scheme in stanza one is
(a) aabb
(b) abab
(c) ABC
(d) abbe
12. ‘They pace’ is referred to
(a) the human beings
(b) Jennifer’s family members
(c) the tigers
(d) the lions
13. ‘Denizens’ of a world of green means
(a) residents of forests
(b) residents of green buildings
(c) live in green cages
(d) live in green grasslands
14. What do the Tigers do on the screen? They
(a) sing
(b) jump
(c) catch the prey
(d) prance
15. The poem ‘Aunt Jennifer’ is written by
(a) Elizabeth Arden
(b) Adrienne Rich
(c) Kamla Das
(d) Sarojini Naidu
16. Where are the tigers sleeping?
(a) on the trees
(b) on the mountain top
(c) in the cage
(d) in the caves
17. What would Jennifer’s terrified hands tell after her death?
(a) story of her life
(b) her constrained married life
(c) her strength to find her ways and beat the fears
(d) All these
18. How are tigers described in the poem?
(a) as ferocious
(b) fearless
(c) chivalric
(d) All these
19. Why did aunt embroider tigers on the panel?
(a) to express her suppressed feelings
(b) to express her strengths
(c) to express her fighting spirit of a warrior
(d) All these
20. What does wedding ring represent?
(a) beauty
(b) expenses
(c) unnecessary pressures of her dominant husband and responsibilities of
married life
(d) none
21. What is aunt Jennifer loaded with?
(a) weight of rings
(b) weight of tigers
(c) burden of household work
(d) heavy responsibilities of married life
22. What is the tone of the poem towards the end?
(a) happy moments
(b) resolving
(c) hopeful
(d) sad and tensed
23. What is the poet conveying through aunt Jennifer’s tiger?
(a) wild life
(b) courageous tigers
(c) tigers and their courage
(d) female existence and their fear of men
24. What did ordeals or tough times do in Jennifer’s life?
(a) they made her a hard hearted person
(b) she developed hatred
(c) she became weak
(d) they crushed her artistic personality
25. What did marriage bring for Jennifer?
(a) unhappiness
(b) loss of freedom
(c) loss of freedom and burden as if she has put on a heavy band
(d) a heavy mountain
26. Does Aunt Jennifer need sympathy?
(a) yes
(b) no
(c) no, more than sympathy she deserves praise
(d) none
27. Tell and interpret the meaning of ‘Denizen of a world of green’.
(a) forest haters
(b) forest lovers
(c) forest dwellers
(d) all
28. What is the purpose of creating animals which are completely a contrast to
aunt’s character?
(a) to show her strength and ability of not giving up in the face of difficulties
(b) her courage
(c) her fears and strengths
(d) none
29. What is the significance of the word ringed?
(a) responsibilities
(b) heavy duties
(c) fatty people
(d) responsibilities that formed circles like a ring surrounding her finger
30. Of what or of whom is aunt Jennifer terrified of in the 3rd stanza?
(a) of tigers
(b) of her death
(c) of her old age
(d) of her dominant husband
31. Why is she finding the needle so hard to pull?
(a) because of fluttering fingers
(b) because of trembling hands
(c) because of her fears
(d) because of the heavy weight of her marriage ring
32. Which words depict the dominant and arrogant attitude of the wild animal in
the poem ?
(a) dominant
(b) arrogant
(c) adorable
(d) denizens and chivalric
33. What issue does the poem Aunt Jennifer’s Tigers address?
(a) constraints of women
(b) constraints of married life a woman experiences
(c) constraints of women as a poet
(d) None
34. How many volumes of poetry has she published?
(a) 18
(b) 29
(c) 39
(d) 19
35. Who is the poet of the poem Aunt Jennifer’s Tigers?
(a) Adrienne Rich
(b) Jonathan Aaron
(c) J. H. M. Abbott
(d) Mark Abley
36. What is Aunt doing in the poem?
(a) Cooking
(b) Embroidery
(c) Reading
(d) Sleeping
37. What is presented through uncle’s character?
(a) Male strength
(b)Man is powerful
(c) man is like tigers
(d) male chauvinism
38. What is the meaning of the word ‘Chivalric’?
(a) ferocious
(b) fearless
(c) commanding and demanding high respect
(d) None
39. Why are tigers given the name Aunt Jennifer’s tigers?
(a) because she created them as an expression to her inner feelings
(b) because she brought them
(c) because she bought them
(d) because she nurtured them
40. How do the Prancing tigers look?
(a) just like diamond
(b) just like Topaz
(c) just like coal
(d) just like stone
1.6. Key
Q. Q. Q. Q.
No. No. No. No.
1 C 15 B 29 D
2 B 16 D 30 D
3 D 17 D 31 D
4 A 18 D 32 D
5 A 19 D 33 B
6 A 20 C 34 D
7 C 21 D 35 A
8 A 22 D 36 B
9 B 23 D 37 D
10 A 24 D 38 C
11 A 25 C 39 A
12 C 26 C 40 B
13 A 27 C
14 D 28 A
3. Vistas
1. The Third Level
1.1. Introduction:
‘The Third Level, is written by ‘Jack Finney’.
1. Charlie 2. Sam
1.3. Summary:
Third Level Summary – It is a story about a 31-year-old man name, Charlie.

Besides, this is a psychological story that refers to the subway at the grand central
railway station which takes passengers to Galesburg. In addition, this subway becomes
the interconnection between the narrator’s harsh reality and fantasy. Moreover, the
third level was a way of escape for Charley. As life in the modern world is full of
uncertainties worries and stress, it takes Charley to a different world that his friend also
calls, “a walking dream wish fulfilment.” Further, the story is about Charley’s tendency
to escape from the world. Most importantly, the third level starts because of Sam’s
letter written on 18th July 1984. This story shows the connection between time and
space.
In New York, the Grand Central Station has two levels. Nonetheless, Charley a 31-
year-old city resident talks that there exists a third level. Also, he claims that he has
been there. To talk about this problem he visits a psychiatrist friend. He calls it a
“walking-dream wish fulfilment” and explains Charley’s psychology by saying that “the
modern world is full of fear, insecurity, war, and worry…..” and everybody wants to
escape to some “temporary refuge from reality.” As for him, hobbies like stamp
collection is an indicator of this escape.
At times the Grand Central Station seems like a maze to Charley. While taking the
subway earlier he had lost his way a couple of times. One time he entered the lobby of
the Roosevelt Hotel. While the other time he appeared at an office building that was
three blocks away. However, this time he loses his way and something unique occurs.
Charley visits the third level!
In the silent hallway, Charley keeps walking, turning left, and sloping downward,
until he touches an architecturally old station, which is totally different from the two
familiar levels. Moreover, this old small room with fewer ticket counters and train gates,
a wooden information booth, wavering open flame gas lights and brass spittoons. All
this remind him of the architecture of the 1800s. Further, he sees people in outdated
outfits. When he noticed the date in the newspaper ‘The World’ he sees 11 June 1894.
When he tries to buy two tickets, he realizes that he needs old currency.
He always wanted to travel to Galesburg with his wife, Louisa. Back in his head, it is
“a wonderful town still, with big old frame houses, huge lawns, and tremendous
trees….” The place has pleasant and long summer dusks and where people have
ample of time. Hence, the next day during lunch, he exchanges three hundred dollars
for old currency amounting to some two hundred only. In addition, the amount doesn’t
bother him as he believes that everything there will be cheaper. However, he could
never again find the corridor that leads him to the third level.
When her wife came to know about this she asks him to stop looking.
Unexpectedly, his friend Sam Weiner also disappear and his wife keeps on looking for
him for in the weekends. Moreover, Sam was the one whom Charley shares his idea
about Galesburg.
Charley inherited the hobby of stamp collection from his grandfather. And someday
while looking at the stamp collection, Charley finds a letter that was earlier not there.
Also, it has the postmark on a faded six-cent stamp with a picture of President Garfield.
Further, the envelop read as 18 July 1894 to Charley’s grandfather in Galesburg and it
addresses Charley.
In the letter, Sam tells Charley that he has reached Galesburg and he invites
Charley and Louisa there. After going to stamp and coin shop he gets to know that
Sam exchange eight hundred dollars for old currency bills to establish his business in
Galesburg. Besides, Sam was none other than Charley’s psychiatrist!
1.4. Comments:
The entire story is happened in the mind of Charlie, to escape from the harsh
realities of this world.
1] Who is the writer of the story “The Third Level”?
A- Jack Finney
B- Alphonse daudet
C- Anees Jung
D- None
2] Who is the central character of the story?
A- Franz
B- Charley
C- Roger
D- Saheb
3] What does Charley not admit?
A- that the Earth is round

B- that the sun rises in the East
C- that the Grand Central Station is in New York
D- that the Grand Central station has only two levels
4 ] What happened when Charley reach when once he got into a mile-long tunnel?
A- he reached a park
B- he remained there
C- he came up in the lobby of a hotel (d
D- he reached a school
5] What happens when one day Charley is in a hurry to catch the train?
A- he misses the train

B- he reaches the third level
C- he reaches heaven
D- he reaches a village
6] What is the information booth at the third level made of?
A- Wood
B- Concrete
C- Steel
D- cloth
7] What does Charley realize when he finds everyone wearing old fashioned
clothes?
A- People Are Old Fashioned

B- They Are Actors
C- He Reached The Past
D- None
8] How does Charley make sure that he has reached the past?
A- he sees the sign boards

B- he asks a passenger
C- the policeman tells him
D- he sees the date on the current newspaper
9] When Charley knows that he has slipped into the past, where does he want to
go ?
A- to Chicago
B- to Iceland
C- to New York
D- to Galesburg, Illinois
10] When did Charley live in Galesburg?
A- in his childhood
B- when he worked in an office
C- in his college days
D- in his old age
11] Charley wants to purchase tickets for _______________
A- Galesburg
B- America
C- New York
D- The US
12] Why does the booking clerk threaten to get Charley arrested?
A- he thinks Charley is a thief

B- he thinks Charley is a robber
C- Charley tried to rob him
D- he thought that the notes offered by Charley were fake
13] How does Charley come back to the present?
A- the booking clerk pushes him

B- he falls on the platform
C- he rushes from the booking window
D- his wife calls him
14] To whom does Charley talk about the third level?
A- a policeman
B- his psychiatrist friend
C- Sam Weiner
D- both (b) & (c)
15] What does Charley’s psychiatrist friend think about Charley when he talks
about the third level?
A- Charley is sad
B- Charley is mad
C- Charley is befooling him
D- Charley has been day-dreaming
16] Why does Charley buy old currency notes?
A- he is fond of collecting old notes

B- he likes such notes
C- he wants to use the notes in the third level
D- he wants to give notes to one of his friends
17] In which year of the past does Charley want to go?
A- 1894
B- 1857
C- 1917
D- 1760
18] One of Charley’s friends disappears, what is his name?
A- Sam Weiner
B- Wam Seiner
C- Doe Weiner
D- None
19] How does Charley come to know that Sam Weiner has slipped into the past?
A- from his wife

B- from the police
C- from another friend
D- from an old day postage cover
20] In his letter what does Sam Weiner urge Charley to do?
A- to remain in present
B- to find the third level and come there with his wife
C- to report the matter to the police
D- to run away
21] Who is Sam Weiner?
A- Charley’s friend
B- a psychiatrist friend
C- Charley’s brother
D- both (a) & (b)
22] What is the name of Charley’s wife?
A- Darwin
B- Pursia
C- Louisa
D- Jessica
23] How Old Was Charley?
A- 30 years
B- 31 years
C- 32 years
D- 34 years
24] What is the meaning of “waking dream wish fulfilment”?
A- a pleasant wish that one wants to happen

B- a pleasant wish that takes one to the future
C- a pleasant wish which inspires to work
D- a pleasant wish that makes one forget past
25] What is the theme of the lesson?
A- human tendency of escapism from the harsh reality of the present

B- time travelling
C- self destruction for the benefits of others
D- destiny overpowers one’s action
26] Sam had purchased old style currency for ………… dollars.
A- One thousand
B- Eight thousand
C- Eight hundred
D- Nine hundred
27] Who has signed that letter which Charley found in his stamp collection?
A- Charley's wife
B- Charley's father
C- Sam
D- None of the above
28] Why did The clerk refuse to accept money?
A- Clerk Refused To Accept Money Because It Was Currency of Modern Times

B- Because It Was Old Currency
C- Both A And B
D- None
29] The reason reaching the third level by the narrator is
A- The third level was recently made.

B- He has been using third level daily
C- He wanted to explore new things
D- He wanted to escape from worries and tensions
30] Why did Sam want to start hay, feed and grain business in 1894?
A- Hated his current profession

B- Wanted to escape the frustration of modern life
C- Wanted to leave his friend’s company
D- Wanted to earn more money
31] The phrase” try to skin” means _____
A- Try to cheat
B- Try to conceal
C- Try to show
D- Try to clarify
32] What do you mean by temporary refuge?
A- Shelter for short time

B- Shelter for long time
C- Shelter home
D- Shelter
33] Charley decided to go to Galesburg to____
A- Find peace
B- Buy the things cheaper
C- Meet Sam
D- Meet his grand father
34] According to Sam, the __________ is full of insecurity, fear, war and worries.
A- World
B- Galesburg
C- Charley
D- None
35] It so happened that entered into a mile long __________________ and came
out in the lobby of Roosevelt Hotel
A- tunnel
B- Route
C- Room
D- Hotel
36] What was Sam invited for according to the letter?
A- for a party
B- for a wedding
C- for a birthday party
D- for a lemonade party
37] What convinced Charly that he had reached the Third Level Grand Central
Station and not the second level?
A- A different world of gas lights and brass spittoons

B- beards and mustaches of 1894
C- newspaper with a date June 11, 1894
D- All of these
38] What did Charley find in his stamp collection?

A- Medicines
B- New letters
C- old letters
D- First day cover
39] What was the strangest thing at The Third Level?
A- Beards
B- Mustaches
C- dresses
D- The corridor that led him into the past.
40] What is First Day Cover?
A- A new stamp gets the Postmark and date

B- A gift
C- A gift wrapper
D- A gift wrapped in a beautiful wrapper
41] Does the Third Level really exist at Grand Station?
A- Yes
B- yes, there were 3 levels
C- No, there were only two levels at the station
D- None
42] Who was sam in The Third Level?
A- a doctor
B- a friend
C- a psychiatrist and a friend of Charley
D- None
43] Who had sent that ‘First Day cover and when?
A- Sam’s father
B- Sam’s uncle
C- Sam’s friend
D- Sam a psychiatrist in 1894
44] What happens when Charley enters the Grand Central Station?
A- He finds a huge tree like Station

B- new staircases, corridors and tunnels
C- tree keeps spreading its roots throwing rooms and windows
D- All of these
45] What was the Third Level?

A- a third tier on the station
B- a third storey on the station
C- an imaginary discovery of the narrator’s mind
D- none
46] How many levels were there in grand central?
A- Two
B- One
C- Three
D- Five
1.6. Key
Q. Q. Q. Q.
No. No. No. No.
1 A 15 D 29 A 43 D
2 B 16 C 30 B 44 D
3 D 17 A 31 A 45 C
4 C 18 A 32 A 46 A
5 B 19 D 33 A
6 A 20 B 34 A
7 C 21 D 35 A
8 D 22 C 36 D
9 D 23 B 37 D
10 A 24 A 38 D
11 A 25 A 39 D
12 D 26 C 40 A
13 C 27 C 41 C
14 D 28 D 42 C
2. The Tiger King
1.1. Introduction:
‘The Tiger King’, is written by ‘Kalki’.
1. Jilani Hung Bahadur
1.3. Summary:
The Tiger King Summary – The story mocks the wilfulness and arrogance of those
in power. The writer of the story takes us to the days when king rule. Also, they lived
under the thumb rule of the British. In addition, the ruler was uninterested in serving the
people instead they spent their time on foolish pursuits. They bent law to suit their
interest. Besides, the Maharaja of Pratibandapuram tries to disprove his fate that the
chief astrologer predicted that a tiger will kill him. So, he tries to belie the prediction and
hunted down 99 tigers successfully. But the 100 tigers although not made of flesh and
blood take his life. As one of the silvers of woodcut his right hand and because of
infection, he dies.
This story refers to the Maharaja Sir Jilani Hung Bahadur of Pratibandapuram.
Astrologers predict his future when he was just 10 days old. Astrologers say that a tiger
will kill him. On this, surprisingly the 10-day old prince said: “Let tigers beware!” The
boy grows up just like any other royal child raised. Such as by drinking the milk of white
cow and looked after by English nanny and watching English movies.
When he was 20, he was crowned king and came to know about the prediction
about his death. So, then onwards he started killing a tiger and put a ban on the tiger
hunt in his state. According to the astrologers he needs to be careful with the 100th
tiger even if he successfully kills 99 tigers.
One time a high ranking British officer visits his state and wants to go for a tiger
hunt. However, the maharaja declined his wish. And in order to secure the state from
the wrath of the British officer. The maharaja sent 50 diamond rings to the officer’s wife
whose worth was Rs 3 lakh.
Within ten years the maharaja successful slays 70 tigers. But after that, there were
no tigers left in Pratibandapuram. Hence, to complete his target of killing a hundred
tigers he marries a girl from the royal state that has more tigers so that he can
complete his target. Whenever he visits his in-laws, he makes sure that he kills 5-6
tiger each time. In addition, in this way, he was able to kill 99 tigers but he was unable
to find the 100th tiger. On not finding the 100th tiger the maharaja became violent and
threatened the Dewan. In order to save himself from the fury of the king, the Dewan got
an old tiger from the circus and with great difficulty put him in the forest.
He told Maharaja about the tiger. So, maharaja went on a hunt and shot the tiger
and felt victorious and happy. But then again, he didn’t know that his bullet miss and
the tiger was alive and he only collapsed out of fear. No one has the guts, to tell the
truth to the king so they killed the tiger and brought it in a grand procession.
Lastly, the maharaja was joyful and happy. So, on his son’s birthday, he buys a
wooden tiger as a gift for him. The tiger had rough edges and while playing with it he
gets a woodcut in his hand which later on advances into an infection. And because of
it, he dies. Therefore, fatefully the 100th tiger although made of wood take its revenge
and killed the king.
1.4. Comments:
This story shows how people in power can exploit the resources and humans for
their selfish needs.
1. How many surgeons were summoned to attend the king?

(a) 3
(b) 7
(c) 9
(d) 13
2. Identify the literary device in ‘like quills all over it’.
(a) Metaphor
(b) Simile
(c) Alliteration
(d) Personification
3. The wooden tiger was carved by
(a) A master craftsman
(b) An unskilled carpenter
(c) The shopkeeper himself
(d) A British carpenter
4. The original cost of the present was
(a) 2 annas and a quarter
(b) 2 annas and a half
(c) One and a half annas
(d) 3 annas
5. How old was the King’s son?
(a) One year old
(b) Three years old
(c) Five years old
(d) Seven years old
6. The 100th tiger had __
(a) been shot dead
(b) fainted
(c) disappeared
(d) been set free
7. The old tiger had been brought from____
(a) Calcutta Park
(b) Business Park
(c) Leisure Park
(d) People’s Park
8. The frustrated Tiger King asked the Dewan——–
(a) to resign
(b) to go to far off places in search of a tiger
(c) to invite the British Officer
(d) to get a tiger from the Madras zoo
9. Maharaja on not finding the last tiger __
(a) went to the Madras zoo
(b) terminated the services of many officers
(c) went to live in the jungle
(d) gave up the idea completely
10. Each time the Maharaja visited his father-in-law, he killed ___ tigers
(a) 1-2
(b) 5-6
(c) 9-10
(d) 12-13
11. In 10 years of hunting expeditions, the Maharaja killed ___ tigers
(a) 30
(b) 50
(c) 70
(d) 90
12. Maharaja and Dewan ___ the British Officer to save the kingdom
(a) entertained
(b) bribed
(c) pacified
(d) confronted
13. ____ became the King’s main occupation
(a) English
(b) Justice
(c) Governance
(d) Tiger hunting
14. A high ranking British officer wished to go on
(a) a tiger hunting expedition
(b) to the jungle
(c) and investigate the decrease in tiger population
(d) and remove the Tiger King
15. The astrologer stated that he would ___ if the king killed the 100th tiger
(a) leave the state
(b) kill himself
(c) cut his hair
(d) denounce the world
16. The state astrologer predicted that no harm would come to the Tiger King till
the killing of ___ tigers
(a) 89
(b) 99
(c) 79
(d) 100
17. What character trait of the prince is revealed when he utters the words, ‘Let
Tigers Beware’?
(a) Humility
(b) Arrogance
(c) Pride
(d) Will-power
18. How old was the Prince when he ridiculed the astrologer?
(a) 10 days
(b) 10 weeks
(c) 10 months
(d) 10 years
19. The Maharaja of ____ is the hero of the story.
(a) Ramnagar
(b) Pratibandapuram
(c) Paltipuram
(d) Preetamgarh
20. Kalki, the author of ‘The Tiger King’ has used as a background, days of ___
kings dominating their subjects.
(a) just
(b) brave
(c) eccentric
(d) gullible
21. What shows the false ego and pride of the king in the story?
(a) his killing of tigers and no concern for nature
(b) his desire to marry
(c) his orders from time to time
(d) None
22. What literary device has been used in the story?
(a) metaphorical expressions
(b) Irony
(c) sarcasm
(d) All
23. What birthday gift did the Maharaja present to his 3 years old son?
(a) a toy
(b) gold coins
(c) forests
(d) a toy tiger
24. Why did the king send rings to British official’s wife?
(a) to save his state and to please The British
(b) to invite them for hunting
(c) to invite them for a feast
(d) to find more tigers
25. Why was the Maharaja so anxious to kill 100th tiger?
(a) to ensure his safety and to prove prediction wrong
(b) to prove his hunting skills
(c) to prove his power
(d) none
26. What did the Maharaja do to ensure his safety?
(a) He owned tigers
(b) married a princess
(c) prohibited British officer to enter his territory
(d) He killed tigers
27. What is the irony in the story?
(a) kings desire to prove predictions wrong
(b) king’s desire to marry
(c) king’s desire to kill tigers
(d) The king killed 99 tigers and died because of a toy tiger
28. Why did Maharaja put a ban on Tiger hunting in his state?
(a) to prove the priest’s prediction wrong
(b) to prove his power
(c) to show his love for animals
(d) his kindness towards the animals
29. Who actually shot the 100th tiger?
(a) one of the hunters who accompanied the king
(b) a soldier
(c) king’s guest
(d) British high office
30. What became the cause of King’s death?
(a) a tiger
(b) a tiger from his wife’s forest
(c) a tiger in his state
(d) the wooden tiger from the toyshop
31. What is the theme of the story?
(a) Desire of power
(b) Desire to have power for one’s selfish interests and not for the welfare of
the people
(c) desire to help others
(d) none
32. When did the Prince marry?
(a) at the age of 20
(b) when he killed the first tiger
(c) After killing all the tigers in the State
(d) None
33. At what age the boy crowned as king?
(a) 30
(b) 15
(c) 22
(d) 20
34. How did the child grow?
(a) drinking goat’s milk like other royal children
(b) drinking buffalo’s milk like other royal children
(c) drinking cow’s milk like other royal children
(d) none
35. What did the astrologer predict?
(a) the boy will be a king
(b) the boy will visit the world
(c) the king will be killed by 100th tiger
(d) none
36. Who was Duraisani?
(a) an old lady
(b) a young lady
(c) a greedy woman, wife of a high rank British officer
(d) none
37. Under whose rule were the kings living?

(a) sovereign rule
(b) queen’s rule
(c) king’s rule
(d) Under the thumb rule of the British
38. On which issue is the story The Tiger King a satire on?
(a) on people
(b) on animals
(c) on birds
(d) on the false pride, ego and stubbornness of the powerful people
39. From where did the author derive his name?

(a) from the preffix of his name
(b) from the suffix of his name
(c) from the suffix of his wife’s name
(d) from the suffix of his and his wife’s name
40. Who is the author of The Tiger King?

(a) Ramaswamy Aiyer Krishnamurthy
(b) Charles Dickens
(c) Kamladas
(d) None
41. Why did The King not permit British officer to click a picture with the dead
tiger?
(a) to prove his might
(b) he was scared of the British
(c) because it was against the rules of his state
(d) None
42. How has the writer has proved the futility of king’s desire?
(a) by showing him a victim of a toy tiger
(b) by showing him as a powerful king
(c) by making the king kill 99 tigers
(d) All
43. What is the moral of the story?

(a) Power
(b) Power makes us powerful
(c) Power is meaningless before destiny
(d) All
44. What proved the Dewan’s resourcefulness?
(a) his wits
(b) his intelligence
(c) his ability to manage a tiger in Madras
(d) none
45. Why did the Maharaja double the tax?
(a) In his rage against the disappearance of the sheep and to find 100th tiger
(b) to raise the funds
(c) to increase the income of the state
(d) none
1.6. Key
Q. Q. Q. Q.
No. No. No. No.
1 A 15 C 29 A 43 C
2 B 16 B 30 D 44 C
3 B 17 B 31 B 45 A
4 A 18 A 32 C
5 B 19 B 33 D
6 B 20 C 34 B
7 D 21 A 35 C
8 A 22 B 36 C
9 B 23 D 37 D
10 B 24 A 38 D
11 C 25 A 39 D
12 B 26 D 40 A
13 D 27 D 41 C
14 A 28 A 42 A
1.1. Introduction:
‘Journey to the end of the earth’ lesson is written by ‘Tushani Doshi’.
1. Tushani Doshi
1.3. Summary:
Journey to End of the Earth Summary will help you learn all about this travelogue in
detail. This travelogue is about the author’s experience when she goes on a journey to
Antarctica. The author is Tishani Joshi. The journey to Antarctica commences on the
Russian Vehicle. Geoff Green was leading it. Moreover, Geoff Green is the one who
takes interest in taking students on educational trips. Through this, helps them discover
the end of the Earth. Thus, over here, the author went to Antarctica for educational
purpose as well as learns more about the place. This study tour turns out to be very
insightful as students learn about the impact of global warming. Moreover, they also
learn how a little step can impact the environment greatly. In addition, they also learn
about the ice sheets of West Antarctica and if they will melt or not.
The story begins with the author on a journey in a Russian vessel. It was headed
towards Antarctica. We learn that the author has travelled about 100 hours in a car,
aeroplane as well as the ship. The main objective of this trip is to learn everything in
detail about Antarctica. Further, we learn about her two-week stay there and what all is
present there. The place stores 90% of the earth’s total ice volumes with no trees,
buildings or anything. It has 24-hour austral summer light. Moreover, it is covered in
silence.
This makes the author wonder about the time when India and Antarctica were the
same landmass’s part. We learn about the existence of a southern supercontinent,
Gondwana. It existed for six hundred and fifty million years ago. We learn that the
climate back then was much warmer and also sustained a huge variety of flora and
fauna.
All this was before the arrival of human beings. Moreover, for 500 million years,
Gondwana flourished. Thus, after the extinction of dinosaurs, the landmass separated
into countries, as we know today. Moreover, we also learn about the reality of climate
change. Similarly, the author believes that to study the impact closely, one must make
a visit to Antarctica.
After that, we learn about Antarctica’s ecosystem and how it lacks biodiversity.
Moreover, it is the place to observe if you wish to see what consequences a little action
can bring about in the environment. If the ozone layer keeps depleting at the present
rate, it will impact the lives of the inhabitants of the area like the sea-animals and birds.
Moreover, it will also impact the global carbon cycle.
We learn about the contributors to climate change, like the burning of fossil fuels
and more. All this is damaging the quality of Antarctica and this may cause immense
danger to human life. Moreover, we also learn about it through examples of
phytoplankton. Finally, the story ends with the author observing some seals sunbathing
on ice. It makes her wonder whether this beauty will be reserved for the years to come,
or will the future be catastrophic.
1.4. Comments:
This lesson shows, the adventurous expedition to Antarctica, and the impact of
Global Warming on the Antarctica, by the narrator, ‘Tushani Doshi’.
1. How does visit to Antartica help to understand the effect of global warming?
(a) here one can see quickly melting glaciers and collapsing ice-shelves
(b) it is filled with snow
(c) it is away from urban rush
(d) it has hidden treasures.
2. The geographical phenomena is going to help us to know the history of
mankind_________
(a) by showing the global warming
(b) by showing the imapacts of global warming
(c) by telling the age of existence of human beings on the earth
(d) by exploring the world of ice
3. Who is the author of the lesson Journey to the end of the Earth?
(a) Tishani Doshi
(b) Kamla Das
(c) Jane Austen
(d) Chitra Das
4. What is the meaning of ‘epiphany’?
(a) a moment of shock
(b) a moment of great sadness
(c) cacophony
(d) a moment of sudden and great revelation or realization
5. The name of the programme that takes high school students to the end of the
earth is ________.
(a) Students of Ice
(b) Students for Ice
(c) Students above Ice
(d) Students on Ice
6. What does the author mean by “In that short amount of time, we’ve managed
to create quite a ruckus”?
(a) progress made by human race
(b) destruction and disturbance caused by human race
(c) stunning achievements of human race
7. The synonym of ‘ubiquitous’ is __________.
(a) abstract
(b) complex
(c) omnipresent
(d) simple
8. The Drake Passage was created because of _________.
(a) India drifting northwards
(b) South America drifting off to join North America
(c) North America drifting off to join South America
(d) India’s collision with Asia
9. Gondwana existed roughly around ___________.
(a)110 million years ago
(b)450 million years ago
(c)250 million years ago
(d) 650 million years ago
10. The narrator was aboard on the ship named ______
(a) World carrier
(b) Academic Discovery
(c) Akademik Shokalskiy
(d) Denim Explorer
11. What was the name of the Southern Super continent?
(a) Asia
(b) Asia Pacific
(c) Northern pole
(d) Gondwana
12. What gives us an insight into the world’s geological history?
(a) Study of Northern Pole
(b) Study of Southern Pole
(c) Study of Antarctica Continent
(d) None
13. Which program was the author a part of?
(a) Tour Program
(b) Research Program
(c) Students on Ice Program
(d) None
14. Why is Antarctica completely pure?
(a) Because of ice
(b) because of avalanches
(c) because of melting glaciers
(d) because of non-existence of humans
15. What used to flourish on Antarctica years back?
(a) Animals
(b) Tigers
(c) Humans
(d) Fauna and flora
16. What kind of atmosphere does Antarctica have?
(a) coldest
(b) driest
(c) windiest
(d) All these
17. What was the center of the Gondwana Supercontinent?
(a) Asia
(b) Pacific
(c) Antarctica
(d) All these
18. How were the Himalayas formed?
(a) by a collapse in the Gondwana supercontinent
(b) by evolution
(c) by deforestation
(d) All these
19. How has the man created ruckus on the earth?
(a) by travelling
(b) by encroaching the earth
(c) by visiting the iceland
(d) none
20. What disturbed the silence of the continent?
(a) The birds
(b) the animals
(c) the humans
(d) Avalanches
21. Why Tishani Doshi was filled with relief and wonder when she first set his foot
on the continent?
(a) to see its white expanse
(b) to see its vastness and immense white expanse
(c) to see the isolation from the rest of the world
(d) All these
22. What was the objective of the Students on the Ice program?
(a) to make them travel
(b) to make them see snow
(c) to make them see white expanse in the form of ice
(d) to enable them to think differently to save the planet
23. What was Gondwana?
(a) An ancient tourist place
(b) an ancient city in Antarctica
(c) An ancient super continent
(d) None
24. Who was Geoff Green?
(a) Geoff was a Fellow of the Royal Canadian Geographical Society and The
Explorers Club.
(b) A scientist
(c) A traveller
(d) A tourist guide
25. Why has the author called her journey as Journey to the End of the Earth’?
(a) because it was too far
(b) because no human race or plants exist
(c) crosses nine time zones, six checkpoints, three water bodies and many
ecospheres to reach there.
(d) All these
26. Why is the Antarctica the right place to understand the past, present and
future?
(a) because half million-year-old carbon records are trapped in its layers of
ice.
(b) because of layers of ice
(c) because of cold
(d) none
27. Which programme aimed to take high school students to the end of the world?
(a) The author’s delight
(b) Teachers delight
(c) School program
(d) Geoff Green’s ‘Students on Ice’ programme.
28. Why is a visit to Antartica important to understand the effect of global
warming?
(a) because here one can see quickly melting glaciers and collapsing ice-
shelves
(b) because it is filled with snow
(c) because it is away from urban rush
(d) None
29. What is the purpose of The Journey to the world’s most preserved place,
Antarctica?
(a) to tour the world
(b) to see the beauty of the earth
(c) to know the geography more closely
(d) to sensitize the young minds towards climatic change
30. Who is the author of the lesson?
(a) Tishani Doshi
(b) Kamla Das
(c) Jane Austen
(d) Chitra Das
31. If we want to know our earth, the human race and its past, present, and future
where should we go?
(a) Northern Pole
(b) Southern Pole
(c) Gondwana
(d) Antarctica Continent
32. How does the geographical phenomena help us?
(a) how small changes cause big things to happen
(b) it makes us study
(c) it helps us to watch everything closely
(d) none
33. Which program was a life changing program?
(a) Tour and Travels
(b) Know Antarctica
(c) Know your earth
(d) Students on Ice
34. Where is the world’s geological history trapped?
(a) on southern pole
(b) On Northern Pole
(c) on Asia Continent
(d) On Antarctica Continent
35. Where does 90% of earth’s total ice exist?
(a) Pacific region
(b) Southern oceans
(c) Northern pole
(d) Antarctica Continent
1.6. Key
Q. Q. Q. Q.
No. No. No. No.
1 A 10 C 19 B 28 A
2 C 11 D 20 D 29 D
3 A 12 C 21 D 30 A
4 D 13 C 22 D 31 D
5 D 14 D 23 C 32 A
6 B 15 D 24 A 33 D
7 C 16 D 25 C 34 D
8 B 17 C 26 B 35 D
9 D 18 A 27 D
4. The Enemy
1.1. Introduction:
‘The Enemy’ lesson is written by ‘Pearl S Buck’.
1. Dr. Sadao 2. Hana 3. American Soilder 4. General
1.3. Summary:
The Enemy summary will help you greatly in studying the chapter in detail. It is
about a Japanese surgeon whose name is Sadao. He studies in America and marries
a Japanese girl. World War II broke during that time. All the doctors were under the
obligation to go to the Japanese army. However, Sadao stayed back with an old
general. As the old general was ailing, he was in need of Sadao. However, we learn
that how an America Navy man finds his way in Sadao’s life. As the soldier was not
well, Sadao offers him medical help. Sadao was not willing to help the enemy but he
does. He also knows the danger he has got himself into by helping the enemy. Due to
this, Sadao conspires to kill the soldier in his sleep. However, Sadao decides to save
him because of humanity and brotherhood.
The Enemy is a story written by Pearl Sydenstricker Buck. It is about a Japanese
surgeon, Sadao. He went to study in America and meets a Japanese girl, Hana, there.
He marries her and brings her back to Japan to settle down. This was the time of World
War II. Thus, all the doctors were called upon to serve the Japanese army. However,
they allowed Sadao to stay back. It was because he was tending to the old General
who was on his death bed. However, one night, an incident changes his life. He
encounters an American Navy-man who is injured by a gun-shot and dying.
Although Sadao was in no mind to help the enemy, he takes in the young soldier
and provides him with medical assistance. He keeps him at his house to avert any
danger coming his way. However, he knew he has opened doors to danger by helping
the enemy. His servants decide to leave Sadao too. As the days kept passing, the
soldier was now beginning to gain his health back. Now that the soldier was no longer
Sadao’s patient, he decides to kill him off in his sleep. He informs the General of the
American and thus the General reciprocates. They decide to send private assassins to
kill the American soldier.
While waiting for the assassins, Sadao starts noticing it was delaying. However,
during this course, humanity in Sadao arises. He realizes that he is a human being at
the end of the day. He now recognizes the value of human life as well as universal
brotherhood. Thus, this opens his mind which was limited to race, boundaries, and
wars. Finally, he comes to the conclusion that the American soldier is not his enemy
just because he belongs to another country. Thus, he rises above his prejudices and
does the right thing by helping the American soldier escape, thus saving his life.
1.4. Comments:
This lesson shows, humanity is more important than patriotism in our life.
1] Why did Dr. Sadao go to America?
A- to study medicine
B- as a tourist
C- to find a wife
D- none of these
2] Why did Dr. Sadao treat the soldier when he was from the enemy's nationality?
A- he was a doctor
B- it was against his professional ethics
C- as a doctor he could not let anyone die
D- all of these
3] Who was Dr.Sadao?
A- an Iranian Doctor
B- an American doctor
C- a Japanese doctor
D- none of these
4] How did Hana help Dr. Sadao?
A- by assisting him
B- by giving him money
C- by giving him tools
D- by working as a nurse
5] Why did the General not pass orders to arrest Dr. Sadao for sheltering a white
man?
A- he was ignorant
B- he was a traitor
C- General needed his services
D- none of these
6] What does this chapter revolve around?
A- Japan USA War

B- China Japan war
C- India Japan war
D- all of these
7] Where did Dr. Sadao meet Hana?
A- in Japan, at school
B- at a neighbour’s house
C- at a relative’s house
D- in USA, at a professor’s house
8] In the end, what is Dr. Sadao reminded of?
A- the general’s promise

B- faces of the Americans in his life
C- his family
D- none of these
9] Why was Dr. Sadao irritable with the man who lay like dead under his knife?
A- he was not able to attend to Hana

B- he could not cure the man
C- the kids needed him
D- none of these
10] Why did Hana wash the wounded man herself?
A- she refused to take Yumi’s help

B- she was a trained nurse
C- her servants refused to help an American enemy soldier
D- none of these
11] How did Dr. Sadao ensure that the American Soldier had left safely?
A- by escorting him
B- by seeing no signal of flashlight
C- by giving him a call
D- none of these
12] How did Dr. Sadao ensure that the American Soldier had left safely?
A- by escorting him
B- by seeing no signal of flashlight
C- by giving him a call
D- none of these
13] What kind of person was Dr. Sadao's father?
A- a serious man
B- a jolly good man
C- very strict
D- a true patriot and traditional person
14] Seeing the messenger, what was Hana's reaction?
A- she got frightened

B- she thought he had come to arrest her husband
C- she was worried that the servants had informed the police
D- all of these
15] What kind of person was the General?
A- a kind hearted man

B- a wise man
C- a selfish man
D- None of these
16] Why did the General spare the White American soldier?
A- to spare his own life

B- he himself was in pain
C- needed Dr. Sadao's help
D- all of these
17] How did Dr. Sadao get rid of the American Soldier?
A- by giving him instructions

B- by giving him flashlight to use in times of distress
C- by asking him to row to the island
D- all of these
18] Why was Dr. Sadao not sent to the battlefield?
A- because he had no interest

B- he didn't love his country
C- he was supposed to take care of the General
D- all of these
19] What was General's plan for getting rid of the American soldier?
A- to help him escape through the sea route

B- to inform his country
C- to get him assassinated by some private assassins
D- none of these
20] Why did the servants leave the Doctor's house?
A- they did not get the salary

B- they were mistreated
C- the doctor had sheltered an American soldier
D- all of these
21] Where did Dr. Sadao find American soldier?
A- in the park
B- in the battlefield
C- outside his house
D- none of these
22] What idea do you form of Dr. Sadao after reading the lesson?
A- compassionate person
B- excellent doctor
C- sincere and responsible
D- all of these
23] Who Is The Author Of The Lesson The Enemy?
A- PearlS.Buck
B- Anees jung
C- Prem chand
D- None
24] Why did Dr.Sadao treat the soldier when he was from enemy’s nationality?
A- He was a doctor
B- It was against his professional ethics
C- as a doctor he could not let anyone die
D- All
25] Why did Dr.’s wife feel distressed?
A- seeing many patients

B- Seeing General’s reaction
C- Seeing the orders
D- Seeing Whiteman’s blood
26] Why did the surgeon speak sharply to his wife?
A- to get things he needed

B- to get her help
C- to stop any disturbance that could lead to harm the wounded man.
D- None
27] What was Hana’s reaction over her husband’s words?
A- She held her mouth with her hands and vomited outside the operation room
B- she shouted
C- she cried
D- she stopped helping him
28] Why did Sadao marry a Japanese girl only?
A- because he liked Japanese

B- he didn’t like any other nationality
C- Because of his father’s fear
D- because he didn’t want to upset his father
29] When the assassins did not come, Sadao decided to
A- kill the prisoner himself

B- help him to escape
C- hand him over to the police
D- send him to America
30] he General only wanted Sadao to operate upon him because
A- Sadao was very skilled

B- General did not like any other doctor
C- General was his close friend
D- General did not want to go abroad for surgery
31] Where was the wound mark on the prisoner’s body?
A- Right side of his lower back

B- Left side of his lower back
C- Right side of his stomach
D- Left side of his stomach
32] What were the words written on the battered cap?
A- U.S. Army
B- U.S. Navy
C- U.S. Air Force
D- U.S. Prisoner of War
33] Dr Sadao knew that his ...........was his father’s chief concern.
A- Education
B- Sports
C- Teaching
D- None
34] Dr Sadao became famous not only as a surgeon, but also as a ........
A- Sportsmen
B- Scientist
C- Police officer
D- None
35] The day Sadao opened the soldier’s stitches, he
A- called the police

B- typed out a letter to the Chief of Police
C- made him run away
D- tied him up
36] All the servants in Sadao’s household
A- were happy with their master

B- felt that he deserved a reward
C- were very critical of him
D- wanted him to let the soldier die
37] Sadao had been a victim in America, of

A- racial prejudice
B- unruly mob
C- impartial teachers
D- unfriendly classmates
38] The escape for Sadao would be in
A- a Korean fishing boat
B- a Russian fishing boat
C- a Chinese fishing boat
D- a Japanese fishing boat
39] The General wanted to send his private assassins to Sadao’s house to
A- kill Hana
B- kill Sadao
C- kill the prisoner
D- kill the gardener
40] On the seventh day after the operation
A- all the servants of Sadao left together
B- the police raided the house
C- the prisoner ran away
D- Sadao told the General about the prisoner
41] The name of the prisoner as told to Hana was
A- Tom
B- Henry
C- Nicholas
D- None
42] Sadao kept addressing the soldier as
A- my enemy
B- my brother
C- my buddy
D- my friend
43] The servants wanted the master
A- to operate upon the soldier
B- to heal the wounds
C- to throw him in the sea
D- to let him just die
44] Sadao and Hana decided to take the soldier
A- inside their house
B- to the police station
C- to the movie theatre
D- to the park
45] Sadao went to America when he was
A- 42 years old
B- 22 years old
C- 50 years old
D- 18 years old
46] ’Those islands yonder, they are the steppingstones to the future for Japanese
words were spoken by Sadao’s
A- father
B- mother
C- nephew
D- wife
47] What was the doctor’s primary concern?
A- To show loyalty to his country
B- To save the patient’s life
C- To prove his skills a s a doctor
D- To save his own life
48] Who are the ‘real’ enemies referred to in the chapter ‘The Enemy’?
A- Dr Sadao and the prisoner
B- Dr Sadao and the servants
C- Hana and the servants
D- Japan and America
49] Which Adjective best describes Dr Sadao’s actions?
A- Polite
B- Obedient
C- Humane
D- Passive
1.6. Key
Q. Q. Q. Q.
No. No. No. No.
1 A 15 C 29 B 43 D
2 D 16 D 30 A 44 A
3 C 17 B 31 A 45 B
4 D 18 C 32 B 46 A
5 C 19 C 33 A 47 B
6 A 20 C 34 B 48 D
7 D 21 C 35 C 49 C
8 B 22 D 36 C
9 A 23 A 37 A
10 C 24 D 38 A
11 D 25 D 39 C
12 B 26 C 40 A
13 D 27 A 41 A
14 D 28 D 42 D
1.1. Introduction:
‘On the face of it’ is written by ‘Susan Hill’.
1. Derry 2. Lamb
1.3. Summary:
On the Face of It Summary – This is a play. Moreover, it is about the friendship

between a young boy, Derry and an old man, Mr. Lamb. Because of his facial scar, he
is very upset and feels that people do not want to associate with him. So, to hide from
people he gets into the old man’s garden but panics when he meets him. Mr. Lamb put
him at ease and advise him to accept life as it comes. Further, he as a more cheerful
and optimistic approach to life. Also, he conveys Derry to live life to the fullest and
avoid bitterness. He further advises him to accept life as it is. However, Derry was
moved by Mr. Lamb’s attitude and spirit. Besides, when Derry tries to come out of his
shell, he met a great loss of the only person who makes friends with him.
The story starts with a teenage boy (Derry) who enters a garden. Due to an
accident when acid befell on his face and got burned on one side. He was afraid of
facing people that’s why he has gone there to hide. Because other people tease him
for having such a face. Upon entering the garden he finds someone already presents
there. Hence, he tries to leave but the old man, Mr. Lamb (owner of the garden) stops
him.
Not arriving without permission Derry feels guilty. However, Mr. Lamb welcomes
him in his garden and tells him not to leave just because of his presence. People don’t
like his face that’s what Derry think and that’s why he wants to leave. Then again Mr.
Lamb asks him to stay there. After that, they start having a conversation that how no
one like Derry and how he hates people behaving like this with him. Also, Mr. Lamb
attempts to console him.
Mr. Lamb state to him that he has a tin leg and how kids make fun of him. Yet he
enjoys his life to the fullest. Their conversation went on and on and reveal various
things about Derry’s fear, hatred, and depression about being in such a condition. Also,
Mr. Lamb keeps on telling him to think about the positive things. Before long they
became friends and Mr. Lamb asks Derry to assist him in plucking the crab apples of
his garden.
Derry state to him that he had come too far from his home and hadn’t told anything
about this to his mother. So, Mr. Lamb asks him to take permission from his mother.
Bur Derry finds it difficult and this leads to a small argument between both of them.
Eventually, Derry agrees and tells Mr. Lamb that he would come back after asking
permission from his mother. However, his mother does not want him to go but he came
back to fulfill his promise.
In the meantime, Mr. Lamb climbs a ladder on his own to pluck the crab apples as
he was sure that Derry would not return. Moreover, because of his disability, it was
difficult for him to climb. So, he slips from the ladder and dies. On the other hand, Derry
returns to the garden to help him but on entering the garden he sees him lying on the
floor. Further, he attempts to move him but didn’t get any response from him. In the
end, he came to know that he is dead and starts crying.
1.4. Comments:
This lesson shows, how we can remain positive even in the adverse conditions.
1. If Derry didn’t go back, he was scared ___

(a) Mr Lamb would not let him in
(b) Mr Lamb would make other friends
(c) he wouldn’t be able to pick crabapples
(d) he’d never go anywhere in the world again
2. How far is Derry’s house from Mr Lamb’s?
(a) A mile
(b) 2 miles
(c) 3 miles
(d) 4 miles
3. The boy’s name is __ but he prefers
(a) Dennis
(b) Derek
(c) Derham
(d) Derrain
4. Mr. Lamb claimed he had ______ friends
(a) hundreds of
(b) no
(c) two or three
(d) a couple of
5. Derry felt Mr Lamb said ___ things
(a) peculiar
(b) sad
(c) funny
(d) profound
6. Derry didn’t like people
(a) being friendly
(b) being afraid of him
(c) being affectionate
(d) being sympathetic
7. The gate to Mr Lamb’s house is
(a) always shut
(b) heavily guarded
(c) barricaded
(d) always open
8. The terrible woman said about Derry that it was a face———-
(a) no one could love
(b) everyone could love
(c) only a mother could love
(d) kids would be scared of
9. What ate Derry’s face away?
(a) Mites
(b) Disease
(c) An accident
(d) Acid
10. How old is Derry?
(a) 13
(b) 14
(c) 15
(d) 16
11. Mr Lamb says. it’s all __ , Beauty and the Beast.
(a) relative
(b) unimportant
(c) God’s Grace
(d) destiny
12. ‘Why is one green growing plant called a ___ and another a flower?’ asks Mr
Lamb
(a) thorn
(b) grass
(c) weed
(d) fruit
13. Mr Lamb felt the name children called him by——
(a) suited him
(b) did not suit him
(c) was outrageous
(d) was disgusting
14. Mr. Lambfeels one must——-
(a) survive
(b) struggle with disability
(c) live fully
(d) look for sympathy
15. Derry is ___ when Mr Lamb welcomes him to his garden repulsed
(a) surprised
(b) angry
(c) happy
(d) curious
16. Mr Lamb changed the subject and started talking about ___
(a) apple picking
(b) bees singing
(c) beauty and the beast
(d) his tin leg
17. One side of Derry’s face was ___
(a) marred by scars
(b) had spots
(c) was darker
(d) burnt by acid
18. Mr Lamb believed that Derry wanted to turn back because of he ___
(a) he had been caught
(b) he was ugly
(c) he was afraid of Mr Lamb
(d) he had something to hide
19. Why did Derry enter Mr Lamb’s garden?
(a) He wanted to see the flowers
(b) He wanted to see the bees
(c) He wanted to steal crabapples
(d) Out of curiosity
20. Derry entered Mr Lamb’s garden by __
(a) climbing over the wall
(b) climbing through the window
(c) walked in through the open gate
(d) walking in stealthily
21. In what sense was friendship between Lamb and Derry was fruitful?
(a) he gave him fruit to eat
(b) his maturity
(c) both were good companions and Lamb’s mature experiences and words
helped Derry to have a positive view of life
(d) none
22. What did Mr. Lamb tell about himself?
(a) he had a tin leg
(b) still he was happy
(c) he never mind even if children teased him
(d) All these
23. What complex does Derry suffer from?
(a) Superiority
(b) oedipus
(c) inferiority
(d) All these
24. Why did Derry always find a vacant place to live?
(a) he liked to be alone
(b) was scared of people
(c) because of inferiority complex as he had a burnt face
(d) All these
25. What did Derry learn from the fairy tale?
(a) how to look beautiful
(b) how to make friends
(c) learnt to love and appreciate himself
(d) All these
26. Why did Derry like to be alone?
(a) because of burnt face
(b) because he couldn’t bear with people’s comments
(c) because of inferiority complex
(d) All these
27. Why did Mr. Lamb keep the door of his garden open?
(a) to let the people come in
(b) to get fresh air
(c) to avoid opening the door again and again
(d) to have fine contact with the outer world and enjoy
28. How did Derry burn his face?
(a) in a fire
(b) with a gas stove
(c) hot water
(d) acid burnt his face
29. What kind of a garden did Mr. Lamb have ?
(a) cherry
(b) plum
(c) peach
(d) Apple garden
30. Why did Mr. Lamb call Derry blessed?
(a) because he was young
(b) because he had a mother
(c) because he had friends
(d) because except a burnt face he had a perfectly healthy body
31. Why did Derry share his fear with Mr. Lamb?
(a) because he had a garden
(b) because he was old
(c) because he understood him and was friendly
(d) none
32. Why did Derry go to Mr. Lamb at the end?
(a) because of his wish to live a free life
(b) he wanted apples
(c) he wanted to play in the garden
(d) none
33. How did Mr. Lamb pick apples?
(a) bending down
(b) with the help of his servant
(c) with the help of children
(d) using a ladder and a stick
34. Why didn’t Mr. Lamb feel hurt by children’s comments?
(a) because he thought that it suits him
(b) he loves children
(c) he likes them
(d) he want them to play in his garden
35. Why did Mr. Lamb keep the door of his garden open?
(a) to keep an eye over his garden
(b) to be safe
(c) to chat with the people and the children who come there to take fruit
(d) none
36. Why did Derry go to Mr. Lamb’s garden?
(a) to steal apples
(b) to speak to Mr. Lamb
(c) to help the old man
(d) to feel that place
37. What unites Mr. Lamb and Derry?
(a) their age
(b) their woes
(c) their life stories
(d) their physical impairment
38. Why did Mr. Lamb help Derry?
(a) because both were victims of war
(b) both were sad
(c) both were victims of physical impairment
(d) because he wanted Derry to change his view of life.
39. Who is Mr. Lamb?
(a) a young man
(b) a middleaged man
(c) an old man
(d) none
40. Who has written On The Face Of It?
(a) Susan Hill
(b) William Sydne
(c) Salman Rushdie
(d) Chetan Bhagat
41. What draws Derry towards Lamb?
(a) his appearance
(b) his grief
(c) his positive outlook
(d) All these
42. What specific things about Mr. Lamb does Derry notice?
(a) A man of firm resolution
(b) always remains happy inspite of his deformity
(c) had a positive outlook
(d) All these
43. Why did Mr. Lamb not have curtains in his house?
(a) it’s difficult to wash
(b) too expensive
(c) because he wanted visitors in his house
(d) none
44. Why was Derry startled entering the garden?
(a) because of trees
(b) because of apples
(c) because he expected no one else but seeing Mr.Lamb
(d) none
45. How was Mr. Lamb happy inspite of his disability?
(a) because of his acceptance of it
(b) because he was wise
(c) because he had grown old
(d) All these
1.6. Key
Q. Q. Q. Q.
No. No. No. No.
1 D 15 A 29 D 43 C
2 C 16 A 30 D 44 C
3 B 17 B 31 C 45 D
4 A 18 C 32 A
5 A 19 D 33 D
6 B 20 A 34 A
7 D 21 C 35 C
8 C 22 D 36 D
9 D 23 C 37 D
10 B 24 D 38 D
11 A 25 D 39 C
12 C 26 D 40 A
13 A 27 D 41 C
14 C 28 D 42 D
1.1. Introduction:
‘Memories of Childhood’ is divided into two stories. ‘The Cutting of My Long Hair’ by
‘Zitkala Sa’ and ‘We too are Human Beings’ by ‘Bama’
This lesson shows how the marginalized sections of women were illtreated and
exploited in the name of education and caste system.
1.3. Summary:
The Memories of Childhood summary deals with two extracts which belong to two
different autobiographical episodes. Furthermore, these two episodes deal with the
lives of two women whose names are Zitkala Sa and Bama. Both of them had to face
hardship and are victims of social discrimination. Zitkala Sa had to deal with racial
discrimination while Bama had to suffer caste discrimination. In both the extracts, the
writers explore their childhood and there is a reflection on their relationship with the
prevalent culture. The culture was harsh towards these women and treated them in a
harsh manner in their childhood. Both these accounts how these women went through
their oppression. Also, there was resistance by both the narrators in their own ways.
Zitkala-Sa and Bama were young but not so young that they were naïve about the
mainstream culture’s evil scheme. They became rebellious due to their bitter childhood
experience.
The first part explores the account of Simmons. Simmons was an American Indian
who was against social discrimination towards American Indians. She throws light on
her first-day experience at the Carlisle Indian School. Zitkala SA‘s first day at school is
bad and unpleasant. The customs of the place were new and strange to her. Moreover,
there was pressure on her to wear clothes that were not reputable in her culture.
She does not understand the rules at the breakfast table. Consequently, she makes
several mistakes. There was a requirement for everyone to pull a chair at the first bell.
Zitkala sat down while others were still standing. Furthermore, everyone had to sit
down at the second bell. However, Zitkala kept standing even when the second bell
rang. A feeling of humiliation came in her. When another bell rang, she didn’t do
anything because of fear of making a mistake. She then cried due to these mistakes
and humiliation. She was fearful of the woman with a pale face.
Her friend Judewin talked to her about the cutting of her hair. In her culture,
captured unskilled warriors had shingled hair and mourners kept short hair. She hid but
was dragged and tied to a chair so as to cut her long hair. There was a crushing of her
spirit due to this act. Moreover, this cruelty made her realize the comfort of her home.
The second part is a part of the ‘Karukku’ autobiography by Bama – a Tamil Dalit.
Bama was an innocent child who was spending her childhood in a village. She used to
walk back home When school was over, she had to do walking to reach home.
Furthermore, the normal duration of the walk was ten minutes. However, she made her
walk for a duration of half an hour to one hour. This was because she took pleasure in
watching the various fun games.
Her innocence was lost when she had to deal with the evil of untouchability very
early in life. One day an elder of her community carrying food packet holding it by its
strings. She felt amused but her brother explained that they belonged to a low caste.
The belief was that the food packet will become impure if there was touching by a
lower caste person. Her brother wanted to determine his caste as he asked about the
street he lived in. He told Bama that in order to win dignity, she must work hard to win
the honor. Bama was a hard-working student and stood first in her class.
1.4. Comments:
This lesson shows, how British tried to erase the idigenious culture of Red Indian
Americans, and what kind of demunastic manner the caste system affects Indian
people.
1. Bama’s brother told her that if she wanted to make progress, she had to
(a) learn to cook
(b) study
(c) learn to stitch and knit
(d) learn to drive
2. Bama was very rebellious and the thought of oppression at the hands of
upper castes
(a) infuriated her
(b) provoked her to slap someone
(c) made her abusive
(d) made her want to murder someone
3. Bama’s elder brother was studying at
(a) school
(b) college
(c) university
(d) medical college
4. She had thought that the man carrying the bag was only
(a) making a game out of carrying the parcel
(b) trying to make her laugh
(c) obeying orders
(d) not touching it because it was hot
5. The man was carrying
(a) pakoras
(b) samosas
(c) jalebis
(d) vadai or green banana bhaji
6. One day the author was attracted by the sight of
(a) two riders on a horse
(b) a monkey performing tricks
(c) cattle treading out the grain from straw
(d) dogs fighting with cats
7. There would always be some kind of entertainment
(a) in the school
(b) in the church
(c) in the bazaar
(d) in the house
8. Bama used to dawdle along from school because she was
(a) too slow
(b) crippled
(c) distracted by lots of things on the way
(d) unable to wait for the school bus
9. The author Bama felt she already had experienced the humiliation due to
(a) dark skin
(b) short height
(c) poverty
(d) untouchability
10. The author was being stared at by people and she felt she
(a) looked pretty
(b) looked terrible
(c) had suffered extreme indignities
(d) looked like a model
11. We have to submit because they are strong’. These words were said by
(a) Zitkala-Sa
(b) Judewin
(c) Marry-Ann
(d) Christine
12. Short hair, in the author’s tribe, was worn only by
(a) mourners
(b) old people
(c) young kids
(d) elderly women
13. While others ate, the author
(a) laughed
(b) watched them
(c) cried
(d) frowned
14. Everyone kept standing except
(a) the teacher
(b) the matron
(c) the caretaker
(d) the author
15. As the bell rang, the whole group of pupils
(a) sat on the floor
(b) drew a chair from under the table
(c) sat on the stools
(d) knelt down on the ground
16. The Indian girls wore
(a) clinging dresses
(b) nightgowns
(c) trousers
(d) skirts
17. Zitkala was being constantly observed by a woman who had
(a) a pale face
(b) fair complexion
(c) dark complexion
(d) angry look
18. Rama was a
(a) Bengali writer
(b) a Tamil Dalit
(c) an NRI
(d) a politician
19. Zitkala-Sa was a victim of
(a) racial prejudice
(b) serious crime
(c) rape
(d) a car accident
20. The lesson ‘Memories of Childhood’ is
(a) an autobiographical episode
(b) a fable
(c) a legend
(d) a play
21. Which family did Bama belog to?
(a) A jewish family
(b) a rich family
(c) a poor catholic family
(d) all
22. What was the name of the school where Zitkala studied?
(a) Carlisle Indian school
(b) Carlisle Western school
(c) Carlisle Indonesian school
(d) Carlisle American school
23. What was the author’s original name?
(a) Zitkala
(b) Zitkala sa
(c) Zitkala Bama
(d) Gertrude Simmons Bonnin
24. Why did Zitkala hide herself?
(a) to save herself
(b) to save herself from a woman
(c) to save herself from other children
(d) to stop people from cutting her hair
25. What was common between Bama and Zitkala?
(a) belonged to minority
(b) victims of cultural differences
(c) were struggling because of class
(d) all these
26. What sort of shows attracted Bama?
(a) shows by jugglers
(b) shows by monkeys
(c) shows by shopkeepers
(d) shows by political people
27. What did Judewin tell Zitkala?
(a) A new dress is comming
(b) she will meet her mother
(c) she will go to a new place
(d) her hair would be cut
28. Why did the Landlord’s man ask Bama’s brother on which street did they live?
(a) to know his class
(b) to know his background
(c) to know his work
(d) to know his caste
29. Why did Zitkala feel oppressed in her new establishment?
(a) because of indignities shown to her
(b) because she didn’t like the place
(c) she wanted to be with her mother
(d) none
30. Why did Zitkala find Eating by formula a hard trial?
(a) because of her inability to follow the bell taps
(b) because of too many rules
(c) because of restrictions
(d) none
31. Which community does Bama belong to?
(a) rich
(b) Brahmins
(c) Untouchable low caste
(d) None
32. Who told Bama that untouchability is a crime?
(a) her mother
(b) Zitkala and Sa
(c) her sister
(d) Her brother Annan
33. What did Zitkala mean by Eating By Formula?
(a) Set pattern of sitting
(b) set pattern of standing in lines
(c) set pattern of rules
(d) set pattern of eating decorum
34. What was Bama victim of?
(a) gender prejudice
(b) violence
(c) child abuse
(d) caste system
35. Why did Bama reach home in one hour in place of 10 minutes?
(a) she was watching shows on the road
(b) she was stopping at every shop
(c) she was enjoying all fun on the roads
(d) all these
36. How much time did Bama take to reach home?
(a) 2 hours
(b) 3hours
(c) 4hours
(d) 1 hour
37. What did the cutting of long hair of Zitkala Sa symbolise in the lesson?
(a) subjection to the rulers
(b) her wish to dominate
(c) her wish to get justice
(d) her wish to look modern
38. Who was Zitkala Sa?
(a) A tamilian
(b) A protester
(c) A native American
(d) None
39. What are the names of the two women?
(a) Zitkala Sa a Native American and Bama Tamilian Dalit
(b) Zitkala and Sa
(c) Ba and Ma
(d) Annan and Bama
40. Who is the author of the lesson Memories of childhood?
(a) Zitkala-Sa and Bama
(b) Emily Brontë
(c) Charles Dickens
(d) None
41. What had hurt Bama in the society?
(a) Political plays
(b) class students
(c) Road shows
(d) Practice of untouchability
42. What is Belfry?
(a) part of a bell tower
(b) part of a tower
(c) part of a music tower
(d) part of a silver tower
43. What did the story showcase?
(a) Discrimination on the basis of casteism specially with Indians in western
culture
(b) difference of Indian and Western culture
(c) views of minorities
(d) none
44. How did the scene in the market change Bama’s life?
(a) because of that she decided to study hard and stand against
discrimination
(b) she became fearful
(c) she became stubborn
(d) she was irritated
45. Why did Zitkala start crying at the dining table?
(a) she didn’t like the food
(b) she was a stranger
(c) because of eating by formula
(d) all these
1.6. Key
Q. Q. Q. Q.
No. No. No. No.
1 B 15 B 29 A 43 A
2 A 16 A 30 A 44 A
3 C 17 A 31 C 45 C
4 A 18 B 32 D
5 D 19 A 33 D
6 C 20 A 34 D
7 C 21 C 35 D
8 C 22 A 36 D
9 D 23 D 37 A
10 C 24 D 38 C
11 B 25 B 39 A
12 A 26 D 40 A
13 C 27 D 41 D
14 D 28 D 42 A
Epilogue
If you have successfully reached to this page, means you have fully covered all the
topics mentioned in the book. My suggestion is revise all the topics and practice MCQs
under each chapter repeatedly to develop a thorough understanding of all the topics.
If you want to watch the videos of “Class XI and Class XII’ lessons, poems, Short
Stories, Grammar and etc. you may refer to the below YouTube channel.
https://www.youtube.com/results?search_query=swamy+vijay
I have uploaded almost all videos for Class XI and Class XII on Reading, Writing
and Grammar topics.
And don’t forget to watch the below video for ‘Poetic Devices, Literary Terms and
Figures of Speech – used in Class XI and Class XII English text book, without fail.
https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=eXuZ0Hb1GZg
Thank You, for believing me and coming this far to check this page. I believe that I
haven’t disappointed you.
And I do believe that you will meet me in real life, once you become a PGT English
in Kendriya Vidyalaya Sangathan after clearing this LDCE without any doubt.
Prepare well and Perform well in the LDCE
With best wishes

Mr. Y Vijay Kumar Swamy
PGT English
Kendriya Vidyalaya Hebbal
Bengaluru
Date: 27.11.2022
[1] In examination point of view, mastering Eight Tenses and their structures are sufficient. Even in daily actions
we don’t use all the Twelve Tense.
[2] In the simple present tense, if the subject is third person singular then the verb takes, ‘s’ or ‘es. Eg: He
drinks coffee. But if the subject is First or Second person then verb remains as it is. This is the rule in English
grammar.
[3] Simple Future Tense geneally express pue future. If the future action is intentional then helping verb + ‘v5’ +
to infinitive should be used. He is reaching school tomorrow.
[4] This is the reason why ‘Future Continuous Tense’ and ‘Future perfect Tense’ are not asked in any
competitive exams in Inida. Because the answer in ‘simple present tense’ and answer in ‘simple future tense’ are
also correct. But for our understanding and to avoid confusion all planned actions with intention should be written in
helping verb + ‘v5’ + to infinitive form. In exams point of view this is very important.
[5] A transitive verb means a verb which has an object. An Intransitive verb doesn’t have any object.
[6] The description that comes after a linking verb is called a subject complement, because it completes—or
complements—the subject. Eg: Mrs. Swamy works smart. ‘Smart’ completes or complements the subject, “Mr.
Swamy’.
[7] Subject and object are ‘syntactic’ ideas. They change when the grammar of the sentences changes. Don't
confuse them with ‘semantic ideas’, which describe what's happening in the real world. Linguists talk about the
semantic rolesof agent and patient – the agent does a physical action, and the patient receives the result of that
action. ‘Swamy’ is the agent in both sentences: in both, he does some kicking. The ball is the patient in both: it
receives the kicking. But the patient is the object of the active sentence, and the subject of the
passive. Subject means it is at the front, the verb agrees with it, and so on – purely grammatical properties. The
passive voice is the transformation that changes the patient from object to subject.
[8] An assertive or declarative sentence which has a positivie information or statement is also known as
‘Positive Sentence’or a sentence in positive form.

KVS PGT ENGLISH - LIMITED DEPART - Mr. Y Vijaya Kumar Swamy

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

KVS PGT ENGLISH - LIMITED DEPART - Mr. Y Vijaya Kumar Swamy

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

KVS

Limited Departmental Competition Examination

Written & Designed by Mr. Y Vijaya Kumar Swamy

Copyright© Mr. Y Vijaya Kumar Swamy

Dheeraira Charity Foundation

Mr. Y Vijay Kumar Swamy

Mr. Y Vijaya Kumar Swamy

Section B - CREATIVE WRITING SKILLS

Section D – NCERT English Text Books for Class XI & XII

2) Note Making and Summarization:

1.4. Questions for Practice

(4) As the power of fashion to influence our lives grows, a number of

THE TREND SETTERS

THE TREND SETTERS

Whereas, In KVS PGT English Recruitment Examination, as I already mentioned,

1.2.1. Practice Questions:

Answers 1. C 2.D 3. C 4. B 5. D6. A 7. B

1. Study writing ability in a descriptive manner.

3.1. Business or Official Letters

2.3.1.1.1. What is a notice writing?

2.3.1.1.3. What is the format of a notice writing?

2.3.1.1.5. What are the mcqs from this topic?

1. What is the word limit of a notice for class XI & XII?

2. What is written on the top of the notice?

2.3.2.1.1. What is a poster preparation?

2.3.2.1. 5. What are the mcqs from this topic?

2. What should be part of a poster?

4. When creating posters the message of poster is considered?

2.3.3.1.1. What is a process writing?

1. It must be written in a step by step manner.

2.3.3.1.3. What is the correct format for Process writing?

2.3.2.1. 5. What are the mcqs from this topic?

2. What should be written at the top of poster?

4. What is the purpose of process writing?

5. What is a process writing?

2.3.4.1.1. What is an advertisement writing?

1. Classifieds and 2. Commercials

How many types of Classifieds are available?

2.3.4.1.3. How to write an advertisement?

Step 1: Post to which a candidate is required.

Step 1: Post to which a candidate is applying.

3. To let/Sales and Purchase

Step 1: Write down the particulars of the property, price range

4. Lost/Found/Lost & Found

Step 1:Age, weight, height and sex.

2.3.4.1.5. What are the mcqs from this topic?

3. In an advertisement, name and address of the company are ____ details.

4. Which Of The Given Advertisement Is Written By An Employer?

5. Classified advertisements are always written _______?

7. One must always add ____ at the end of an advertisement?

Answer key: 1. B 2. C 3. A 4. B 5. B 6. C 7. C 8. D 9.B

2.3.5.1.1 What is an Invitation writing?

An invitation writing is a request, a solicitation, or an attempt to get another person

1. Formal Invitation 2. Informal Invitation

2.3.5.1.3. How to write a Formal or Informal Invitation?

Name of the occasion or event

1. Must be written in the third person.

2.3.1.5.6. What are the main features of a Formal Invitation – Letter?

Must be written in the First person.

Must be written in an informal letter format.

2.3.1.5.9. What are the types of Replies to invitations available?

1. Acceptance 2. Refusal or Decline

2.3.4.1.10. What are the mcqs from this topic?